United States      Office of Research and    EPA/600/R-94/038e
         Environmental Protection   Development       April 1994 ,f
         Agency        Washington DC 20460       (~' '
v>EPA   Quality Assurance
         Handbook for
         Air Pollution
         Measurement
         Systems

         Volume V: Precipitation
         Measurement Systems
         (Interim Edition)

-------
                                              EPA-600/R-94/038e
'"'v
 j
             QUALITY ASSURANCE HANDBOOK

                            FOR

         AIR POLLUTION MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
   Volume V - Precipitation Measurement Systems
                    (Interim Edition)
             U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                OFFICE OF RESEARCH and DEVELOPMENT
     ATMOSPHERIC RESEARCH and ENVIRONMENTAL ASSESSMENT LABORATORY
            RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NORTH CAROLINA 27711

            U.S F-,,,-.-,                         Crv
              ' ~"                          $7) Printed on Recycled Paper
            ^^ J^-' „        ^ -'-IIUI


            ttfcW.' i.  o.,0..^, J2tt

-------
                             CONTENTS

Section

1    OVERVIEW OF THE INTERIM EDITION OF
     VOLUME V

2    PROGRAM PLANNING AND OBJECTIVES

     2.1  DETERMINATION OF MONITORING AND
          DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES

     2.2  DEVELOPMENT OF WORK PLAN

     2.3  PREPARATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE
          PROJECT PLAN

3    PROGRAM ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES

     3.1  PROGRAM OPERATIONS

     3 . 2  FIELD OPERATIONS

     3.3  LABORATORY OPERATIONS

     3.4  DATA MANAGEMENT OPERATIONS

     3.5  DESIGNATION OF QA RESPONSIBILITIES
          AND DUTIES

     3.6  REFERENCES

4    DOCUMENTATION

     4.1  DOCUMENT CONTROL

     4.2  INTERNAL DOCUMENTATION

     4.3  QA DOCUMENTATION

5    SITING

     5.1  NETWORK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS

     5.2  SITE SELECTION CRITERIA
          5.2.1  Baseline Station
          5.2.2  Regional Station
          5.2.3  Urban or Local Station

     5.3  SAMPLER AND RAIN GAUGE SITING CRITERIA

-------
                       CONTENTS (Continued)

Section

     5.4  STATION IDENTIFICATION AND
          CLASSIFICATION

     5 . 5  REFERENCES

     SITE DESCRIPTION REPORT

6    FIELD OPERATIONS

     6.1 FACILITIES

     6.2  METHOD SELECTION
          6.2.1  Precipitation Collectors and
                 Rain Gauges
          6.2.2  pH and Conductivity Apparatus,
 ">               Temperature Probe
          6.2.3  Balance or Graduated Cylinders

     6.3  ACCEPTANCE TESTING
          6.3.1  Precipitation Collectors and
                 Rain Gauges
          6.3.2  pH and Conductivity Meters

     6.4  SAMPLER AND RAIN GAUGE INSTALLATION
          AND OPERATION
          6.4.1  Routine Checks on Collector,
                 Rain Gauge and Site
          6.4.2  Corrective Action

     6.5  SAMPLING METHODOLOGY
          6.5.1  Sample Collection and Schedule
          6.5.2  Handling of Plastic Containers
          6.5.3  Sample Handling
          6.5.4  Sample Preservation and Storage

     6.6  FIELD MEASUREMENTS
          6.6.1  pH Determination Method
          6.6.2  Specific Conductance
                 Determination Method
          6.6.3  Temperature Measurements
          6.6.4  Gravimetric Measurements

     6 . 7  DOCUMENTATION

     6 .8  REFERENCES

-------
                       CONTENTS (Cont inued)

Section

7    LABORATORY OPERATIONS

     7.1  ANALYTICAL REAGENTS
          7.1.1  Purity Requirements
          7.1.2  Storage Requirements

     7.2  LABORATORY SUPPORT FOR THE FIELD

     7.3  LABORATORY LOGISTICS
          7.3.1  Sample Handling in
                 the Laboratory
          7.3.2  Laboratory Documentation
          7.3.3  Traceability of
                 Calibration Standards
          7.3.4  Preparation of Analyst's Spikes
 •>        7.3.5  Analytical Data Computations

     7.4  QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
          7.4.1  Real-Time Quality Control
                 Procedures
          7.4.2  Analysis and Evaluation of
                 Quality Control Samples
          7.4.3  Data Screening Tools
          7.4.4  Control Limits Determination
          7.4.5  Evaluation of QC Data

     7.5  EVALUATION OF LABORATORY
          PERFORMANCE
          7.5.1  Independent Internal Quality
                 Control
          7.5.2  Laboratory Audits

     7.6  REFERENCES

8    DATA HANDLING, VALIDATION, AND REPORTING

     8.1 DATA LOGISTICS

     8.2  SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
          8.2.1  Data Input
          8.2.2  Data Storage and Indexing
          8.2.3  Precipitation Data Bases

     8.3  DATA HANDLING AND PRELIMINARY
          SCREENING
          8.3.1  Quality Control of Data Handling
          8.3.2  Treatment of Outliers

-------
                       CONTENTS (Continued)

Section

8    8.4  DATA VALIDATION CRITERIA
          8.4.1  Detection Limit Flag
          8.4.2  Comparison of Sampler
                 and Rain Gauge Performance
          8.4.3  Unusual Ion Ratios
          8.4.4  Comparison of Anion and
                 Cation Equivalents
          8.4.5  Comparison of Measured and
                 Calculated Conductances

     8.5  DATA REPORTING
          8.5.1  Average Concentrations and
                 Deposition
          8.5.2  Median Concentrations
 •>        8.5.3  Reporting and Treating
                 Below-Detection-Limit Data
          8.5.4  Reporting of Out-of-Control
                 Data

     8.6  QC CHECKS ON FINAL DATA
          8.6.1  Time and Dates of Sampling
          8.6.2  Codes, Flags and Identifiers
          8.6.3  Overall Transcription Checks
          8.6.4  Spotcheck/Recalculation of Data
          8.6.5  QC Checks for Data Summaries

     8.7  REFERENCES

9    DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT

     9.1  EVALUATION OF FIELD OPERATIONS
          9.1.1  Measurement System Precision
          9.1.2  Accuracy of pH and Conductivity
                 Measurements
          9.1.3  Sampling Bucket Blanks

     9.2  EVALUATION OF LABORATORY OPERATIONS
          9.2.1  Analytical Precision
          9.2.2  Accuracy of Chemical Analysis

     9.3  DATA QUALITY REPORTING

     9.4  DATA FORMS

     9 . 5  REFERENCES

     MONTHLY FIELD AUDIT REPORT

     REPORT OF DUPLICATE ANALYSIS

-------
                       CONTENTS (Continued)

Section

10   ACID PRECIPITATION MONITORING PROGRAM
     EVALUATION

     10.1 PROGRAM AUDITS GUIDANCE
          10.1.1  Support Material
          10.1.2  Reporting

     10.2 OVERALL PROGRAM OPERATION
          QUESTIONNAIRE

     10.3 SITE DOCUMENTATION  EVALUATION
          10.3.1  General Guidance
          10.3.2  Site Evaluation Reporting
          10.3.3  Site Documentation Review

     10.4 LABORATORY OPERATIONS EVALUATION
          10.4.1  Procedure
          10.4.2  Analytical  Laboratory
                  Questionnaire

     10.5 PERFORMANCE AUDITS
          10.5.1  Network Performance Audits
          10.5.2  Performance Audit Reporting
          10.5.3  Laboratory  Performance Audits

     10.6  DATA PROCESSING AUDITS
          10.6.1  General Guidance
          10.6.2  Estimating  the Percent Errors
                  in a Data Base

A.  OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES FOR
    PRECIPITATION MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS

-------
                             FIGURES

Figure

7-1  Analyst Spike Plot for S04" Analysis


                              TABLES

Table

2-1  USGS Survey of Synthetic Precipitation Samples

2-2  USGS Survey of Natural Precipitation Samples

2-3  Summary of Collocation Results

2.4  Recommended Reporting Units and Significant
     Digits
 •i
7-1  Sample Information to be Coded

7-2  Factors for Computing Control Limits

8-1  Suggested QC Spotcheck of Data Handling

8-2  Ion Ratios for Various Sources

8-3  Conversion Factors and Equivalent Weights

8-4  NADP Reanalysis Criteria

8-5  Equivalent Conductance at Infinite Dilution,
     25°C

8-6  Confidence Bounds for Medians of Small Samples

8-7  NADP Minimum Detection Limit Criteria for
     Laboratory Measurements

9-1  Network Summary of Upper and Lower Limits of the
     SCDs for Daily Sampling

9-2  Acceptance Criteria for Test Sample Quality and
     Field Analytical Accuracy

9-3  Absolute and Relative Blank Values

-------
                                           Section No.  1
                                           Date February  24,  1954
                                           Page 1
1.0  OVERVIEW OF THE INTERIM EDITION OF VOLUME V

     The Quality Assurance (QA)  Handbook is comprised of five
volumes:  Volume I (Principles), Volume II (Ambient Air Methods],
Volume III (Stationary Source Methods),  Volume IV (Meteorological
Measurements),  and Volume V (Precipitation Measurement Systems) .
Much of the material in Volumes II, III and V are out-of-date and
some portions of these volumes have long been out-of-print.

     EPA is now preparing an updated version of the QA Handbook
series which will be available in September 1995.  To meet the
needs of the user community until the updated version is
available, EPA has published Interim Editions of Volumes I, II,
III, IV and V.   Each volume of the Interim Editions, is being
issued as a complete unit with out-of-date sections either
deleted or modified using addendum sheets and handwritten
notations in the text.

     This volume and the other four volumes of the Interirr.
Edition of the QA Handbook are available at no charge frorr.:

               USEPA/ORD
               Center for Environmental Research Information
               26 West Martin Luther King Drive
               Cincinnati, Ohio  45268

     The previous version of Volume V was published in twc parts:
Volume Va, Quality Assurance Manual for Precipitation Measurement
Systems and Volume Vb, Operation and Maintenance Manual for
Precipitation Measurement Systems.  The appendices to Volume Vb
contained over 200 pages of Standard Operating Procedures  (SOP'si
primarily concerned with the analysis of precipitation samples.
For the most part, these SOP's are now out-of-date technology and
were excluded from the Interim Version of Volume V.  The reduced
Volume Vb is now an appendix to Volume V.  The titles of the
excluded SOP's are:

     •    Aerochem Metrics Precipitation Collector Maintenance
          Manual

     •    Instruction Book for Universal Recording Rain Gauge

     •    Method 150.6 -- pH of Wet Deposition by Electrometric
          Determination

     •    Method 120-6 -- Specific Conductance in Wet Deposition
          by Electrolytic Determination

-------
                                 Section No. 1
                                 Date February 24, ~_994
                                 Page 2
Method 305.6 -- Acidity in Wet Deposition by
Titrimetric Determination

Method 305.2 -- Acidity (Tritrimetric)
Method 300.6 -- Chloride, Orthophosphate, Nitrate ar.a
Sulfate in Wet Deposition by Chemically Suppressed Ion
Chromatography

Method 300.7 -- Dissolved Sodium,  Ammonium, Potassium,
Magnesium, and Calcium in Wet Deposition by Chemically
Suppressed Ion Chromatography

Method 375.6 -- Sulfate in Wet Deposition by Automated
Colorimetric Determination Using Barium-Methylthymcl
Blue

Method 353.6 -- Nitrate-Nitrite in Wet Deposition by
Automated Colorimetric Determination Using Cadmium
Reduction

Method 325.6 -- Chloride in Wet Deposition by Automated
Colorimetric Determination Using Thiocyanate

Method 365.6 -- Orthophosphate in Wet Deposition by
Automated Colorimetric Determination Using Ascorbic
Acid reduction

Method 340.6 -- Fluoride in Wet Deposition by
Potentiometric Determination Using an Ion-Selective
Electrode

Method 350.6 -- Ammonium in Wet Deposition by
Electrometric Determination Using Ion-Selective
Electrode

Method 350.7 -- Ammonium in Wet Deposition by Automated
Colorimetric Determination with Phenate

Method 200.6 -- Dissolved Calcium, Magnesium,
Potassium, and Sodium in Wet Deposition by Flame Atomic
Absorption Spectrophotometry

Method 200.6 -- Dissolved aluminum, Cadmium, Copper,
Iron, Lead, Manganese, and Zinc in Wet Deposition by
Graphite  Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry

-------
                                           Section No. 1
                                           Date February 24, 1554
                                           Page 3


     Copies of these SOP's can be obtained by writing tc:

               QA Handbook Coordinator
               US EPA/ORD/AREAL/MD-77B
               Research Triangle Park, NC  27711

     Many of the EPA contacts and organizational units identified
in Volume V are no longer correct and some of the reference
materials and procedures cited have been discontinued or
replaced.  This type of out-of-date information is widely
dispersed throughout Volume V.  Rather than change every affec~ed
section, for clarity and neatness sake, we have provided below a
listing of the original information and the corresponding updated
information.

     1)  NBS is now the National Institute of Standards and
Technology  (NIST).

     2)  EMSL is now the Atmospheric Research and Exposure
Assessment Laboratory  (AREAL).

     3)  QAD is now the Quality Assurance and Technical Support
Division (QATSD/AREAL).

     The updated edition of Volume V which will be available ir.
September 1995 will also contain information on quality assuring
dry deposition measurement systems.
                                   William J. Mitchell
                                         Chief
                           Quality Assurance Support Branch

-------
                                                          Section  No.  2
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 1 of 8
2.0  PROGRAM PLANNING AND OBJECTIVES
     Precipitation monitoring entails extensive chemical   analyses  and  data
manipulations  and  requires  strong  interfaces  between  field  operations,
laboratory operations and the data management functions.    In  a  program  of
this  complexity,  all  elements  must be carefully planned.   A comprehensive
•top-down"  approach  to  planning  should  be  adopted,   starting  with   an
experimental  design  and  extending  through  to the preparation of detailed
procedures .
     As described below, the planning process can be broken down  into  three
      phases:
1. Determination of Monitoring and Data Quality Objectives
2. Development of Work Plan
3. Preparation of Quality Assurance Project Plan

2.1  Determination of Monitoring and Data Quality Objectives
     Data quality objectives are  usually  defined  in  terms  of  precision,
accuracy, representativeness, comparability and completeness of the collected
data.   To  achieve  these  objectives,  quality  assurance/quality   control
procedures  are needed in all phases of the program from the initial planning
stages through final data reporting.  This involvement helps  identify  areas
with  potentially  large  negative  impact  on  data  quality  and provides a
mechanism for instituting ongoing quality control,  corrective  action,   data
validation, and external assessment of precision and accuracy.
     In general, precipitation data may be considered to be  complete if  at
least  B5%  of  the  total  possible  field observations of either individual
events, daily, weekly, or longer term composite samples  are  captured.    The
determination of completeness for the network is calculated as a percentage

-------
                                                          Section No. 2
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 2 of 8
of the total ntmber of possible samples.  The percentage of valid usable  data
will  usually  be  5-10J  lower  due  to sample contamination or loss and  the
invalidation of some analytical results.
     Tables 2-1, 2-2 and 2-3 show  some  precision  estimates  obtained  from
interlaboratory  studies by the 0. S. Geological Survey (Tables 2-1, 2-2)  and
a collocated sampling study from the EPRI-Sure network  (Table  2-3).   These
results can be useful in establishing data quality objectives.
     In order to establish data representativeness, stations should be  sited
so  that  they  collect  samples  representative  of  both the amount and the
composition of precipitation in  the  area.   In  general,  monitoring  sites
should  be  classified as:  (a) baseline (remote area), (b) regional (rural),
or (c) urban or local  area  (for  local  impact  emission  sources).   Also,
reporting  data  in  consistent  units  permits  easier  data comparisons.  A
listing of the recommended units for  the  most  commonly  sought  monitoring
parameters  are  given  in  Table 2-4.  To facilitate intercomparison of data
bases of various networks, data summaries  should  document,  to  the  extent
possible,  field  laboratory,  and  computational procedures utilized in data
generation.

2.2  Development of Work Plan
     Once the monitoring and data quality objectives have been determined,  a
detailed  work  plan  should be prepared.  The Work Plan should address,  as a
minimum, the following topics which are discussed in  more  detail  in  later
sections of this manual.

 1. Program  Organization  -  identifies  the  organization(s)  and   specific
   personnel  responsible  for  network  operation,  chemical  analysis,  data
   management and quality assurance/ quality control (Section 3*0).
2. Experimental Design -  addresses  the  spatial  and  temporal  measurement
   requirements  in   terms  of  program  objectives  (Section  2.0).  Special
   consideration should be given  to  proper network siting (Section 5.0),   and
   to  thorough  documentation of all detailed procedures to be used (Section
   4.0).
 3.  Facilities,  Equipment  and Services - provides a list of resources required
    to  carry  out   the  monitoring  program.  This  listing should identify the
    specific instruments and  respective model numbers utilized in  each  facet

-------
                                                         Section No.  2
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October 1,  1984
                                                         Page  3 of  8
TABLE 2-1.  OSGS SURVEY OF SYNTHETIC PRECIPITATION SAMPLES

Observable
(Units)
Conductivity
(umho/cB)
PH
Sulfate
(ag/liter)
litrate
(ag/liter)
iamonia
(ag/liter)
Chloride
(ag/liter)
Sodium
(ag/liter)
Potassium
(ag/ liter)
Kagnesiun
(B«/ liter)
Calciiat
Cag/liter)
No. of
Labs
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
10
10
11
11
11
11
10
10
11
11
11
11
uses
Designated
43.5
13.2
4.35
5.03
2.35
0.779
2.15
0.826
0.660
0.214
3.27
0.908
0.558
0.284
0.506
0.156
0.226
0.056
0.654
0.248
Mean of
Determinations
40.7
11.6
4.22
4.83
2.38
0.702
1.80
0.732
0.630
0.203
3.18
0.891
0.586
0.326
0.549
0.198
0.27?
0.0752
0.652
0.253
Std.
Deviation
3-32
4.09
0.124
0.172
0.795
0.174
0.662
0.212
0.130
0.039
0.249
0.188
0.139
0.070
0.941
0.106
0.0872
0.0361
0.0911
0.0585
CV*
0.082
0.35
0.029
0.036
0.33
0.25
0.37
0.29
0.21
0.19
0.078
0.21
0.24
0.22
0.171
0.53
0.32
O.M8
0.14
0.23
a.  Chemical Analysis and Precipitation Study, U.S.G.S.,  Spring 1981;
    saaples designated B and N.

'=.  CV =.Std. deviation/mean

-------
Section No. 2
Revision No. 1
Date October 1, 1984
Page 4 of 8
TABLE 2-2. USGS
Observable
(Units)
Conductivity
(y«ho/cm)
PH
Sulfate
(•g/liter) .
Hitrate
(•g/liter)
Aanonia
(•g/liter)
Chloride
(•g/liter)
Sodium
(•g/liter)
Potassium
(•g/liter)
Magnesium
(ng/liter)
Calcium
(ng/liter)
SURVEY OF
No. of
Labs
10
10
10
10
11
11
11
11
10
11
11
11
11
10
10
11
11
11
11
NATURAL PRECIPITATION
Mean of
Determinations
16.9
28.9
6.22
6.25
0.477
1.52
1.23
2.77
0.682
1.81
2.40
1.40
1.73
0.32
1.15
0.198
0.307
1.11
1.48
SAMPLES a
Std.
Deviation
1.56
1.93
0.219
0.258
0.162
0.606
0.436
1.05
0.138
0.3M9
0.391
0.981
0.249
0.0646
0.122
0.0399
0.0438
0.210
0.109

C?5
0.092
0.067
0.035
0.041
0.34
0.40
0.35
0.38
0.20
0.19
0.16
0.70
0.14
0.20
0.11
0.20
0.14
0.19
0.07
a.  Chemical Analysis and Precipitation Study,  U.S.G.S.,  Spring 1981;
    samples designated AC and PL.

b.  CV = Std. deviation/mean

-------
TABLE 2-3.  SUMMARY OF COLLOCATION RESULTS3
                                                          Section No.  2
                                                          Revision Mo.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 5  of 8

Observable
Hydrogen Ion0
Total Acidityd
Conductivity
Sulfate
Nitrate
Chloride
Ammonia
Sodium
Potassium
Calcium
Magnesium
% Difference
9.0
24.3
6.0
5.0
5.3
11.5
7.8
17.6
43.3
16.1
12.5

a.  From EPRI-SURE Acid Precipitation Study.  The values reported
    represent an average of at least 1000 collocations of samplers.

b.  % Difference a 100x(Median Absolute Collocated Difference/Median All
    Values).

G.  From antilog of -pH.

d.  Classical potentiometric titration

-------
                                                         Section No. 2
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 1984
                                                         Page 6 of 8
TABLE 2-4.   RECOWENDED  REPORTING UNITS AND SIGNIFICANT DIGITS

Observable
Sample weight
Precipitation
PH
Conductivity
Deposi tion
Sulfate
Hitrate
Aanonia
Chloride
Sodium
Potassium
Magnesium
Calcium
Reporting Units
g
cm
pH units
y mho/on (yS/cm)
2
mg/m
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
mg/liter
yeq/liter
Significant Digits
1.0
0.025
0.01
0.1
0.1
0.01
0.2
0.01
0.2
0.001
0.05
0.01
0.3
0.01
0.4
0.001
0.02
0.001
0.08
0.001
0.05

-------
                                                         Section No. 2
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date  October 1,  1984
                                                         Page  7 of  8
   of the measurement system (Sections 6.0 and  7.0).
4. Data Generation - specifies the measurement methods  used.    These   include
   calibration   techniques,    frequency   of   calibrations,    acceptability
   requirements for all calibration results,  and  action  to   be  taken  with
   respect  to  data  obtained  previous  to   an  unsatisfactory  calibration
   (Sections 6.0 and 7.0).

5. Data Processing, Validation and Reporting  - describes the   types   of  data
   obtained  for  each  measurement  parameter and the  overall data flow from
   generation through reporting.  Data validation methodologies,  statistical
   analysis  techniques  and   reporting  formats  should  also  be addressed
   (Section 8.0).

6.. Program Evaluation and Data Quality Assessment - provides  specific details
   of  the  planning  and implementation of the independent quality assurance
   activities associated with the monitoring  program (Sections 9*0,  10.0  and
   2.3 below).

2.3  Preparation of Quality Assurance Project Plan

     To generate and report  monitoring  data  of  the   highest  quality,   no

precipitation  monitoring  project  should be initiated without a written, QA

project plan.  The QA project plan should specify QA policies,  organization,

objectives, functional activities, and QA/QC  activities needed to achieve  the

data quality goals of the project.  Items that should be included are:


1. Quality Assurance Policy Statement - describes the  organization's  policy
   and general approach to achieve quality results.

2. Quality Assurance Organization and Responsibility - assigns responsibility
   to   the   organization's  personnel  for   carrying  out  quality   related
   activities and defines the authority  of  the  quality  assurance   officer
   (QAO).

3. Sampling and Analysis Procedures - defines the methods to  be used  both   in
   the   field   and   laboratory,   in  terms  of  their  acceptability  and
   applicability,  and  references   the   appropriate    Standard  Operating
   Procedures for method details.

4. Internal Quality Control Checks - describes the critical  points   in  each
   measurement  system  and establishes a system of control and/or checks  for
   those critical points together with a frequency for  their  performance.

5. Data Quality Assessment -  addresses  the   implementation   of  independent
   program evaluations and audits to assess data quality;  also establishes a
   schedule for these audits and a format for reporting precision, accuracy,
   and completeness of specific measurements.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date October 1,  1984
                                                       Page 8 of 8
Corrective  Actions  -  indicates  the  methods  for  reporting  problems,
responsibility for corrections, and the documentation of action taken.

Quality Assurance Reporting - outlines the  data  quality  section  to   be
prepared  as  part  of  each data submission and final report.   The  report
will summarize data quality assessment,  reliability  of  the  measurement
system and corrective action pursued to correct the problems.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 1 of 6
 3.0  PROGRAM ORGANIZATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES
      A  precipitation  monitoring  network  involves    interdependent   field
 monitoring  and  laboratory  operations.    Each  operation  has  its own QA/QC
 aspects.  The field monitoring  sites   and  the  laboratory  can  be  run   by
 independent   organizations;    however,    the   results   reported  are  the
 responsibility of the  program manager.  The QA officer should  be at the  same
 reporting   level  as   the  program   manager.    Brief  discussions  of  the
 qualifications and duties of  the program  personnel are presented below.

 3.1  Program Operations
      In order to oversee, coordinate and  review  the program as  a whole  the
 following functions are  required.
 Program Manager - A program manager  should:
(a) Assure that data of acceptable  precision and  accuracy  are generated within
    the time and funding  constraints  of  the  program.
(b) Keep abreast of all program  requirements and  make  necessary decisions.
(c) Review data and QA  reports.
(d) Issue progress reports.
(e) Analyze and interpret the  results.
      The program manager should have a  degree in science  and some experience
 in  managing  projects.    Full  time  employment is  recommended.  This  position
 can be combined with that of  the field  manager.
 QA Officer - The QA officer should:

(a) Report directly to  the  program  manager  on  inputs  from  other  program
    functions.
(b) Assess the quality  of the  data  generated.
(c) Recommend corrective  actions that need to  be  taken.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 2 of 6
     The  QA  officer might be assisted by one or more  QA/QC • coordinators  if
 the  magnitude  of  the  program  requires  it.   The  QA officer should have
 training  in  QA as it relates to  experimental  design,  monitoring  and  data
 validation.

 3.2  Field Operations
     The  personnel needed to carry out the field duties  in  a  precipitation
 •onitoring network include a field manager and station operators.
 Field Manager - The field  manager  may  be  a  member  of  the  organization
 operating the  stations  or  a  member  of the central laboratory staff.  He
 should  have  a college  degree, preferably in chemistry;   should  be  familiar
 with all the field procedures;  and should have experience in the operation
 of all  equipment.  His duties are:

(a) Solve  field problems.
(b) Notify the program  manager of such problems.
(c) Oversee and train the operators.
(d) Coordinate between  field and laboratory functions.
      Station operators should have a  technical background but need not have  a
 college  degree.    All operators  should have the  training to perform at  the
 necessary level of  knowledge and the  skill  required  to  obtain  and  report
 quality  data.    A   short-term  course in "hands-on"  training is recommended.
 This should be  followed by  on-the-job  observation  immediately  after   the
 course and by a semi-annual inspection thereafter.  The training should cover
 all pertinent  aspects  of  the Operations  and  Maintenance  Manual (1),  which
 should be given to  all personnel.   If, at any time, an operator's performance
 deteriorates, additional  training  must  be provided  as soon as possible by  the
 field  manager,   by  a refresher  course  or  by on-site guidance during network
 evaluation visits.
 Station Operators - The duties  of  a  station operator  are:

 Ca) Operate and maintain samplers  according  to appropriate SOPs.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 3 of 6
(b) Operate and maintain rain gauges according to appropriate SOP.
(c) Maintain monitoring site and  its surroundings free  from  obstruction  and
    dirt.
(d) Change sampling buckets at  pre-assigned intervals and record activities in
    field logs.
(e) Perform required calibrations of measurement instruments and  analyses  of
    samples as described in SOPs.
(f} Preserve and store field samples as appropriate
(g) Ship samples to analytical  laboratory at intervals specified in SOPs.
(h) Notify field manager on any problems with samplers,  gauges,  instruments,
    standards and the like.
 3.3  Laboratory Operations
      Each analytical laboratory  should  have  the  following types of  employees:
 a director/supervisor,  an analyst,  and  a QC  chemist.
 Laboratory Director/Supervisor - This person should have   a  minimum  of  one
 year's  analytical  experience,   a   degree   in  chemistry and be a full-time
 employee.  His duties are:

(a) Schedule all analyses in the  laboratory.
(b) Review all QC input to verify "in control" conditions.
(c) Release data to the program manager.
 Laboratory Analyst - This person should be employed full-time and trained   to
 perform  with  minimum supervision  all  routine chemical measurements  on water
 samples.  Academic training should  include:   completion of at least one  year
 of  college  chemistry or a laboratory-oriented  vocational course.  A minimum
 of  30  days  of  on-the-job  training   in   measurements   performed  by   the
 organization  is  also highly recommended.   The  analyst must be supervised  by
 an  experienced  professional   scientist—the   laboratory   director,   the
 supervisor or a similarly trained individual. His duties are:

(a) Perform instrument calibrations  according to  SOPs.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 4 of 6

(b)  Analyze field samples  in the assigned order to meet required schedules.
(c)  Notify laboratory supervisor on  any problems either  in  the  analysis  or
    ins trunentation.
      Before analysts are  allowed  to analyze samples, they should  demonstrate
 their  proficiency.    Each new   analyst  should  be instructed in instrument
 operation and should be allowed to  conduct an instrument  performance  study.
 Analyst  performance   can be  evaluated  by  control  charts  of critical QC
 parameters.  If these  charts indicate a problem, the analyst should be  given
 further training.
 Quality Control Chemist — This  individual  should  have  a  minimum  of   a
 bachelor's degree in chemistry, engineering, or mathematics with at least  two
 years of environmental and one year of QA/QC experience.   This  position  is
 under  the  general supervision of  the laboratory director but with access  to
 the program manager.   His duties  are:

(a)  Implement and monitor  the routine application  of  QC  activities  in   the
    laboratory.
(b)  Participate in a formal program  to  train  new   employees  and  to  update
    skills of older employees.
(c)  Report to laboratory supervisor  status of QC checks.
      This is not necessarily a  full time  position;  it  may  be  part   time
 supplemented  by  other  program duties.  The percentage of the chemist's  time
 dedicated to QC is dictated  by  the  size and  complexity of the program.
 3.4  Data Management  Operations
      Persons involved in data aco^iisition, reduction  and  reporting  are   the
 field  operator,   the analyst,  the data entry staff,  the laboratory director,
 the  program manager,  and the QA officer.   Their primary duties are:
 ?ield Operator -  His duties are:

 (a) Preparation of field data forms.
 (b) QC of field data form preparation before  shipment  to field manager.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 5 of 6

 Analyst -  His duties are:

(a) Reading or transcription of strip charts

(b) Entry of data to computer.

 Laboratory Supervisor  -  He should  perform:

(a) QC  check of strip chart reading.

(b) Preparation of data forms.

(c) Review  of computer-generated QC information.

(d) Preparation and interpretation  of control  charts.

 Data Processing Personnel  - Duties include:

(a) Input of data from  data sheets.

(b) Verification of input for keypunch  errors.

(c) Update  of computer  files.

 QA Officer - He should perform:

(a) Review  of data.

(b) Preparation of QA reports.

(c) Submittal of audit  data and recommendations  to program manager.


 3.5  Designation of QA Responsibilities and Duties


 QA Officer - The QA officer, or his designee  should:


(a) Review  the monthly  QC plots generated for  each analysis  to verify  that  QC
    data are acceptable and to identify any consistent  bias  trend.

(b) Evaluate the periodic Field Audit Report prepared by   the  QC  chemist  to
    assess   the  accuracy  of field pH and conductivity measurements of  test
    samples and to identify needs for corrective  action.

(c) Review  all QC information presented  with  each set   of  analytical   data
    reported — including data from QC  reports.

-------
                                                          Section No. 3
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 6 of 6

(d) Evaluate laboratory'and  field operations by conducting program audits  and
    reporting results  to  the program manager.

(e) Prepare quarterly  reports to management that summarize QA  activities  and
    assess data quality in terms of precision and accuracy trends for both the
    field and laboratory  operations.

 QC Chemist - The QC chemist should:


(a) Introduce blind samples  to the  laboratory as an independent check on  data
    quality.

(b) Issue  a  regularly-scheduled   report  updating  control  limits  for  all
    observables.

(c) Evaluate  all  data  prior  to   its   submission   to   the   Laboratory
    Director/Supervisor.

 Analyst - The analyst should:


(a) Perform  all  the   analyses  according to  approved  Standard   Operating
    Procedures (SOPs).

(b) Evaluate analytical performance in real time, using readily  available   QC
    information.

(c) Reanalyze the  sample if  necessary.

(d) Submit data obtained "under  control" conditions  to the QC chemist.

 Data Clerk - The  data clerk should:

(a) Enter analytical  and field data into the computer.

(b) Check and correct the data input.

 (c) Generate reports  and graphs  of QC information.


 3.6  Reference


 ". Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems.  Vol.   v
    ^  Manual for Precipitation  Measurement Systems;  Part IJ - Operations and
    Maintenance  Manual.   U.S.  Environmental   Protection   Agency,   Research
    Triangle Park, NC, EPA-600/4-82-042b (January  1981).

-------
                                                          Section No.  U
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 1 of  2
4.0  DOCUMENTATION
4.1  Document Control
     A system of document control should be established for all precipitation
monitoring  field  and  laboratory  operations.   Elements of a precipitation
measurement project subject to document control should include:

1. Field operations and maintenance procedures,
2. Analysis procedures,
3* Auditing procedures,
4. Computational and data validation procedures,
5. Work plan, and
6. Quality assurance plan (if a separate document).
4.2  Internal Documentation
     A central file of all data, reports,  correspondence,  etc.   should  be
maintained  by  the  program  manager  and  a data file should be kept by the
laboratory.  Records  in  the  laboratory  file  should  meet  the  following
requirements:

1. Records should have identification numbers and  be  kept  in  an  orderly,
   accessible  form.   Records  should include all raw data, calculations, QC
   data, and reports.
2. Data in laboratory records should include:
    A. Sample identification number,
    3. Sample type,
    C. Date sample received in laboratory,
    D. Collection   data   (time,   date,   volume,   etc.,   if   laboratory
       responsibility),
    E. Date of analysis,

-------
                                                         Section No. 4
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 2 of 2

    F.  Name of analyst,

    G.  Results of analysis  (including all raw data), and

    H.  Name of person receiving  the  analytical data.


3. The  laboratory should  have a  sample-tracking system starting from  receipt
   of sample through  to the completion of analysis;  this should include:

    A.  Sampling information records  (e.g.,  field  data  forms)  with  dates,
       time, site location, sample amount, etc.,

    B.  Bound notebooks with numbered pages,

    C.  Computer printouts or report  forms verified against laboratory records
       before data  release.


4.3  QA Documentation

     QA reports should be submitted  regularly to the program manager  by   the

QA officer.  They should  include:


1. Periodic  assessments  of measurement  data  accuracy,   precision,    and
   completeness;

2. Results of performance audits;

3. Results of systems audits;  and

*. Significant QA problems  with  documentation of  remedial  action  taken   or
   recommended solutions.

-------
                                                          Section No.  5
                                                          Revision  No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 1 of 16
5.0  SITING
     In the design of  a  monitoring  program,  the  program  objectives   and
network  station density must be considered.   Ideally,  a complete description
of the site and its surroundings (out to 20 km) should  be given so  that   the
user  of the data could decide what the station is measuring or what the  data
represent.  However, for  convenience,  simplified  site  categories  (urban,
remote, regional or rural) are used here.
     Network station density, which helps define the  spatial  resolution  of
the  data obtained, is determined by program  objectives, area meteorology and
topography, and budgetary constraints.  Thus, it is  difficult  to  design  a
network for all users of this QA manual.  However, some specific guidance can
be found in References 1 and 2.  Points to consider for setting up a  network
monitoring a large geographical area are described below.

5.1  Network Design Considerations
     In the design  of  a  precipitation  monitoring  network,  stations   are
located according to the objectives of the program:

1. Measurement of baseline (remote area) precipitation,
2. Measurement of representative regional (rural) precipitation, or
3. Measurement of urban area (local impact  pollutant  emission  sources)  on
   precipitation.
     These three  are  generally  differentiated  by  expected  concentration
levels.  The background or remote station should show contamination primarily
due to natural processes;  the regional station would be  affected  primarily
by  long-range  transport;  and the urban site would show high concentrations
due to a polluted local environment.  In the  selection  of station  locations,
it is necessary to have detailed information  on location of emission sources,
regional variabilities of  ambient  pollutant  concentrations,  precipitation
amounts,  prevailing  winds,  and meteorological data.   Thus, the design  of a

-------
                                                         Section  No.  5
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  2 of 16
network needs to address details such as the  number,  location,  and type   of
  ipling stations and equipment to be used.
5-2  Site Selection Criteria
     The variability and the  long-range  transport   of  pollutants  make   it
difficult  to  determine  whether  a  site  is   collecting  precipitation data
representative of  any  given  area.   In  addition,   the   transport   of   air
pollutants   and   their   resultant   concentrations in   precipitation   are
complicated  by   topography.    For   example,    in   mountainous   regions,
precipitation  tends  to be unevenly distributed due  to  topographical  lifting
of clouds and deflection of air flows.
     To  optimize  site  locations  for  different station  categories,   the
following selection criteria are suggested.

5.2.1  Baseline Station - The station should  be  in   a  location where   the
effects of human activities are negligible.  Ideally, the station should meet
as many of the following criteria as possible:

1. The station should be in an area where no significant changes in   land-use
   practices  within  100 to 1000 km (depending on prevailing wind direction)
   from the station are anticipated during the study  period.
2. The station should be at least 50 km from major population centers, major
   highways,   industries,  air  routes,  and  large   natural  sources  (e.g.
   geysers);  it should be in  remote,  uninhabited,   or sparsely  inhabited
   areas.   If  an  isolated  island  is  used,  data  corrections for sea  salt
   aerosols should be made.
3. The site should not have a history of  frequent local   natural  phenomena
   such as forest fires, dust and sand storms, or volcanic  activities.
i. The  site  should  have  provisions,  e.g. power,    for    setting   up    a
   meteorological and aerometric monitoring station (3,^,5,6).
5. The site should be readily accessible on a flat or gently sloping  terrain
   (less  than 20°) and sheltered from strong winds.
 3.2.2  Regional  Station -  Ideally, site  selection  criteria  for  a   regional
sonitoring network  include  criteria  3-5 for baseline stations as well as  the
 following:

-------
                                                         Section No.  5
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  3 of  16
1. The general area should be free from  influences   of  large   anthropogenic
   sources  such  as  cities  or  towns;   industrial, sewage  or power  plants;
   refineries, commercial areas,  and  airports;   and  large  local   natural
   sources.   Such  pollutant sources should be distant enough  for pollutants
   not to unduly affect the precipitation chemistry.   If  the  site location
   must  be  near a large source (within  50 km),  the  station  should be in the
   prevailing upwind direction from the source.
2. The site should be at least on kilometer distant from local   sources  such
   as houses, farmlands, orchards, marshes and swamps, landfills,  and  roads.
3. If stations are near pollutant sources, the  site   location   should  avoid
   undue influence by a single pollutant  source.
4. If an area is characterized by a common type of land  use,  the collector
   can be near the common pollution source.
     The selected site can be evaluated for representativeness  and for  local
contamination  by  installing  a  temporary  grid of  neighboring satellite
samplers around it.  Sampling procedures  for this temporary network should be
comparable  to  those  at  the  original   site.  The  permanent  site should be
selected after evaluating the results of  this temporary network.

5.2.3  Orban or Local Station - Ideally,  to study urban areas or the   effects
of  point sources on precipitation, an array of monitoring stations should be
near the source in the area of interest.   The stations  should   not  be  near
other  sources.   For studying the local  effect due  to a single point  or area
source, the average interstation distance should be of the order  of   several
kilometers.  However, actual station density and interstation distance should
be decided by the desired spatial resolutions,

5.3  Sampler and Rain Gauge Siting Criteria
     Placements of precipitation samplers and rain gauges should assure  that
the  site  collects  unbiased samples. Samplers and  rain gauges should stand
far enough from trees, hills, and other obstructions  to minimize interference
with  sampling.   No  object,  even  if  smaller than the collector should be
within a few meters  of  the  collector,   and  no object  should  shade  the
collector.   An  open,  flat, grassy area, surrounded by trees  no closer than
IGOm would be an ideal site.

-------
                                                          Section No.  5
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page i» of 16
     Ideal criteria for placement of samplers  and rain  gauges  are:


1. The horizontal distance between a  large  obstruction   and   the   collector
   should  be  at  least  twice   the  obstruction  height,  or  the  top of an
   obstruction as viewed from the collector  should be less than 30°  above the
   horizon.

2. The horizontal distance between collocated  samplers, or sampler   and  rain
   gauge should be greater than  two meters.

3- The collector should be far from mobile pollution sources.    Routine  air,
   ground,  or  water  traffic should not come within a 100m of the  collector
   site.

4. The distance between any overhead wires and the site must be great  enough
   not to affect the samples.

5. The collector should be at least 100m from  open  storage of  agricultural
   products, fuels, or other foreign materials.

6. The ground surface around the collector should be firm and   have   a  grass
   cover or gravel.

7. Wet/dry collectors should be  oriented  parallel  to   the prevailing  wind
   direction  during  precipitation events,  with the wet  bucket upwind of the
   dry bucket (so that the dry bucket does not obstruct the wet bucket).

8. The rain gauge should be positioned parallel to both the collector and the
   direction  of  the  prevailing  wind  during precipitation  events.  If the
   gauge has an access door to a recorder, weighing or  drive   mechanism,  the
   door  should be kept closed,  and the gauge  should be mounted with the door
   facing away from the wind.

     The distance between  obstructions  such   as  growing trees and  newly

erected structures and the collector should  be checked  periodically.
 5.1  Station Identification and Classification

     All stations must be identified by documentation of site characteristics

 to  facilitate  evaluation of data generated from samples taken at that site.

 Typically,  the site identification record should contain:


 1. Data acquisition objective (baseline, trend, or research monitoring).

 2. Station  location (address, map coordinates, elevation, etc.).

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 5 of  16
3. Type of station (remote,  regional,  or local type;   and  if it  is  primarily
   an industrial, agricultural,  forest,  urban site, etc.).

4. Instrumentation  checklist  (manufacturer,1   model    number,   measurement
   technique, etc.).

5. Important pollutant sources (point  and area sources;   their pollutants  and
   emission concentrations,  proximities, etc.).

6. Topography description (trees,  hills, valleys,  bodies of water and   type,
   size,  proximity,  orientation,  of water body, etc.).   Photographs  of  the
   monitoring site covering a 360    view  from  the precipitation  collector
   should also be taken.

7. Site diagram properly scaled (equipment  configuration,  trees,  man made
   structures, access road,  electrical power lines, etc.).

     All monitoring stations should be properly identified and classified   as

described  below  using  a  clear,  concise format.  This can be accomplished

using forms similar to those at the end of this section or those developed by

other networks such as NADP and NTN.


Class I.

1. Station satisfies all siting criteria (Section 5.3),

2. On-site instrumentation includes
   automatic precipitation collector,
   recording rain gauge,
   pH and conductivity meters,
   meteorological sensors (windspeed and direction), and
   aerometric analyzers (S02 and NO/NOX).

Class II

1. Station satisfies all siting criteria (Section 5.3).

2. On-site instrumentation includes
   automatic precipitation collector,
   a recording rain gauge, and
   pH and conductivity meters.

-------
                                                          Section No.  5
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 6  of 16
Class III
1. Station satisfies all siting criteria (Section 5.3).
2. On-site instrumentation includes
   automatic precipitation collector,
   nonrecording rain gauge, and
   pH and conductivity meters.
Class IV
1. Station does not satisfy all siting criteria (Section  5.3)*
2. On-site instrumentation identical to Class I stations.
Class V
1. Station does not satisfy all siting criteria (Section  5.3).
2. On-site instrumentation identical to Class II stations.
     After initial classification, an on-site visit should be made by the  QA
coordinator  to  evaluate  and  certify  each  monitoring  station as soon as
possible after the start of operation to assure  the  quality  of  monitoring
data.   Classes  IV  and  V  must  be  only  temporary,   since  they  are  in
noncompliance with siting criteria.  The program manager  (or a designee)  must
be  sure  that  siting  deficiencies  are corrected within a reasonable time.
Most deficiencies should  be  corrected  within  30  days,  but  for  serious
deficiencies,  a  schedule  should  be established for compliance attainment.
•hen corrections are made, documentation should be provided to the QA officer
and program manager and the station classification should be changed by them.
     All sites should be reevaluated yearly to verify  that  they  remain  in
compliance  with  the  siting  criteria.   All  aerometric and meteorological
instrumentation should conform to standard ambient monitoring guidelines.

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 7 of  16
5.5  References
1. WHO Operational  Manual for Sampling and Analysis Techniques   for  Chemical
   Constituents  in  Air and Precipitation, World Meteorological Organization
   Pub. No.  299 U97477

2. Site Selection and Certification,  National  Atmospheric Deposition  Program
   (1970).

3. Quality Assurance  Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement  Systems, Vol.   II
   - Ambient Air Specific Methods, EPA-600/U-77-027a,  Research  Triangle  Park,
   NC (1977).

4. Guide  to  Meteorological  Instrument  and   Observing  Practices,    World
   Meteorological Organization Pub. No.8,  TP8  (1971).

5. Ambient Monitoring Guidelines for Prevention of Significant   Deterioration
   (PSD), EPA-450/1-78-019 (1978).

6. Quality Assurance  Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement  Systems, Vol.  I -
   Principles, EPA-600/9-76-005, Research  Triangle Park, NC  (1976).

-------
                                                         Section No.  5
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 8  of 16
                           SITE DESCRIPTION REPORT

                                Data Prepared

                     Reason (New site, change,  revision)

A.  DATA ACQUISITION OBJECTIVE (Description) 	
B.  SITE CATEGORY
    1.  Station Identification	2.   County	 3.   State_
    4.  Latitude	5.  Longitude	 6.   Elevation	
    7.  Station environment:  remote	rural
        suburban	urban	commercial
        Indus trial	
    8.  Available USGS Topographical Map (Yes, No) (circle)
    9.  Revision year	  ..._.
   10.  Scale (1:24,000 preferred) 	__
C.  SITE ADMINISTRATION
    1.  Name of official 	position.
        Mailing address
                              (number and street)
         (city)      (state) (zip)                (Phone)
    2.   Name of Program Manager	 Title
        Mailing address
                              (number and street)
         (city)       (state)  (zip)                (Phone)
     3.   Name of Site Operator
         Mailing address 	
                               (number  and street)
         (city)      (state)  (zip)                (Phone)

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 1984
                                                         Page 9 of 16
D.  SITE INSTRUMENTATION
    1.   Precipitation Collector Type:   Automatic 	Non-automatic
        Manufacturer	
        Model	  Serial No. 	
        Diameter (I.D.)  of
        Sample Bucket	(cm)
    2.   Raingauge:
        Recording	      Nonrecording	
        Types   Weighing	  Tipping Bucket	 Other	
        Manufacturer	
        Model	       Serial No. 	
        Funnel Size 	(cm)
    3.   Nitrogen Oxide Monitor:
        Automatic Data Acquisition	Stripchart recording
        Types  Cbemiluninescent	  Other	
        Manufacturer	
        Model	Serial  No. 	
        Sulfur Dioxide Monitors
        Automatic Data Acquisition	Stripchart  recording
        Types Fluorescent	  Other	
        Manufacturer                   	              	
        Model	Serial  No.
    5.   Other Aerometrlc Analyzers:
        Sensors                       	
        Recording	    Nonrecording
        Type 	    Serial No.  	
        Manufacturer                    Model

-------
                                                          Section No.  5
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 10 of 16
        Other Meteorological Instrument:
        a.  Wind Speed Sensor:  Type 	
            Manufacturer 	
            Model
                            Serial No.
            Wind Direction Sensor:  Type
            Manufacturer 	
            Model  	
                            Serial  No.
            Temperature Sensor:  Type
            Manufacturer
            Model 	
                            Serial No.
        d.  Solar Radiation Sensor: Type
            Manufacturer 	
            Model 	
E.  ANALYTICAL INSTRDMENTATION:
                            Serial No.
    1.  pH Meter: Type
            Model
                         Temp Compensated
                            Serial No.
        Conductivity Meter: Type
            Manufacturer 	
            Model       	
        Balance:
                         Temp. Compensated
                            Serial No.
Type
            Manufacturer
            Model 	
                            Serial No.
        Type of low conductivity water available:
            dionized    	 distilled 	
                                   bottled
        Laboratory Space:  Location _
            Good	 Fair
            Special  problems 	
                                   Poor

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 198U
                                                         Page 11 of  16
F.  SITE DOCUMENTATION
    1.   Identify site  location and  major sources on local topographical
        map (attach  to report).

    2.   Sketch a map to document  the environment within a 1/2 mile radius
        of the site.   Include the following information on the drawing where
        applicable.

        Site diagram and equipment  configuration     High power lines
          at center  of drawing                      Topographical features
        Roadways with  names (paved  and unpaved)        (valleys, hills, etc.)
        Parking areas  (paved and  unpaved)           Bodies of water
        Stationary sources (NEDS*)                   North direction
        Buildings (number of stories)               Undeveloped land
        Tree lines or  clusters                        (ground cover)

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 1984
                                                         Page 12 of 16

    3.   Site photographs,  labelled  to indicate the four compass directions.
Looking Morth                               Looking South
Looking West                                 Looking East

-------
                                                         Section No. 5
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 13 of  16
G.  POTENTIAL SOURCES OF INTERFERENCE OR CONTAMINATION  AT THE SITE
    1.  Within 30 m of the SAMPLER identify all  objects that are taller
        than the sampler.
        a.  Structures
            Type 	  Use	
            Height 	(m)  Distance	(m) Direction
            Type	  Use	
            Height 	(m)  Distance	(m)  Direction	
        b.  Trees
            Species	 M***  Height	(m)
            Distance 	(m) Direction	
            Species	Max.  Height	(m)
            Distance	(m) Direction	
            Species	Max.  Height 	(m)
            Distance 	(m) Direction	
        c.  Other (e.g., overhead wires, masts, etc.)
            (1)  Object	
                 Height 	(m) Direction	Distance	(m)
            (2)  Object 	
                 Height 	(m) Direction	Distance 	(m)
            (3)  Object 	
                 Height 	(m) Direction	 Distance 	(m)
            (4)  Object 	
                 Height 	(m) Direction	Distance 	(m)
            (5)  Object	
                 Height 	(m) Direction	Distance 	(m)
        d.  Is public road access to site in
                summer         Good 	 Fair	 Poor	
            and winter         Good 	 Fair	 Poor	
        e.  Type of public road surface?	
        f.  How far from the public road will collector be sited?  	(m)

-------
                                                  Section No. 5
                                                  Revision No. 1
                                                  Date October 1,  1984
                                                  Page 1U of 16
g.  Is there other than public road access to the site?  If so,
    please describe.
h.  How close can a vehicle approach the collector? 	(m)
i.  How is site secured against vandalism, etc.? 	
j.  Are there any special logistical problems?  Please describe.
Within 200 m of the site identify:
a.  Predominate land use in the area:
    Use 1 	, 	% Ose 2 	, 	% All Others 	
    (cultivated, orchard, lawn, pasture, forest, water,  swamp,
     residential)
b.  Unpaved roads and parking areas:
    Dnpaved road: Distance 	(km,m) Direction from  sampler _
    Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium	, Light 	
    Unpaved road: Distance 	(km,m) Direction from  sampler _
    Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium 	, Light 	
    Parking lot:  Distance 	(km,m) Direction from  sampler _
    Unpaved	 Surface material	
    Use:   continuous 	 intermittent 	car volume	
     large  truck  volume 	__
     Parking lot:  Distance 	(km,m) Direction from  sampler _
     Unpaved 	 Surface material __	
     Use:   continuous 	 intermittent 	 car volume 	
     large  truck  volume 	

-------
                                                      Section No.  5
                                                      Revision No. 1
                                                      Date October 1,  1981
                                                      Page 15 of 16
    Within 1 km of the site identify significant agricultural operations
    such as feedlots, dairy barns, cultivated fields, etc.
    Type	
    Distance	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
    Type	
    Distance	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
4.  Within 10 km of the site identify transportation related sources.
    a.  Main highways or expressways:  Traffic volume 	
        Direction from sampler	Distance 	(km,m) Route
        Main highways or expressways:  Traffic volume
        Direction from sampler	Distance 	(km,m) Route #
    b.  Other paved roads:  Distance	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
        Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium	, Light 	Traffic Volume	
        Other paved roads:  Distance	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
        Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium	, Light 	Traffic Volume	
    c.  Lake/river or rail traffic:
        Distance 	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
        barge	, lake steamer  	, ocean vessels	, rail	
        Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium	, Light	 Traffic Volume
        Airports  Distance	(km,m) Direction from sampler	
        Traffic:  Heavy	, Medium	, Light	
        Other transportation related sources 	
    Within 60 km  of the site  identify stationary sources:
    a.   Power plant(s):
         Name
Distance
Fuel
Name
Distance
Fuel
(km) Direction from sampler
Electrical capacity

(km) Direction from sampler
Electrical capacity

(KW_, MW_)


(KW_, MW_)

-------
                                                         Section No.  5
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 16 of  16
            Industry:
            Type/product 	
            Distance 	(km) Direction from sampler
            Comment    	   	
            Type/product	
            Distance 	(km) Direction  from  sampler
            Comment    	
            Other stationary sources:
            Type/product	
            Distance 	(km)  Direction  from  sampler
    6.   Within 60 km of the site identify significant area sources:
        Type /product 	:	
        Distance	(km)  Direction from sampler	
H.  PERSON WHO FILLED OUT THIS FORM
    Name    	
    Position
    Phone #__
    Address
    Affiliation
    Signature __

-------
                                                          Section No. 6
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 1 of 14
 6.0  FIELD OPERATIONS
 6.1  Facilities
     All  field facilities  should  be  accessible  and  should  have  a  clean
 shelter,   a level table, deionized or distilled water  (conductivity less than
 2.0 ymho/cm), and a sink or drain.  A refrigerator and a  110v AC  outlet  are
 highly  desirable.  The  former is necessary  to  preserve samples until they are
 shipped.   For weekly sampling, the samples  should be shipped within 24  hours
 of collection.
     The  precipitation  collector and the  recording rain gauge can be  run  on
 either   12v DC   storage batteries or 110v AC.  Both means have advantages and
 disadvantages.   If large current  usage   is required  (e.g.,  for  heating),
 batteries are not recommended.

 6.2  Method Selection
 6.2.1   Precipitation Collectors and Rain  Gauges -  The rain  gauge  and  the
 precipitation  collector   serve different functions.   The rain gauge measures
 the amount of precipitation.  The precipitation collector collects  a  sample
 for chemical analysis.  The two devices are not interchangeable.
 Precipitation Collectors — The  precipitation collectors  should  have  the
 following characteristics:

(a) Reliable automatic operation - collector opens at start  of  precipitation
   and  closes after event  ends.
(b) Prevent contamination of wet sample by dry  deposition.
U) Minimize evaporation.
(d) Inert  to sample constituents of interest.

-------
                                                         Section  No.  6
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 2 of 14
     Collectors, meeting these criteria are available.  The most satisfactory
collector is one based on the design of the Department of Energy's Health  and
Safety Laboratory (HASL)(1).  However, the sampler is not very efficient   for
collecting snow.
     The first three criteria are met by means of a precipitation  sensor   and
a motor-driven, tight-fitting lid for the collector container.  When the grid
and plate of the sensor are  shorted  by  a  drop  of  water,  the  motor   is
activated,  lifting  the  lid from the container.  The sensor has  two  heating
circuits.  One operates to  melt  snow  or  ice  (on the  sensor)  when   the
tanperature  is  below  2°C.   When  the lid lifts off the sample  bucket,  the
other circuit heats the  sensor  to  about  55°C  to increase   the  rate   of
evaporation  of  water  from  the  sensor.   (Heat hastens the sealing of  the
sample by the lid after precipitation ceases, thus  minimizing   the  exposure
times  to dry fallout and to snow blowout from the collector.) A seal  between
the container and the lid is achieved by a plastic foam  gasket under the   lid
and  by  a  spring load.  However, in strong winds the lid can wobble and  may
permit contaminants to enter the sample bucket.
     To  ensure  inertness  to  major  constituents  in  acid  precipitation,
polyethylene  sample  buckets (1,2)  are  usually  used, because of their low
cost,  durability,  and  availability,   high-density   linear    polyethylene
containers  can  be used for collecting and shipping samples.  Glass or metal
can affect  inorganic  sample  integrity,  but  should   be   used  if  organic
compounds are being monitored.
     Subevent or sequential samplers  separate samples on either  a  volume  or
time-of-collection  basis,  but  the  same  requirements  as  above hold.   In
volume-based  sampling, precautions must be taken to minimize mixing or  carry
over   of samples.    For   time-based  sampling, there should be  provision for
overflow during heavy  rainfalls.   For  sequential  sampling,   the   time
 corresponding  to   each subevent  specimen must be known for correlations with
 other  data.  Sequential samplers  vary greatly in sophistication  from a series
 of  connected  bottles  to  completely  automated  and   electrically operated
 designs (3-8).   One of  the latter is  available commercially(8).
 Hain Gauges — A standard, a  rain gauge  is  used  to  record  the  quantity  of

-------
                                                         Section No.  6
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October 1,  1984
                                                         Page  3 of  14'
precipitation.    Recording   rain   gauges  are  of  two  basic  operational
designs—the weighing type and the tipping bucket type.   Both types  of gauges
should  be  capable of measuring precipitation to approximately 0.25 mm (0.01
in).  Weighing gauges measure within +0.76 mm (0.03 in),  and their  accuracy
(1f  of  full  scale)  is  independent  of  precipitation rate.  The accepted
accuracy for tipping bucket gauges is 1} for precipitation  rates  of  25 mm/h
(1 in/h)  or  less,  4J for 75 mm/h (3 in/h), and 6% up to  150  mm/h  (6 in/h).
Rates are measured either directly or derived from the cumulative data.
     The recording weighing rain gauge should have an  event marker  pen  to
indicate  when  the collector is open and closed.  Such a pen typically rises
from its baseline when the collector lid opens, and  remains actuated  until
the  lid  closes  at  which  time the pen falls to its baseline position.  To
prevent the event marker pen from interfering with the  weighing trace  pen,
the two must be offset on the time axis.  Thus only one pen can be  set at the
correct time, and care must be taken to use the correct beginning and   ending
times.   Since  the operator is seldom present to observe collector operation
during an event, the event pen marker is  an  invaluable  aid  in  indicating
sampler malfunction or a power outage.
     For windy areas and especially where snowfall constitutes  more than  20%
of  the  mean  annual  precipitation,  an  Alter-type  windshield  should  be
installed around the rain gauge.  The shield should  be  level   and  its  top
should  be  1.3  cm (0.5 in) above the level of the gauge collecting orifice.
In addition, the shield should be concentric with  the  gauge.    Installation
instructions  for the improved Alter-type windshield can be obtained from the
U.S. Weather Bureau (9).  Alternatively, a Nipher-shielded  snow gauge  can  be
used for snow depth measurement.

6.2.2  pJH  and  Conductivity  Apparatus,  Temperature  Probe  -  The  pH  and
conductivity  of  a  20 ml  aliquot  of  the  precipitation  sample  should be
withdrawn and measured at the field station as soon  as  possible after  the
sample  is  collected  but  only  after  it  is  at  the  temperature   of the
calibration solutions.  The sample and the aliquot should be  protected  from
contamination during this time.

-------
                                                         Section  No.  6
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  4 of 14
pg Apparatus ~ The pH meter and electrode must'be  capable of measuring  with
a  precision  within  + 0.03  unit and with an accuracy of 0.05 unit.  Meters
should have an impedance of at least  10   ohms.    A  combination   glass   and
reference  electrode  of the nongel type with an  unprotected membrane bulb is
preferred.  The combination electrode requires less sample and  fewer washings
Uan  two  separate  electrodes;   electrodes with shielded   bulbs are more
difficult to clean, and are thus more prone to  yield  errors.   When  a   new
electrode  is obtained, it should be equilibrated overnight and stored in  the
solution recommended by the manufacturer.
Conductivity Apparatus —  The  conductivity meter and  cell  must  have  a
measurement range of 0 to 1000 umho/cm, a precision of +0.5/1 of range, and an
accuracy of ±1.0% of  range.   The  range  most   frequently  used   is   10-100
ysbo/cm.   A  temperature-compensated  cell  with  a  cell constant of  1.0 is
preferred.
Teaperature — A thermistor, thermocouple, or thermometer  can be used   to
measure solution temperature.  The temperature probe must have  an  accuracy of
at least 1°C and a precision of +p.5°C.

6.2.3  Balance or Graduated Cylinders - The amount  of  precipitation  sample
collected  can be measured with a balance or with graduated cylinders.  Since
tie density of rain samples is approximately 1.0 g/ml at 20°C,  the weight   of
tte  sample  (in  grams)  can  be  taken  to equal its volume (in ml).   The
measurement of sample volume by graduated cylinders increases  the   chance   of
contamination, so a balance is preferred.
     The precipitation sample volume can be compared to that  recorded  by   the
rain   gauge   (e.g.,   with   the  Aerochem Metrics  collector,   16.2.g   of
sanple = 0.01 in.  = 0.25 mm) to calculate the collection  efficiency  of   the
sanpler   (Section  8.4.2).   Differences between the field and  the laboratory
weight values  (container plus sample  shipped  to  the  laboratory) indicate
either  loss  of sample  during shipment or a weighing error.
      For weekly  sampling, the balance should have a capacity  of 20 kg  with  a
accuracy  of at  least  +10 g.  Triple beam balances  meeting these  requirements
 sre readily available.  The  balance should be kept  on a sturdy, level   table,

-------
                                                          Section No. 6
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 5 of 14
 and  it should  be  zeroed  daily  before weighing.  The balance should be checked
 initially in the  laboratory with  1.0 and  5.0 kg test weights.  For event  and
 sequential sampling, a 2.6 kg  capacity  triple beam balance with a sensitivity
 of at  least +1 g  should  be used.
     Graduated cylinders are not  recommended, but  if  they  are  used,  they
 should  be  plastic.  To measure  within +10 ml, the graduated cylinder should
 not  be more than  1000 ml in  capacity.    The  graduated  cylinder  should  be
 checked  before   use for accuracy in the  laboratory by weighing known volumes
 of water and comparing the results to the volume measurement after converting
 the  weight to  volume by  multiplying by  the density of the water.

 6.3  Acceptance Testing
     All precipitation collectors, rain gauges, pH and  conductivity  meters,
 and  electrodes   should   be  functionally tested before they are used in the
 field.  Acceptance  tests should  cover   the  essential  operations  of  the
 instriments.  Collectors and rain  gauges should be tested on site.   It is
 convenient to  test meters and   electrodes in  a  central  laboratory,  where
 common   standards   and procedures  are available.   Procedures   for  this
 acceptance testing are detailed below.  Procedures  for  carrying  out   these
 tests  are in the  Operations and Maintenance Manual  (10).

 6.3.1   Precipitation Collectors and Rain   Gauges  -  Collector  tests  should
 include: •

(a) sensor heating and actuating of the  lid,
(b) sensor cooling and return of the lid,
(c) sensor temperature attainment  when the lid is raised,
(d) sensor temperature with lid closed  when  ambient  temperature  is   below
   freezing, and
(e) observation of lid cycling  and sealing.
 Rain gauge tests  should  include:

(a) sensitivity and accuracy,

-------
                                                          Section No.  6
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 6 of  14

(b) clock function, and
(c) pen and recorder  functions.
 6.3.2   pH and Conductivity Meters  -  Erroneous  pH  measurements  may  not   be
 revealed  by  conventional two-point calibration procedures.  The majority of
 standard buffer solutions have  a   similar  total  ionic  strength.   However,
 precipitation  samples  differ  in  ionic  strength  from  the  standardizing
 buffers, which might introduce  a bias in the measurement.
     For these reasons it is advisable for the electrode systems used  in acid
 precipitation .pH measurements  to  be used exclusively for this task  and to be
 •onitored with respect to their performance with  known  reference   solutions
 intended  to  simulate  the  unknown  samples.   However,  for  documentation
 purposes,  calibration  with the  certified  buffer  solution  is   essential
 (11,12).
     For each of the tests indicated below  a  total  of  ten  solutions   are
 measured,  and  an   average  value  and a standard deviation are calculated.
 These  teats should  include:

(a) Evaluation of conductivity meter  and cell using 0.0003M  KC1.   System   is
    acceptable  if  within  2f  of   44.6 ymho/on  at  25 C,  and the standard
    deviation is less than 2%.
(b) Evaluation of field pH meters  using a certified laboratory  pH  electrode.
    System  is  acceptable if the average pH and standard deviation are within
    0.03 pH unit of the documented  values obtained using two certified   buffer
    solutions.
 (c) Evaluation of pH electrodes  using pH electrode reference solution.   System
    is  acceptable  if the average  pH is within 0.1 pH unit of the known value
    and the standard deviation is  less than 0.05 pH unit, when using  reference
    solutions which simulate the ionic strength of precipitation samples.
  6.4  Sampler and Rain Gauge Installation and Operation
      The precipitation collector should be mounted on the  ground so that   the
  rim  of  the mouth or opening is level and at least 1 m above the ground,  and
  it should  be properly anchored against strong winds  (cement  blocks  can   be
  used as weights).  The collector may be shielded from the  wind,  but it should

-------
                                                         Section  No.  6
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 7 of  14
not be put in an area where there will be excessive turbulence caused  by   the
shield  or  where  there  are obstructive objects such as trees and  buildings
close by.  In the winter, loss of snow from the collector can  occur  due   to
blow  out.   Also, in windy areas the bucket should be secured to  the  sampler
by means of a spring or elastic tie down cord hooked to the bucket handle  and
collector table.
     The  sampler  installation  and   operation   are  described   in   the
•anufacturer's  instructions  and  in  the  Operations and  Maintenance Manual
(to).  The  precipitation  collector  requires  no  calibration,  but  proper
functioning   should  be  checked  frequently.  . The  rain   gauge   should  be
calibrated according to the manufacturer's  instructions after  installation
and checked at least annually.
     The rain gauge should be mounted on a firmly anchored  support  or  base,
e.g.,  cement  blocks,  so that the funnel rim is level and at about the  same
height as the collector  bucket  rim  to  enable  comparisons  of   collection
amounts  between  the two.  The gauge level can be checked  with a  carpenter's
level placed at two intersecting positions.  The gauge mouth should  be  high
enough not to be covered by snow.

6.4.1  Routine Checks on Collector, Rain Gauge and Site - Some  tests  should
be  carried  out routinely on the precipitation collector and the  rain gauge.
The detailed procedures for these tasks and a checklist for  conducting  them
are provided in the Operations and Maintenance Manual (10).

6.4.2  Corrective Action - Any indication of a malfunction  should be recorded
in  the  logbook,  and  the  field manager should be notified.  An attempt to
diagnose and correct  the  problem  should  be  made  with   the  aid  of  the
Operations  and  Maintenance Manual (10) as soon as possible.  If the problem
cannot be corrected, the field manager or equipment  manufacturer   should  be
asked  for  advice and direction.  Any action taken should  be recorded in the
logbook.

-------
                                                          Section No.  6
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 8 of 14
6.5  Sampling Methodology
     This section gives the  methodology  for   sample   collection,  handling,
measurement, and preservation.   The procedures  used  to  accomplish each  of  the
above-mentioned  tasks  are  given  in   the   Operations    and   Maintenance
Manual (10).

6.5.1  Sample Collection and Schedule  -  The   choice   of   sampling schedule
depends  on  the  program  objective  and  the  available funds.  To correlate
precipitation data with aerometric and/or meteorological data, event or daily
sampling  must  be  used.   To   measure  the amount of deposition and/or  its
effects* a weekly sample may be sufficient. Sampling  periods longer than  one
week  are  not  advised  because  significant changes  in sample chemistry  can
occur as the sample stands in the collector.

6.5.2  Handling of Plastic  Containers  -  Treatment  of  plastic  containers
depends  on the species to be measured, the container's previous use,  and  its
cleanliness.  In most cases, the cleaning  of   the  bucket,  lid  and   gasket
should be done in the laboratory.
     The container should be capped with a clean lid and kept  in  a  plastic
bag  until  immediately before use, and it must be resealed immediately after
use.  When a bucket is to be returned to the laboratory with  or  without  a
sample,  it  should not be sealed with its original lid.  Instead, the sample
should be covered with the lid from a new bucket which is replacing the  old
bucket  in  the  collector.  Thus the chance of contamination from the stored
lid  is eliminated.
     An alternative approach used by the Canadians  (13,14)  that  eliminates
the  washing  of  buckets and lids is the use of laminated nylon-polyethylene
bags inserted into the buckets.  When  the  bag  is  placed  in  the  bucket,
plastic   gloves  are  worn  and no contact with the interior of the bag further
than 7.5  cm inside is made.  A  fold of 7-10 cm  is  extended  down  over  the
outside   surface  of   the  bucket.  When removing the bag containing a  sample,
the  bag is grasped by the  fold.  The bag is sealed  below  the  fold  with  a
cable   tie  (13)  or  by  heat (13,14).  Up to 500 ml of sample is emptied from

-------
                                                         Section Ho. 6
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 9 of  14
the bag into a polyethylene bottle by cutting a  prewashed  and  dried  corner
off  the  bag  with a clean scissors and pouring the  sample directly into  the
bottle.

6.5.3  Sample Handling - The sample bucket must  be  checked for  precipitation
at  the  time  and  frequency  set  by  the schedule.  However, if a snowfall
occurs, the sample should be removed as scon as  possible and  replaced with  a
new bucket to minimize snow loss by overflow and blow out.

5.5.4  Sample Preservation and Storage - Sample  degradation can occur due   to
chemical  interactions  (e.g.,  with particulates or  gases) or to biochemical
reactions.  In addition,  losses  of  potassium   and   some  trace  metals   by
adsorption  on  polyethylene  walls have been reported (15).  Preservation of
sample integrity can be maximized by filtration, sealing, and storage  in  the
dark at about 4°C.  After pH and conductivity measurements, filtration  should
be done with a 0.45 urn organic membrane filter (16),  if inorganic species  are
to  be  analyzed.   Although  biocides such as toluene or chloroform might be
effective in stopping biochemical activity, they may  interfere in the  various
aeasurements  or analyses (2) and thus should not be  added  to the sample.   If
certain species must be preserved, an aliquot of the  sample can  be mixed with
a preservative in a separate container.

6.6  Field Measurements
     Field measurement of  pH,  specific  conductance,  and   temperature  are
discussed in general terms in this section;  detailed procedures are given in
the Operations and Maintenance Manual (10).  Sample pH and  conductivity  are
aeasured  in  both  the field and the laboratory to detect  sample changes  and
errors in measurement.  Results of field measurements should  be  recorded on a
Field Data Form that will accompany the sample to the laboratory.

5.6.1  £H Determination Method - Since rain samples generally have pH   values
between  3.0  and  6.0, the pH meter should be calibrated with pH 3.0 and  6.0
standard buffers.  For other less acidic samples,  pH  4.0  and  7.0 buffers

-------
                                                          Section No.  6
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 10 of 14
should be used, and for basic samples, pH 5.0 and 8.0 buffers should be used.
Each station should receive the needed calibration buffer solutions from  the
central  laboratory.   The  stations  should  notify  the laboratory when the
buffer supply is nearly exhausted or if it  appears  to  be   contaminated  by
algae growth.
     The pH meter should be calibrated before and after each measurement or a
series  of  measurements  at one time.  If the initial and final calibrations
have changed by more than 0.02 unit, the measurements must be  repeated.   If
this  change  reoccurs, a problem exists with the apparatus, and it should be
remedied.
     Each electrode should be assigned an identification number so  that  its
calibration  can  be traced.  To check for electrode problems (aging and loss
of sensitivity), each site  should  periodically  receive  from  the  central
laboratory  a polyethylene bottle of electrode reference solution with pH and
conductivity similar to those of rain samples.  The  pH  of  this  sample  is
aeasured  and  reported to the central laboratory.  The field pH value should
agree within +0.10 pH  unit  of  the  assigned  value  if  the  electrode  is
operating properly.
     Electrode performance can also  be  determined  by  observing  the  time
needed  to  attain  a  stable reading, where a stable reading is defined as a
constant pH value  (+0.02 units) for a period of  1 min.  The time required  to
attain  stability   should  be  less than 5 min. for a well-behaved electrode.
Results of these tests should be guides for the measurement technique and the
equilibration  time to  be  used for  precipitation sample measurement.  If an
electrode  test at  any  time exhibits out-of-control behavior (as indicated  by
 the above  criteria), the electrode and/or solution should be replaced.

 5.6.2  Specific  Conductance  Determination  Method  -  The  conductivity  (or
 resistance)   of  a solution  varies with electrode area and spacing as well as
 with temperature and  ion  concentration.  Therefore, the  measuring  apparatus
 has to be calibrated  to obtain the  cell constant or to adjust the meter.  For
 calibration, a KC1 solution   of  known  conductivity  should  be  used.   The
 temperature  of  the   KC1 standard  and  the  precipitation sample should be the

-------
                                                         Section No.  6
                                                         Revision  No.  1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page  11 of  14
sane.  For rain samples, a 0.00050M KC1 solution is  ideal.   All  conductances
should be reported in umho/cm corrected to 25  C.
     The conductivity apparatus should be calibrated before   and  after   each
measurement  or series of measurements at one  time.   If a change of more  than
5$ occurs, the measurements should be repeated.   If   the drift persists,  a
problem  exists with the apparatus.  In general, stable values  occur  in about
30 sec.  Conductivity of the samples can be measured on the  same aliquot  used
for  pH.   IF  THIS  IS  DONE, THE CONDUCTIVITY  MUST BE MEASURED BEFORE pH TO
AVOID ERROR DUE TO SALT CONTAMINATION FROM THE ELECTRODE.
     The conductivity cell generally has few problems.   However, the   working
conductivity   standard   (0.0005M   KC1)   may    degrade  slowly   or  become
contaminated.  To minimize errors due to changes in  the calibration standard,
the  working  solution  should  be  replaced  quarterly.   When a  new working
standard is received, it should be checked against the  old  working  standard,
and  the two values should agree within 4.0?.   If they  do not,  the laboratory
which supplied the standard to the site should be notified.
     Conductivity standards should be sealed and stored in  a refrigerator  to
minimize changes.  Generally, changes of less than 2} monthly may be ignored;
if greater than 2%, the field values can be corrected for the larger  changes
by  prorating  with time in a linear manner.  Another means of evaluating the
working conductivity standard is the use  of  unknown  quality  control  test
samples  submitted periodically from the laboratory to  determine the accuracy
and precision of the station's specific  conductance measurements.   If  the
laboratory finds that the station's conductivity measurement differs from the
laboratory's by more than 5%, the laboratory  should inform  the   field  and
quality  assurance personnel and should replace  the old conductivity standard
or the meter.

5.6.3  Temperature Measurements - Each field thermometer or temperature probe
should  be  assigned  an identification number so that  it will be  possible to
trace its certification.  The temperature probe  should  be  washed   and  dried
before  the solution temperature is measured.   It should never be  placed  in a
solution on which pH and conductivity measurements will subsequently be made.

-------
                                                         Section No.  6
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 12 of  14
     The  central  support  laboratory   should   maintain    and   store    an
IBS-calibrated  thermometer  as  a  primary standard,  and  one  field thermometer
should be  certified  against this  as   a secondary standard.   All field
thermometers or temperature probes should be  calibrated  against the certified
(secondary) thermometer in a circulating water bath  in the 0° to 25°C  range.
After  initial  calibration, the temperature  probes  should be recalibrated at
least once per year.

6.6.4  Gravimetric Measurements  -  For weighing   rain buckets,  the   balance
should  be  in  a  room  free from  drafts  and on a   table that minimizes
ribrations.  The balance should  be level.
     Before being shipped to the field,  each  balance should  be  calibrated
with  MBS  traceable  weights in the central  support laboratory.  Annually, a
full calibration should be performed by  weighing two NBS  traceable   weights
(1.0 and 5.0 kg) on the field balance.  The actual  reference weight, measured
weight, and weight difference should be  recorded.  The   rain  gauges   can  be
calibrated using a set of weights  generally available from  its supplier.

6.7  Documentation
     All data, observations, and changes or modifications must be  dated   and
documented  on  data  forms  and/or  in logbooks in triplicate and duplicate,
respectively  (carbon paper may be  used).  One copy of each  should be  kept  in
the station records, and another shipped with the sample;  the third  copy (of
the data form) should be mailed to the laboratory separately from the   sample
to help trace a missing sample.
     Samples  must be labeled so  that  they  can  be readily  and correctly
aatched  with their data forms.  The label should contain  station, date, and
sample weight marked with a pencil or a ball  point pen  so that it is   legible
if  it  should  gets wet.
     Forms for use  in documenting the data are provided in  the Operations and
Maintenance Manual(10).

-------
                                                          Section No. 6
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 13 of 14
 6.8   References

 1. J.N.  Galloway and G.E. Likens, Water, Air and Soil Pollut. 6, 241 (1976).

 2. J.N.  Galloway and G.E. Likens, Tellus 30, 71 (1978).

 3. H.B.H.  Cooper, Jr., J.A. Lopez, and J.M. Demo, Water, Air Soil  Pollut. 6,
   351  (1976).

 4. D.F.  Gatz,    R.F. Selznan,    R.K. Langs,    and     R.B. Holtzman,     J.
   Appl. Meteorol. JO, 341  (1971).

 5. J.J.  Morgan and H.M.  Liljestrand, "The Measurement and  Interpretation  of
   Acid    Rainfall  in   the  Los  Angeles  Basin,"  California  Institute  of
   Technology Report, No. AC-2-80 (February 20, 1980).

 6. J.K.  Robertson, T.W.  Dolzine and R.C. Graham, "Chemistry and Precipitation
   from Sequentially Sampled Storms," EPA report to be published.

 7. G.S.  Raynor  and  J.P. McNeil,  "The   Brookhaven   Automatic   Sequential
   Precipitation Sampler," BNL-50818, Brookhaven National Laboratory (January
   1978);   Atmos. Environ. J3, 149 (1979).

 8. P.B.S.K. Associates,  P.O. Box  131»  State  College,  PA.  16801,  Bulletin
   177.6801.

 9. Installation   Instructions   for    Improved    Alter-Type    Windshield,
   U.S.  Dept. of  Commerce, Weather Bureau, Instrumental Engineering Division
   (November 1957).

10. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems - Vol.  V
   -  Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems.  Part 13! - Operations and
   Maintenance  Manual.   0. S. Environmental  Protection  Agency,   Research
   Triangle Park, N.C.,  EPA-600/4-82-042b (January  1981).

11. G. Masinenko and W.F. Koch, "A Critical Review  of  Measurement  Practices
   for  the Determination  of  pH  and  Acidity  Atnospheric Precipitation,"
   NBSIR 84-2866.  To be published by Environment International  (1984).

12. J.A.  Illingworth,  "A Common  Source  of  Error  in   pH   Measurements,"
   Biochem. J.,  195. 259-262 (1981).

13. Acidic Precipitation  in  Ontario  Study,  Technical  and  Operating  Manual
   APIOS  Deposition Monitoring Program, W.S. Bardswick, Ed. Ontario Ministry
   of the Environment, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (April 1983).

-------
                                                          Section No. 6
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                               14 of 14
14.  T.  Jarv,   "Acid  Rain  Studies  at   Ontario   Hydro:  Air,   Aerosol   and
    Precipitation  Chemistry  Measurements  for  1981,"  Report  No. C82-81-K,
    Ontario Hydro Research Division, Toronto, Ontario, Canada (Sept. 2,  1982).

15.  W.H.  Chan, F. Tomassini  and  B. Loescher,  "The  Evaluation' of  Sorption
    Properties of  Precipitation  Constituents  on  Polyethyelene  Surfaces,"
    Atmos.  Environ. J7,  1779 (1983).

16.  M.E.  Peden and L.M.  Skowron, "Ionic Stability of  Precipitation  Samples,"
    Atmos.  Environ.  J2, 2343 (1978).

-------
                                                          Section  No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 1 of 20
7.0  LABORATORY OPERATIONS
7.1  Analytical Reagents
7.1.1  Purity  Requirements  -  Water  having  a   conductivity   less   than
2.0 umho/cm  (resistivity  greater  than  0.5 megohm/cm)  is  acceptable  for
analysis of major constituents in rainwater.  In the past,  high  purity  has
been  obtained  by  distilling  water;   however,  distillation  systems have
several drawbacks.  Even double- or triple-distilled  water  contains  easily
detectable   impurities.    Stills  require  periodic  shutdown  and  careful
cleaning, and water production is relatively low.  If distilled water is used
then it must be passed through an ion exchange column before use.
     Ion exchange systems, on the other hand, provide high quality water, are
relatively   maintenance  free,  and  provide  water  on  demand.   The  only
maintenance required is to change cartridges periodically.  It is  preferable
to  pretreat  the  feed  water with a reverse osmosis system to remove a high
percentage of ionic impurities and to prolong the life of  the  ion  exchange
beds.   In the last stage of treatment, a 0.2-micron filter should be used to
remove microorganisms and particles.  A meter to monitor the conductivity  of
the  water  should  be  installed  inline directly before the spigot, and the
system  should  be  checked  if  the  conductivity   becomes   greater   than
2.0 ymho/cm.   If  trace organics are to be determined, an activated charcoal
filter should also be used for purification.
     Reagents used for analyses must meet standards of quality denoted by the
terms  "analytical  reagent  grade,"  "reagent  grade,"  and  "ACS analytical
reagent grade."  All of  these  grades  are  equivalent,  and  they  identify
reagents  which  conform  to  current  specifications  of  the  Committee  on
Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society (1).
     It may not be possible to obtain dyes of analytical  reagent  grade  for
automated  colorimetric  ammonium  and  phosphate  analyses.   For  these,  a
statement of  purity  should  be  obtained  from  the  manufacturer  and,  if
necessary, the weights of dye used in reagent preparation should be adjusted.

-------
                                                          Section No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1, 1984
                                                          Page 2 of 20
Tie lanthanum nitrate used as a flame buffer in atomic absorption  should  be
•atomic absorption grade."

7.1.2  Storage Requirements - Analytical reagents have a  finite  shelf   life,
so  all  chemicals should be dated by the receiving clerk and labeled  "Do not
use after...".  Unless otherwise specified  by  the  manufacturer,  inorganic
chemicals have a shelf life of 5 yr at room temperature.
     Concentrations   of   reagents    in    solution    may    change     due
to:  (1) biological   action,   (2) chemical   reaction   (e.g.,  oxidation),
(3) evaporation,  and  (4) adsorption-desorption   phenomena   on   container
surfaces.   All  of these effects can be slowed by refrigeration.  Guidelines
for reagent storage can be found in references 2, 3 and 4.

f-2  Laboratory Support for the Field
     The laboratory must prepare standards for calibrating field  instruments
and  for  field testing the quality control samples.  Clean sample containers
and shipping materials should be supplied as needed.  This section  discusses
reference  solutions,  laboratory  evaluation of field equipment, and  routine
supply of materials.  Detailed procedures for preparation of solutions are in
the Operations and Maintenance Manual (5).
     Accuracies of field conductivity and pH measurements should be evaluated
vith  audit  samples.   At  scheduled  intervals,  an  audit sample should be
prepared using the procedures in the Operations and Maintenance Manual (5).
     All meters and electrodes should be tested in the laboratory before they
are  shipped  to  the  field.  Meters usually have a serial number affixed, but
electrodes do not, so an identification number  should  be  affixed  to  each
electrode.    Acceptance tests are  described in the Operations and Maintenance
«anual  (5).

-------
 I  •": S\ ,  —,
'-', -V--1: F:oc

-------
                                                          Section No.  7
                                                          Revision  No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  198U
                                                          Page 3 of 20
7.3 Laboratory Logistics
7.3.1  Sample Handling in the  Laboratory  -  All  samples  received  by  the
laboratory  should  be  checked in by a receiving clerk who:  (1)  records the
site, date, and other identification;  (2) checks the field data form against
sample   labels   to   identify   discrepancies;   (3) assigns  a  laboratory
identification number to the sample and records the number and  the  date  of
arrival  on the data form and in the logbook;  and (4) examines the data form
and the sample for certain conditions and codes the information on  the  data
form.   These  codes,  which  may  be  useful later in interpreting the data,
should be stored with the sample data in the computer.   Table  7-1  suggests
some  information  to  be coded.  After logging-in the samples, the receiving
clerk should refrigerate them immediately and retain the data forms  received
with the samples.
     The receiving clerk should replace the old sample bucket  or  containers
with  clean,  sealed,  bagged  ones, and should ship the new ones in shipping
cartons to the field sites with other required materials.  These can be  sent
by  ground  transport  since  each  site should have a several-week supply on
hand.
     After all analyses have been completed  and  the  results  checked,  the
sample  can be transferred into a 125 ml polyethylene bottle for storage in a
refrigerator or freezer for 6 mo  to  1  yr  for  other  tests  or  analyses.
Stability tests over several months indicate that storage at either 4°C (6,7)
or 0°C (7) will preserve the sample.

7.3«2  Laboratory Documentation - The following documents should be  reviewed
regularly  by  the  laboratory analyst and the supervisor to determine if the
documents are up-to-date and are being followed.

1. Laboratory Standard Operating Procedure - instructions on  laboratory  and
   instrument operations.
2. The Laboratory Quality Assurance Plan - laboratory QA protocol,  including
   personnel responsibilities and use of QC samples.

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 4 of  20
TABLE 7-1.  SAMPLE INFORMATION TO BE CODED
Snow/ice
Mixed:   snow/rain; hall/rain
Sample  contaminated
Possible sample leakage in shipping
Sampler inoperative - no sample
Insufficient sample for complete measurement
Bain gauge inoperative
Boticeable suspended particulates
Lid cycling
Field pH and conductivity measured x days after scheduled
   iple removal or end of event
pR/conductivity/temperature meter inoperative
Sample partially frozen
Unusual condition in area
Collocated samples
Sequential samples

-------
                                                         Section Mo. 7
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 5 of-20

3. List  of_ In-Houae Samples  -  dates  for completion of analysis to  allow   the
   analyst to schedule  further analyses.

4. Instrument Performance  Study  Information -  information on baseline  noise,
   calibration  standard   response,  precision  as a function of concentration,
   and detection limits used by  analyst  and   supervisor  to  evaluate  daily
   instrument performance.

5. Quality Control Charts  -  Once a   month,  update  all  control   limits   to
   include  data from  analyses  of the previous month;  generate plots of  all
   QC samples and curve parameters.

6. Data  Sheet Quality Control  Report - generate a QC report  after   data   for
   each   analysis are  placed  in   the  computer (preferably within 1 day of
   analysis);  present  Information for all QC parameters;   flag   all  data
   which exceed the statistically established  QC limits;  have the  supervisor
   review this report to   decide what  is to be   done  for  out-of-control
   samples;  and if necessary, reanalyze samples.
                                         »
7. The Analyst's Spike  Plot  -  daily  when the analysis is set  up,   the  first
   sample analyzed should  be the analyst spike;  percentage recovery for this
   sample should be calculated and plotted by  the analyst in real time.
7.3.3   Traceability of Calibration Standards  - For chemical  traceability all

calibration  standards  must be prepared from ACS reagent grade salts,  and the

accuracy  of  calibration  standard  preparations  must  be   checked.     With

procedures  proposed  here,  accuracy  is checked by running  an independently

prepared analyst spike  with each analysis and  by checking each  new  set  of

stock standards against the old.

     For gravimetric measurements,  NBS  traceability  is  provided  by  daily
balance  checks  with   weights  traceable  to   NBS-certified  weights,  so each
laboratory should maintain a set of NBS-traceable weights.   The  recommended

procedure  is to purchase weights traceable to NBS from a commercial supplier
and to have them certified by an NBS-approved  laboratory; it is  unnecessary
and expensive to have NBS calibrate a set of weights directly.


7.3.4  Preparation of   Analyst's  Spikes  -   When   preparing   calibration

standards,  the  analyst  should  prepare an analyst's spike  from a different

stock solution.  The concentration of the spike should  be approximately  at

tie  midpoint  of the calibration curve;  however, if the majority of  samples

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Pate October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 6 of 20
nave concentrations below the  midstandard,   the  spike  should  be  prepared
within that range.

7.3.5  Analytical Data Computations  -  The   concentrations  of  the  various
constituents  in each sample are based on calibration standards, which should
be run at the beginning and end of the analysis and periodically  during  the
analysis.    Sample  data  are  calculated  from  linear  least  squares  fit
parameters of the bracketing calibration standards.  The linear least squares
fit  yields the following parameters:  slope (m), intercept (b), error of fit
(e) and correlation coefficient (r).   The  slope  and  intercept  predict  a
relationship between concentration standards and instrument response:
pi -s.
                  b  (r XJ.9990)                                          7-1
where y . is the predicted instrument  response,  based  on  the  calibration
constants, and x  is the concentration of standard i.
     Equation 7-1 yields the preferred fit where major components  of  random
variance are assumed to occur primarily in instrument response.  If the range
of concentrations observed is very large, it might not be possible to  use  a
single  equation.   Concentration ranges should then be defined with separate
linear least square fit.
     Rearrangement  of  Equation  7-1   yields   the   sample   concentration
corresponding to an instrumental measurement (Equation 7-2):

       *j = (yaj - b)/m                                                   7-2

vsere x . is the calculated concentration for a  sample ,  y_ .  is  the  actual
       J                                                  aJ
instrument  response  for  a sample, and m and b are the calculated slope and
intercept from the latest calibration standards run.
     The error term is calculated from the difference between  the  predicted
instrument  response,  y  .,  and  the  actual instrument response, yai, for a
given calibration standard (Equation 7-3):

-------
                                                          Section  No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 7 of 20
 where n is the number of calibration standards.
 This term, which indicates how much random scatter is in the calibration,  has
 the  same  units  as  the y variable (instrument response)  and thus should be
 directly compared between calibrations only when all setup  parameters  (scale
 factor, concentration range, etc.) are identical.

 7.1*  Quality Control Program
      When analytical data are reported, it  is  essential  to  specify  their
 quality.    Statements  about  quality should refer to the particular data  set
 being reported, not to laboratory analyses in general.   To   accomplish  this,
 an   internal  QC  program  should  be  implemented.   Internal  QC  includes
 calibration and real-time control by the analyst, preparation of  special   QC
 samples  by  the QC chemist, analysis of those samples  by the analyst, review
 of the data by the laboratory supervisor and QA  coordinator,   scheduled data
 checking  for  transcription errors by data processing  personnel, and a final
 review of all QC data by the QA coordinator before final reporting.
      This  section  specifies  QC  samples  to  be  analyzed,   and  discusses
 responsibilities  for  evaluation  of  the  QC data. Control charts for both
 analyst review  and  managerial  review  are  stressed.   Procedures  require
 real-time  review  of analytical performance by  the analyst,  and QC review of
 all data  directly after input to the computer.

 7.1*.!   Real-Time Quality Control Procedures - These procedures   are   designed
 to  spot   problems  during  the  analysis  so that  corrections  can be made
 immediately.   A brief description of  the  recommended   procedures  for each
 measurement is provided below:

(a) Real-Time  Plotting of Analyst Spike   Data  —   After   each   instrument   is
    calibrated,  the analyst should immediately run an analyst spike  to ensure
    that calibration standards were correctly prepared and that  no degradation
    of   the  standards  has occurred.   After the analyst  spike sample  has been
    run, its value should be calculated  by using the  first  calibration  curve

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 8 of 20

    of   the  day.  The  percentage recovery should be calculated and plotted as
    indicated  in  Figure  7-1.   (For  pH  and  conductivity,  the   absolute
    magnitude,  not the  percentage recovery, should be plotted.) The horizontal
    average recovery and control limit  lines  (Figure 7-1) are those calculated
    in   the  most recent monthly QC  report.   If an out-of-limits data point is
    noted,  an explanation should be  sought.   If eight successive  values  fall
    on  one  side of the  average line, the  indicated bias should be evaluated.

(b)  Gravimetric Measurements  — The  analytical balance  should  be  calibrated
    frequently against  Class-S weights, and the Balance Calibration Log should
    be  completed.  The  balance should be  zeroed before each use.

(c)  £H  Measurement — The pH  meter should be  calibrated as  indicated  in   the
    Operations  and  Maintenance  Manual  (5). The first  sample analyzed after
    calibration should  be the pH electrode reference  solution.   The  .analyst
    should  plot and evaluate  the pH  value.  Backup electrodes should always be
    in  the  laboratory to check the first  electrode(s) if  the  reading  differs
    from  the  previous  analysis of the  reference solution by more than +0.03
    units.   Calibration  drift  should  be  evaluated  after  20  samples,   are
    analyzed.  If the drift is more  than  +0.02 pH unit, the analysis should be
    stopped, and the meter and electrodes should be  checked.

(d)  Strong Acid and Acidity Measurements  —   For  strong  acid  determination,
    each  day when sample measurements  are begun, three conditioning solutions
    (if applicable) and an analyst spike  should  be  measured  and  calculated
    using  the  linear  least  squares fit, as  described in the procedure in  the
    Operations and Maintenance Manual (5).   If correlation  coefficients  from
    the  calculation  are  less  than  0.9990, the indicated problem should be
    eliminated.  The  value of V   (the equivalent  volume   of  base  added)   for
    each  conditioning  solution*  and  the  analyst  spike percentage  recovery
    should be  plotted   and  obtained  as indicated in  the  Operations   and
    Maintenance  Manual  (5).   At   the end of  the day, an analyst spike and  a
    conditioning solution sample  (if  applicable)  should be  analyzed.    The
    initial  conditioning  solution   potential  for each sample  (if applicable)
    should be within 1.2 mv of  the  potential  for   the  conditioning  solution.
    According  to  the Operations  and Maintenance Manual  (5), an analyst spike
    should be analyzed before and  after  samples  are  determined  and  these
    values should be plotted daily.

 (e) Conductivity Measurement — Each day, the conductivity apparatus should be
    calibrated before and after samples are  analyzed.  The  first sample should
    be an  aliquot of a 0.0003M KC1  (conductivity  - U4.6ymho/cm  at   25° C)  or
    the  pH  electrode   reference   solution.   The analyst should  calculate  the
    conductivity and then plot  and evaluate  the  conductivity of  this  reference
    sample.

 (f) Automated  Colorimetric Analysis — This  instrument  should  be  set   up,   and
    the  baseline  noise and  instrument  response  should   be   evaluated   by
    comparison with data from the instrument performance  study.    Any   problem
    noted   should  be   investigated.   The  instrument  should  be  calibrated as

-------
    CD
    3<
    o
    CO
    o
    01
    ft
    *
    01
    O
   o

    »
   «4
   O
>   N
O   *
0   8
tu   <>
   3«
   ID
   01
   10
   N
               sou
                                        Section No.  7

                                        Revision No.  1

                                        Date October 1,  198i

                                        Page 9 of  20



                SPIKE  DftTfl   FSC= 1O.OO ug/mI
                                                                     Upper Control

                                                                   "- Limit
                                                               103,7
                                                                uwi_- Upper Warning

                                                               1O3.4 Limit
                                                               1OO.S
                                                                     Lower Warning
                                                                l-Ct_» Lower Control

                                                               •38. 14 Limit
              +
    +
8   12  16  2O  24  28  32   36

            DBTR  POINT  *
                                                        48  52
              Figure 7-1.   Analyst Spike Plot for SO* Analysis

-------
                                                          Section No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date  October  1,  196-
                                                          Page  10 of 20

    described in the Operations  and Maintenance Manual  (5).   For real-time  QC,
    the  first  calibration  curve  should  be checked  for linear response  and
    adequate detection limit by  using a linear least squares  fit of the   first
    calibration  curve and by determining a detection limit.   Linearity should
    not be less than  0.9990;   the  detection  limit   should be within   the
    statistically  established  control  limits.   The  first sample analyzed
    should be the analyst spike.  Concentrations  of  this  sample  should   be
    calculated from the first calibration curve, and the  value obtained should
    be plotted and evaluated. In addition, the  calibration   response  during
    analysis  should  be  checked to see that it is changing  less than  5%  from
    one calibration curve to the next.  If a  greater   change is noted,   the
    analysis should be stopped and an explanation sought.

(g) Ion  Chroma to graphic  Analysis  —  Calibration  procedures   are  in    the
    Operations  and  Maintenance Manual  (5).   For real-time QC the baseline
    noise and the response of the first  standard  at   setup   time  should   be
    monitored.   The  first  sample  analyzed should be the analyst spike;   it
    should be calculated from the  first  calibration   curve, and  the   value
    should be plotted and evaluated.  Linearity of the  least  square fit should
    be no less than 0.995  (to  allow  for  1C  non-linearity in calibration
    curve).

(h) Atomic Absorption Analysis — Atomic absorption calibration  procedures  are
    in the Operations and Maintenance Manual  (5).  For  real-time QC, the  first
    calibration curve should be  analyzed, and the linear  least squares  fit  of
    response   vs   concentration   should  be  calculated.    The correlation
    coefficient should be 0.9995 or greater, and the detection limit should be
    within  the  statistically  established limits.  The  first sample analyzed
    should be the analyst spike;  it  should be  plotted  in real time.


 7.^.2 Analysis and Evaluation of  Quality Control Samples -  At least once each
 analysis  day, a reagent blank, an old sample, a duplicate  sample, an  analyst

 spike, and a blind sample should  be  analyzed   following   the recommendations

 below:


 (a) Reagent Blank — This deionized water QC  sample, which is subjected to the
    same   preparation   procedure as  the routine samples,  should  be analyzed to
    check for  random  contamination which  may  have  occurred in    sample
    preparation or analysis.

 (b) Old Sample — This  randomly chosen, previously analyzed  QC sample   (if  no
    sample degradation has  occurred)   provides  information  on  analytical
    precision  for different  days of analysis;   it may  provide  information  on
    sample stability, but  this is not its  primary purpose.  Sample degradation
    can  be corroborated by a repeat measurement at another time  and  the  value
    in the QC  data  noted  accordingly.

-------
                                                           Section No.  7
                                                           Revision  No.  1
                                                           Date October 1,  1984
                                                           Page  11 of  20

(c) Duplicate Sample — This randomly chosen QC sample  is a  reanalysis  of  a
    sample  analyzed  during  the  same  analytical   run.   If  preparation is
    necessary before analysis, it is prepared twice.  The result  may  be   used
    to calculate analytical precision for the measurement method.

(d) Analyst Spike — This QC sample prepared  by  the  analyst  from  a  stock
    solution  independent  of  that  used to prepare  the calibration standards
    provides information on the accuracy of the calibration standard  and  the
    precision  of  analysis.   The  analyst  spike should  be analyzed at the
    beginning of the run;  results should be calculated and  plotted  in  real
    time.

(e) Blind Sample — This QC sample is a  standard of  known  authority  (NBS,
    OSGS,  or  EPA).  It is inserted into the analytical run as  a blind sample
    by the laboratory supervisor.  The purpose of this  QC sample is  to  assess
    data quality independently of analyst judgment.

 7.4.3  Data Screening Tools - For most precipitation measurements,  100% QC of

 each  sample  cannot  be  attained.   However,  with  QC  procedures properly

 implemented for each analysis batch, adequate screening of continued,  proper

 instrument  functioning can be achieved.  Recommended  data checks for routine

 screening of measurement data include the following:


 1.  Calibrations — provide statistics for evaluating the analytical  method.

 Duplicate calibrations, performed before and after analysis of  field samples,

 yield data on instrument reproducibility and drift.   Statistics from  routine

 calibration data include:
      Slope (m) and Intercept (b) - of the least squares fit of the data for a
 technique  and instrument range should be fairly constant.  Visual inspection
 of values from successive days or  comparison  with  values  obtained  during
 method validation can be used for quality control.
      Correlation Coefficient (r) - is often used in a  semi-quantitative  way
 to  evaluate  goodness of fit of the relation of one variable with respect to
 another.  Values near +1.0 and -1.0 are good and values near 0 are poor.  The
 actual  range of good fit values will depend on the particular measurement or
 test.   For  most  instrumental   techniques   employed   for   analysis   of
 precipitation samples, rX).9990 would be acceptable.
      Residual Error (e) - is a measure of the scatter of data points off  the
 regression  line  indicating  "noise11  in  the  calibration.  Such scatter is
 related  to  the  expected  precision  of  the  analysis.   For  analysis  of
 precipitation samples, e<2% of full scale of instrument response, for a given
 concentration range, is acceptable.

-------
                                                          Section No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 12 of 20 .
2.  Spikes, Duplicates and. Reagent  Blanks  —  are  the  primary  tools   for
monitoring  the  integrity  of  the  analysis.  As a minimum, at least one QC
spike, one duplicate and one reagent blank  should  be  included  with every
sample  batch.   If calibrations are performed before and after each batch of
samples for optimum control, a QC spike of known value should be run  at   the
beginning,  after  calibration  is completed.  If a large batch of samples is
run, analysis of the QC spike should be repeated after every twenty  samples.
The  concentration values of the spikes, duplicates and reagent blanks should
be entered into the computer before analysis, so that control limits  can  be
checked  as  the  analysis  results  are  keyed  into the computer.  Detailed
discussion on computation of control limits is given in Section 7.4.4 below.

3.  Old Samples — are reanalyzed to obtain information on sample  stability,
which  varies  from  sample to sample.  Analytes such as H*, NH£, POT , and
NO." are susceptible to degradation, and if degradation  is  observed  (i.e.,
lower  analytical  results  are  obtained  for  an  ion), sample handling and
preservation techniques should be examined.  Old sample data may be  used  to
calculate  control  limits  vising  a  mathematical  approach  similar to that
discussed In 7.4.4 below.

7.4.4  Control Limits Determination -  QC  data  are  stored,  tabulated   and
sometimes  plotted  as a function of time.  The abscissa is the chronological
order of analysis, and  the  ordlnate  may  be  either  the  range,  absolute
magnitude,  value  of  the  difference of replicates, or percentage recovery.
The data are used for the determination of expected values and the associated
control  limits.  These are plotted as the average-value line and the control
limit lines when constructing control charts  (2) such as  the  one  given  in
Figure 7-1.
     Computer  calculation and data evaluation with or without plotting may be
substituted    for  manually  plotting  the  data.   Because  the  purpose  of
establishing  control  limits  is  to  flag  potential  problems  as  soon  as
possible,  a   computer can  be easily programmed to recognize control criteria
without  having to  plot the  data manually.  Even in those  instances  where  a

-------
                                                          Section  No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 13  of 20
laboratory  has such computer capabilities, a visual  inspection of QC data is
still a valuable tool, and any out of control situation  should be  examinee
without  delay.   Two  types  of  limits are frequently used to identify such
situations.  These are:

1 .  Control Limits - corresponding to the 99%  confidence  interval  for  the
mean  value of the control parameter.  Thus the upper control limit (DCL)  and
the lower control limit (LCL), given by the mean +3 S. (standard deviations),
imply  that  for  normal  data  distributions,  less than W of valid data is
flagged due to random error alone and that other flagged data may  be  assumed
to  indicate  nonrandom  error,  i.e.,  malfunction  or  contamination  which
requires immediate action.
2.  Warning Limits - corresponding to the 95%  confidence  interval  for  the
mean  value  of  the  control  parameter.   Thus it includes about 95$ of the
expected  random  variation  about  the  mean  u  for  normal  distributions,
i.e., u+2S..   However, simple probability predicts that there is  less than a
W probability that  two  independently  chosen  values  for  the   controlled
parameter  will  exceed  the  upper  warning limit (UWL) or the lower warning
limit (LWL) due to chance alone.  Thus two successive values which exceed the
warning  limits  should  be  reason  for investigation of analytical control.
Also, probability predicts that there is less  than  a  U  chance  of  eight
independent,  consecutive values occurring on the same side of the mean value
line.  Thus, eight or more such values would indicate a  systematic  bias  in
the measurement.
     For precipitation monitoring there are  five  key  parameters  that  are
useful  for  controlling  the field and the laboratory measurement processes.
Control and warning limits for each of those parameters should be   determined
as follows (Equation
 (a) Spike Recovery — best determined by utilizing reference standards  (such
 as  NBS  or  EPA) .   The  analyst spike data are used to calculate an average
 percent  recovery  (Equation 7-4):

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  195-
                                                          Page 1* of 20
       _   ! N   X
      ZR -Z   ~X 100
where,  JR  is  the  average  percent  recovery,  X   is  the   found   spike
concentration,  C.  is  the known spike concentration, and N is the number of
spikes used for constructing the control limits.

The standard deviation of the percent recoveries will be given by:

                                                                          7-5

and the appropriate warning and control limits are:

                                              ZR      —  **  ZR            7-6
Table 7-2 presents the numerical values of the various factors for  computing
control limits (i.e., control chart lines).
(b)  Range of Duplicates - determined by utilizing the  absolute  differences
of  duplicate analyses of selected samples.  These data are used to calculate
an average range (r)

         i  K
    7-2 'Xil  -Xi2l                                                  7"7
        K i-1  i     1Z
where, X, 1 and Xi2 are the results of  the  duplicate  analysis  of  the  ith
sample, and K is the number of duplicates used to construct the average.  The
corresponding warning and control limits for the range are:
                                                                          7-8
When utilizing Table 7-2 for duplicate analysis, N=2;  N>2 only if  a  larger
number   of   replicate   analyses   of   the   same  sample  are  performed.
(c)  Detection Limits —  determined  by  running  either  a  series  of  ten
non-consecutive reagent blanks (for AA analyses) or ten standards of the same

-------
Section No. 7
Revision No. 1
Date October 1, 198M
Page 15 of 20
TABLE 7-2. FACTORS
FOR COMPUTING
CONTROL LIMITS3



Number of
Observations, N
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Factor
D3
0
0
0
0
0
0.08
0.14
0.18
0.22
0.26
0.28
0.31
0.33
0.35
0.36
0.38
0.39
0.40
0.41
0.42
0.43
0.44
0.45
0.46
Factor
D4
3.27
2.57
2.28
2.11
2.00
1.92
1.86
1.82
1.78
1.74
1.72
1.69
1.67
1.65
1.64
1.62
«• 1.61
1.60
1.59
1.58
1.57
1.56
1.55
1.54
Factor
D5
2.51
2.05
1.85
1.74
1.67
1.62
1.58
1.55
1.52
1.50
1.48
1.46
1.45
1.43
1.42
1.41
1.40
1.40
1.39
1.38
1.38
1.37
1.36
1.36
Factor
D6
0
0
0.15
0.26
0.33
0.38
0.42
0.45
0.48
0.50
0.52
0.54
0.55
0.56
0.58
0.59
0.59
0.60
0.61
0.62
0.62
0.63
0.63
0.64

a.  Based on EPA-APTD-1132, "Quality Control Practices in
    Processing Air Pollution Samples," March 1973.

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 195-
                                                          Page 16 of 20
concentration,  at  10>  of  working  curve  (for  ion  chromatographic   and
colorimetric  analyses).   For each series of runs, a standard deviation (S ]
                                                                           a
is determined with the detection limit (DL) defined as DL=3S .  When  reagenc
blanks   (B)  are  part of the analytical run, the control limit should be sec
such that HK2DL for each of the observables.
     The notification that a sample is  below  the  detection  limit  of  the
analytical  method  for a given analyte range should be available immediately
after raw data entry.  The analyst then has two options:   to  reanalyze  the
sample  on an instrument scale of greater sensitivity;  or to accept and flag
data as being below the detection limit.

(d)  (Field - Laboratory) pH —  determined  by  comparing  the  measurements
performed in the field by the individual site operators to those performed at
the central network laboratory upon sample receipt.  The warning  limits  for
this comparison are:
          lpHfield " pHlab'-°*2   S^P16 PH<5.00                           7-9
          lpHfield " pHlab'-°'3   SamPle PH>5.00
     If  those limits are exceeded, the laboratory reanalyzes the  sample  and
the  field  measurement is investigated (i.e. pH electrode, buffer solutions,
etc.).   The control limit for this difference has been set at  0.5  pH  unit.
If   this is exceeded the sample should be reanalyzed and the data flagged as
suspicious .

(e)  (Field - Laboratory) Conductivity  ~  determined   by   comparing   the
conductivity  (COND)  measurements  performed  in the field by the individual
site operators  to those performed at  the  central  network  laboratory  upon
sample  receipt.  The control limits for this comparison are:

      COND,. . . - COND. , |>3ymho/cm       COND <15ymho/cm
          rield       lab —                    —
      COND,.., - CONDlab| xlOO± 20%      COND >15pmho/cm                7.10
            COND- ,
                 lab

-------
                                                         Section No. 7
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,
                                                         Page  17 of 20
     If those limits are exceeded, the laboratory reanalyzes  the  sample   and
the field measurement is investigated (i.e.  conductivity cell, KC1 standards,
etc.).  If the laboratory reconfirms its initial analysis,  the field value is
flagged as suspicious.

7.4.5  Evaluation of QC Data - Data for QC samples should be  calculated   and
compared  to  control limits established in the most recent monthly QC  chart.
After input, a Data Sheet QC Report  is  printed  by  the  computer.    If  no
computer  is  available,  this procedure can be done manually.   The report on
the performance  of  the  QC  samples  should  be  given  to   the  laboratory
supervisor  for evaluation to see if the data are acceptable  for reporting or
if reanalysis is necessary.
     The analyst spike and the blind sample data are also calculated  and  the
results  given  to  the QC chemist, who tabulates the data and  calculates the
percent recoveries*  The QC chemist routinely gives the blind sample  data  to
the  laboratory  director,  who  reviews this before reporting the analytical
data to the program manager.  The QC chemist reviews the  blind sample  data
with the analyst monthly.
     Once a month, the QC chemist should  combine  all  QC  sample   data  and
calibration curve parameters obtained during the month with all previous data
for the same parameters and plot the data to yield  new  control limits  are
calculated.   A copy of the monthly QC plot should be given to the  laboratory
supervisor, the QC chemist, and each analyst.
     A Data  Quality  Control  Report  should  be  given  to  the   laboratory
supervisor  on  a  regular  basis.  This report should flag any out-of-limits
conditions for the analysis.  The analyst or the supervisor should   check  to
see that any out-of-limits conditions are not results of manual transcription
errors.  If a transcription error is found, the transcription of all data  on
the  data form should be checked, a corrected data form should be  input and a
new QC report issued.  The problem should be carefully documented and the old
data form and QC report should be filed with the corrected forms.   The new QC
data should replace the old in the computer QC data base (if applicable).  If
the  out-of-limits  conditions  are  hot due to transcription errors, another

-------
                                                          Section No. 7
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 18 of 20
explanation should be sought.
     The most critical  parameters  are  the  calibration  curve  parameters,
because any problem with them directly affects the data.   If an explanation
cannot  be  found  for  out-of-limits  calibration  parameters,  all  samples
analyzed  in  the  time  interval between the questionable calibration curves
should be reanalyzed.
     If only one of several  QC  samples  is  out-of-limits,  an  explanation
should be sought.  However, if one cannot be found, no action is needed.  The
supervisor may assume that the problem was  with  the  particular  QC  sample
itself,  but  he  may  retain the out-of-limits data in the QC data base.  If
several QC samples are out-of-limits and an explanation  is  not  found,  all
samples analyzed with the QC samples should be reanalyzed.
     In any case, an out-of-limits  QC  sample  requires  evaluation  and  an
explanation  by  the  supervisor.   The  explanation  may  be noted on the QC
report.  If samples are to be reanalyzed, the supervisor should note this  on
the data form and in the QC report.  At the time of the reanalysis, it should
                                    M~
be noted on the data form that the samples are being reanalyzed, and the date
of the first and the repeat analyses should be given.
     The supervisor also evaluates the QC plots when  they  are  periodically
generated.    Since   the  supervisor  has  already  evaluated  out-of-limits
conditions in the QC reports, all out-of-limits conditions should  have  been
explained  or  eliminated  (by  reanalysis)  before  the  monthly  plots  are
generated.  Accordingly, the monthly plots should be examined  primarily  for
systematic bias.  If no systematic bias is present, all plotted values should
be evenly distributed about  the average-value line.

7.5   Evaluation  of Laboratory  Performance
      The QC   procedures   (Section  7.3)  stress  the  supervisor's  role  in
evaluating QC  data and in  scheduling reanalyzes until data are acceptable for
reporting.   This section   discusses  the  QC  chemist's  role  in  evaluating
 laboratory  performance by  independent  QC  checks and by external audits.

-------
                                                          Section No.  7
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 19 of  20
7.5.1  Independent Internal Quality Control  -  The QC  chemist  ensures  that   QC
procedures  are implemented and provides  independent  judgment on the  accuracy
and precision of the data generated in the laboratory.   These are checked   by
analyst   spikes   and   synthetic   rainwater  samples   which  have   been
inconspicuously added to the sample analysis stream.   Blind  samples   can   be
prepared  by  the  QC chemist from NBS-SRMs, from reagent grade  salts or from
reference samples obtained from EPA, USGS,  or  other  reliable  sources  and
routinely  submitted to the laboratory as blind samples to be analyzed in the
same manner as a routine sample.  The data should be  flagged  in  the  data  set
by  the  QC  chemist ,_when  checking  for out-of-limits conditions  before the
reports are reviewed by the laboratory director.

7.5.2  Laboratory Audits - Laboratories analyzing   rainwater   samples  should
regularly conduct both systems and performance audits of their operations.  A
complete description of the schedule, scope and methods for  conducting  both
types of audits is included in Section 10.0 of this document.

7.6  References
 1. Reagent Chemicals, American Chemical Society Specifications, 5th Edition,
    American Chemical Society, Washington, D.C. (1974).
 2. "Standard  Methods  for  Preparation,  Standardization,  and  Storage  of
    Standard  Solutions  for Chemical Analysis", from Part 31 of 1976 Book of
    ASTM Standards, American Society for Testing and Materials,   Philadelphia
    (1977).
 3. Standard Methods for  the  Examination  o£  Water  and  Wastewater,   13th
    Edition, American Public Health Association, New York (1971).
 4. M. Reichgott, "Organic Coatings and Plastic  Chemistry,"   Vol.  Ul,  1979,
    Paper  presented  at  178th  National  Meeting  of  the American Chemical
    Society, Washington, D.C. Sept. 9-14, 1979.
 5. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement  Systems  -  Vol.
    V  2.  Manual  for Precipitation Measurement Systems.  Part II ^ Operations
    and Maintenance Manual.  U.S. Environmental Protection  Agency,   Research
    Triangle Park, N.C., EPA-600/4-82-042b (January 1981).
 6. M.E. Peden, and L.M. Skowran, "Ionic Stability of Precipitation Samples,"
    Atmos. Environ. _12, 2343 (1978).

-------
                                                         Section  No.  7
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October 1,  195-
                                                         Page 20  of  20


7. J.E. Rothert,  Battelle   Pacific   Northwest   Laboratories,   Richlanc,
   Washington, MAP3S Program, private  communication.

-------
                                                          Section No. 8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 1 of  23
8.0   DATA HANDLING, VALIDATION,  AND REPORTING

      All  data  collected  by  a monitoring   program  from  both  field   and
laboratory   activities  must  accurately  represent  the  concentrations   of
measured constituents, i.e., the data must be  valid.    Validity  depends   on
control  of  error  a'nd  bias,   and  such validity is assured only by  careful
screening during all phases  of  data  handling   from  field  and  .analytical
results  to  final  reporting.   Thus, the field  operator,  laboratory analyst,
data  entry staff, laboratory director, program manager   and  QA  officer   all
contribute to data validity by screening data  generated  or processed by their
respective areas.

8.1   Data Logistics
      Ideally,  data  should   go  directly    from   an    instrument    to    a
machine-readable  raw  data  base  to  avoid   transcription  errors.   Not  all
laboratories have computer facilities, so  manual data-recording  techniques
are discussed, but all calculations and data-processing  steps in this  section
can be performed by either manual or automated processing.
      If output from the  analytical instrument  is not recorded  automatically,
a data  form must be prepared.  Each analyst  should keep  a  bound notebook to
record all analytical data, and-the notebook should have  carbons  so   copies
can   be  pulled  for  data reduction.  Typical data forms  for each analytical
procedure are in the Operations  and Maintenance  Manual  (1).
      Whenever data forms are  prepared  from  strip  charts,  transcriptions
should be  checked  by  recalculating 5% of all  values.   If  errors are found,
all data should be reprocessed.  Manual data-recording practices for   several
typical  techniques  used  in  precipitation   analysis   are  described  briefly
below:
                                 *
(a) j>H and Conductivity — The pH and conductivity measurements read  directly
   from  meters  are  recorded on a prepared data form.   The baseline  reading
   category is ignored.

-------
                                                           Section No. 8
                                                           Revision No. 1
                                                           Date October 1, '-za
                                                           Page 2 of 23

(b) Ion Chromatography for Chloride, Phosphate,  Nitrate and  Sulfate  —  Peak
    heights  on  strip  charts are a measure of  response.   Baselines should be
    carefully drawn and each peak height read from the baseline with  a  clear
    plastic  ruler.   Each peak height is recorded on the  strip chart and alsc
    on the data form.  Because this is a chromatographic technique, care  must
    be  exercised  in drawing the baseline,  particularly where the peak of cr^
    anlon is resting on the tail of another   due  to  extreme  differences  ir
    concentration.   In  all cases, the method used when drawing the baselines
    should be identical for both standards and samples.

(c) Automated Colorimetry for Ammonium and Phosphate — The data on the  strip
    charts  should  be  read  at  the  midpoint  of the flat-topped peaks and s.
    straight line drawn between baseline  points  on  the  chart.   Each  peak
    height  should  be read from the baseline using a clear plastic ruler, arc
    the data on both the strip chart and the data form recorded.

(d) Atomic Absorption for Sodium, Potassium, Calcium,  and  Magnesium  —  Tbe
    data should be processed the same as for automated colorimetry.

(e) Strong Acid b£ Gran  Method  ~  In  the  microtitration,  the  electrical
    potential (mv) or pH is recorded as a function of the volume of base added
    to the sample.  As a QC procedure, the initial potential  reading  of  tbe
    conditioning  solution  (if  applicable)  before  addition  of  sample  Is
    recorded on the data form.  The final temperature  of  the  sample  before
    titration should also be recorded.

(f) Acidity — The sample is titrated potentiometrically with a basic  solution
    to  an  end point of pH 8.3*  The normality (N) of the base and the volute
    (ml) required are recorded on the data form.   As  a  QC  measure,  it  is
    suggested  that the base be standardized at least monthly in an acceptable
    manner (such as NaOH standardized with potassium biphthalate).

(g) Volume — In determining the amount of precipitation sample, a density  cf
    1.0 gm/ml  is  assumed;  thus the ratio of mass  (g) to volume  (ml) is  1.3.
    The mass is recorded directly on the data form.

 8.2   Software Requirements

       Data handling  from raw data input  through  finished  report  should  be

 computerized as  much as possible  to  facilitate data management.   All  software

 used by  an  organization to process data should be well  documented.   Current

 source   code  listings  should  be  available to responsible personnel  and soch

 code should include sufficient  comment statements   to  explain  and   describe

 both algorithms and  data   transfer  steps.  As a  further QC measure,  it is

 recommended that, during   execution,   the   software  version  identifiers  be

 printed  on  each generated  report.  Typically these include  date and time cf

-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  196*
                                                          Page 3 of  23
generation and the name of the program used to make the  calculations.   Such
identifiers  will  increase  the  efficiency  of  tracking when data problems
occur.   The  software  employed  should   have   the   characteristics   and
capabilities described below.

8.2.1  Data Input - Data can be input manually or automatically.   For  manual
data  entry,  the  data  clerk  should  screen  all  of the terminal input by
comparison of the computer printout  with  the  original  data forms  or  by
duplicate  entry  of the same data batch.  For automated entry, errors can be
detected by monitoring the data display while the data are being  taken and by
occasional  spotchecks  of the data acquisition apparatus.  Such  checks might
include the introduction of a dummy data set or the introduction  of   a  known
voltage to the instrument from which data are being taken.

8.2.2  Data Storage and Indexing - At  a  minimum,  acid  precipitation  data
bases should be stored on a computer readable medium (disk, tape  or cassette)
which can be efficiently accessed.  A duplicate  backup  file, stored  in  a
different  location,  should  be  maintained  so  that lost data  files can be
retrieved or reconstructed.  Special file attributes, such as random  access,
keys,  and  indexing,  can  be  useful  for  efficient data management.  Acid
precipitation data bases may be handled efficiently by any one of a number of
commercially  available  data base management systems.  Such systems decrease
the necessity of writing vast amounts of software and are available  for  any
size  computer  installation  from  a small microcomputer to mainframe.  Most
include sufficient provisions for the development of audit trails.

8.2.3  Precipitation Data Bases - Acid precipitation  measurement  data  froa
the  following  networks:   NAOP,  CANSAP,  APIOS, MAP3S, EPRI SURE, and EPBI
OAPSP network are currently stored at Pacific Northwest Laboratory  (PNL)  in
Richland,  WA.   The  use of this data base can be helpful when developing QA
procedures for an acid rain network's software.
     Data are also available in hard copy format.  Data are obtained from the
various  networks  in  one-year increments, but input data are reorganized by

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page U of 23
region and not maintained by network.   Reports • may  be  obtained  detailing
network  inventories  of precipitation-weighted concentrations by site, area,
analyte and the time period.  Although not yet available at the time of  this
writing,  PNL is developing a spatial distribution map for precipitation data
and is working to standardize isopleth  derivation  from  sparse  amounts  of
network  data.   Both  of  these  will  be available soon.  The PNL data base
currently serves as a repository for all data  collected  from  the  National
Atmospheric Deposition Program (NADP)/National Trends Network (NTN).  The PNL
data bank is not currently available by dial up (interactive mode).  However,
interested  contributor/user  organizations  may contact the individual noted
below for assistance in obtaining the proper data summaries.   One  extremely
useful  feature  of  this  data  base  is that PNL will prepare data sets for
organizations  in  a  custom-tailored  magnetic   tape   format.    (Contact:
A.R. Olsen  (Statistical  or  Data Inquiries) or C. Watson (Data base use and
tape formats), Pacific Northwest Laboratory, Rlchland, WA, 509/376-2227.)

8.3  Data Handling and Preliminary Screening
     In an acid precipitation monitoring network, data handled  both  in  the
field  and  in  the  laboratory  must  be critically reviewed to identify and
isolate errors.  Data should be validated at each  step  of  the  measurement
process,  beginning  with  sample  validation  in the field and followed by a
preliminary physical screening process when the sample  is  received  at  the
laboratory.   Once  data have been entered into the storage-retrieval system,
more critical screening procedures should be implemented.
     In establishing statistical screening procedures,  it  is  necessary  to
recognize  characteristics  of  the  chemical  analyses.   For the most  part,
analyses  are  done  in a batch mode.   A batch may contain several dozen samples
with   multipoint   calibrations performed before and after the samples.   In an
efficiently run laboratory, most analyses are  automatically  sequenced  with
data   recorded   by direct  computer interface or continuously recorded onto
strip  charts.

-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 5 of 23

8.3.1  Quality Control of Data Handling  -  Table  8-1   summarizes  the  data

handling  steps  and  the  corresponding QC procedures  to be utilized  at each

step.  A range check is sometimes effective as an additional  screen  against

keypunch  errors.   The data handling steps outlined are self explanatory and

are designed for computerized data reduction systems for analytical  results.

If  completely automatic data acquisition systems are utilized, the first two

data handling steps should  be  modified  to  verify  the  integrity  of  the

digitization  of the analog signal output from the analytical instrumentation

and the computer interface.


TABLE 8-1. SUGGESTED QC SPOTCHECK OF DATA HANDLING
         Data Handling Step
 QC Procedure
Manual reading of strip chart
Transfer of analytical raw data
and results to data sheet
Input of data (field or analytical
form) into computer
Electronic digitization of strip chart
Field report record of event time
and amount.
Duplicate reading of
5% of the data

Spotcheck transfer
accuracy for 531
of data

Enter both data sheets from
above into separate files,
followed by computer
comparison of 100% of data

Check 5 to 8% for proper
baseline determination and
for accurately and properly
recorded retention times

Check 100% vs rain gauge strip
chart.

-------
                                                           Section No.  8
                                                           Revision No.  1
                                                           Date October  1,
                                                           Page 6 of  23
 8.3-2  Treatment of Outliers  - This  section will  discuss  treating data  which
 fall  outside  of  certain control limits.  In  doing  this, it is important  to
 understand the difference between outliers and  erroneous  data  and   how   each
 should be handled.   Outliers  have two origins:  random  errors and operational
 errors.  Random errors can occur in  the  physical  condition being measured and
 in  the  measurement system itself.  Operational  errors originate in numerous
 technical problems  such as sample handling, difficulty  in accurately weighing
 chemicals  for  standard  solutions, and  shift  of a decimal point  in manual
 transcription of numbers.  Operational errors contribute  systematic  errors  or
 the bias component  of the measurement data.

 There are basically three ways of dealing with  outliers:

(a) Reject them as invalid;
(b) Subject them to special scrutiny, and  reject  or  adjust  them   only  if
    documentary evidence of errors is found;  and
(c) Do nothing.
      If outliers are rejected, a  great deal of  care should be exercised.    It
 is  not  recommended  to  directly   reject  the  highest  XJ of the  data points,
 since this would artificially bias  the averages low,  and  quite possibly would
 weaken  the  ability to detect correlations in  the data by throwing  out valid
 but high-valued data.  This danger  of  rejecting valid data is the motivation
 behind statistical methods for detecting "true" outliers.
      It is advisable to check outlying data points for  data handling  errors.
 Since  no  data  should  be rejected without  documentary evidence of handling
 errors, there is no serious  consequence  if   some  good  data are   checked.
 However,  outlier-specific  spot-checking  should  not   be used to completely
 replace all  random-selection spot-checking.   Outlier-specific  spot   checking
 alone   could fail  to detect a procedural or computer  software error.  Fully
 randomized spot-checking is  discussed  further  in  8.6.   Outlier-specific
 screening methods  can be  based on examination of the most extreme values of a
 variety of computed   parameters,  such  as  calibration  slopes,   collocation
 differences, total anion - cation balance, etc., as discussed in Section 7.

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 7 of 23
     The moat commonly used  outlier-detection  statistics  assume  that   the
normal fluctuations (in both the measurement error and the physical condition
being measured) are well-approximated by a Gaussian distribution (3).   It  is
also  assumed  that there is at most one outlier due to systematic bias.   The
mean and standard deviation are calculated from the data, and the chance  that
the  most outlying value from that Gaussian distribution would be as large as
the most outlying value observed is determined.  If this chance is less  than
a selected statistical significance level, then the outlier is declared to be
caused by  an  operational  error.   Details  on  applying  this  statistical
procedure are given elsewhere (3).
     These methods suffer from the problem of "masking11.  If  the  sample  of
data  points  has two outliers that are far from the majority of data points,
then the computed standard  deviation  is  increased,  and  no  outliers  are
detected.   There  is  another  method  called  backward  elimination,  which
eliminates the masking problem.  However, it still has  the  assumption  that
the  normal  fluctuation  fits  a  Gaussian  distribution.   In  most cases a
log-normal or other transformation of the parent data distribution has proven
adequate.   The  chance  of  experiencing  any  particular  extreme  value is
under-predicted by all Gaussian-based methods.  Therefore, rejection of  data
points  on the basis of those statistical outlier detection methods should be
undertaken  with  great  care  and  only  after  examining  in   detail   the
distributional characteristics of the entire measurement data.

8.4  Data Validation Criteria
     Data validation based on a set of criteria is the process of  evaluating
the  data  after its preliminary screening, and either accepting or rejecting
them.  Validation in this sense also includes the investigation of anomalies.
Procedures  in  this  section are used after the preliminary screening of the
analytical runs has been completed.  They are designed to  flag  questionable
data  for  subsequent  investigation based on some key physical properties of
precipitation samples.

-------
                                                          Section No. 8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 8 of  23
8.4.1  Detection Limit Flag - If a sample concentration  is  below  detection
limits,  a  flag  should  be  entered  into the data base indicating that the
result is below the detection limit.  With a  fully  automated  system,  this
flagging could serve as an additional QC procedure because the analyst cannct
mistakenly enter data which are below the detection  limit  if  the  computer
program  is  written  to  question  and  flag  all such entries.  Statistical
handling and reporting of below-detection-limit data are discussed  below  in
Section 8.5.3.

8.1.2  Comparison of  Sampler  and  Rain  Gauge  Performance  -  At  stations
equipped  with duplicate samplers or with a sampler and a rain gauge, sampler
performance can be evaluated  by  comparing  the  quantity  of  precipitation
measured by the two instruments.  In most stations a sampler and a rain gauge
are present.  The rain gauge is used as the reference  to  measure  both  the
sampler  capture  ratio  and  Its collection efficiency.  The percent capture
(JCAP), which indicates sampler down time, is given by

     JCAP s (No. of samples collected/Total No. of events)x 100           8-1

The total number of events are counted from the rain gauge  charts,  and  the
failure  of   the  sampler  to  capture  an event is detected either  by direct
observation of the sample bucket or by counting the event pen markings for  a
given  collection  period.   In  the   1982  Utility  Acid Precipitation Study
Program  (UAPSP), a percent capture of  98J was found (5) for over 2200  events
at 20  sites.
     The sampler collection efficiency (COL.EFF.) is given by   the   ratio  of
the sample amounts collected by the sampler and the rain gauge:

      COL.EFF. s  Sample Depth (cm)/Rain Gauge Reading (cm)                8-2

 The Aerochem Metrics  bucket sample weight  can  be converted to cm(in)   by  the
 relation,   1  cm  =  6MO  g (1 in s  1625  g).  When a sample is not collected due
 to either sampler or rain gauge down  time, the event is not included in  the

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, * 95-
                                                          Page 9 of 23
efficiency average.  An overall sampler efficiency  of  1.OH  was  found  for
OAPSP  (5) and indicates that the samplers, on the average, collected MJ mere
precipitation than the rain gauges.  For rain events  greater  than  0.25  cs.
(0.1  in),  amounts  which  differ by more than 15S between the collector asc
rain gauge should be flagged for investigation of faulty collector  function.
Light  rainfalls generally yield high rain gauge capture vs. the sampler, and
heavy rainfalls (and wind) yield  high  sampler  capture  vs. tipping  bucket
gauges.   For  snow  with  no  windshield present, differences of 30* or more
between the sampler and the rain gauge are frequent.  It is recommended  that
the sample be rejected if

    Ratio -   Rain Gauge  Reading (cm)  -  Sample  Depth  (cm)  > Q  ,
                       Rain Gauge  Reading  (cm)                           8'3

The Ratio in Equation 8-3 applies directly to both rain  and  snow  when  the
rain  gauge  is of the weighing type;  if another rain gauge is used the snow
should be melted before rain gauge  reading  is  utilized.   If  the  sampler
volume  is  greater than the rain gauge volume, the reason for the difference
in sample amount captured by the rain gauge and sampler should be  adequately
resolved  before  a  decision  is  made  as to which quantity will be used in
reporting precipitation amounts.
     As an additional check on data validity, the stripe hart  record  of  the
precipitation  gauges  should  be  compared  with  the  field  data form.  If
discrepancies in time of event or precipitation amount are noted,  they  must
be resolved before the data are reported.

8.U.3  Unusual Ion Ratios - Another check on data validity is to inspect  the
ratios  of  ions  in individual samples.  Table 8-2 shows average and typical
ion weight ratios for different geographical locations.  Average  values  for
sea  water  (6)  should apply to those areas within 50 km of a sea coast, but
those for the earth's crust  (7) cannot be assumed to represent  any  specific
region.  The range data  (last column) are based on a 1968 national study (8).

-------
                                                          Section No. 8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  195-
                                                          Page 10 of 23
The seawater ratio of SOr/Na* in the table  is  sometimes  used  in  coastal
areas to correct measured SOj! values for seawater contribution.
        4 corrected
(S°4)measured ' °'25  measured
                                                                         8-4
However, the ratio of sulfate to sodium in spray has  been  shown  to  exceed
that  in  seawater  by  10$  to  30* (9).  The SOjj/Na* ratio is preferred to
S0jj/Cl~ because there are  non-sea  sources  of  Cl~  and  because  loss  of
atmospheric Cl~ occurs by oxidation.


TABLE 8-2. ION RATIOS FOR VARIOUS SOURCES

Geo chemical Primary
Ratio Source
Cl"/Na* a seawater
earth's crust
Na*/K* a seawater
earth's crust
Mg^/Ca** a seawater
earth's crust
SOi^/Na* seawater
Average
Value (6,
(yg/g)
1.8
0.01
27.8
1.1
3.2
0.6
0.25
Precipitation
7) Area
industrial area
seacoast
arid region
(soil particles)
seacoast
inland
seacoast
inland
seacoast
Acceptable
Range (8)
(yg/g)
1.8 -
1.5 -
0.8 -
6
1.2 -
0.1 -
0.03 -
0.25
3.5
1.8
1.0
13
4
1.0
0.3


 a.  Do not test if_either number is  at detection  limit.
 b.  To correct SO,.8 for seawater S0^s contribution.

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page  11 of 23
8.4.U  Comparison  of_  Anion  and  Cation  Equivalents  -  The   principle   of
electroneutrality  requires  that  total anion equivalents equal total cation
equivalents.  The Anion Equivalents (AE) are

        - **     CAi
where  CAI  denotes  the  concentration  of  the  ith  anion   in   mg/liter,
(Eq.Wt.). is  the equivalent weight for the corresponding species as given in
Table 8-3, ai
Equivalents.
Table 8-3, and N.  is  the  nunber  of  anions  used  to  compute  the  Anion
The cation equivalents (CE) are:

                      Nc     C
        _  1Q(3-pH)    z       ci
     CE    10       + i-1    (Eq.Wt.)1

where C   is the concentration of the ith cation  in  mg/liter,  (Eq.Wt.). is
       Cl                                                                1
the  same  as in Equation 8-5, and N  is the nunber of cations, excluding E*,
used in computing the Cation Equivalents.
     Using Equations 8-5 and 8-6 above, we obtain the %  difference  for  the
discrepancy between the cations and anions.
      Ion I Difference -                  * 100                           8-7
For  the EPRI Utility Acid Precipitation Study Program (5) the observed Ion  %
Difference  (Equation  8-7)  had a median of 4.6} for 3061 samples (HCO~ was
accounted for).  The greatest spread in data occurred at low  concentrations.
If   the  % discrepancy significantly exceeds 0, it suggests that errors exist
in the data and/or that important constituents, such as bicarbonate HCO~  or
organic  anions,  have  not been analyzed.  For solutions in equilibrium with
atmospheric C02 at 25°C, the bicarbonate concentration is given by (7):

      (HCO~) = KtHgCO^/df) = 4.M5 x 1
-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 12 of 23
TABLE 8-3.  CONVERSION FACTORS and EQUIVALENT WEIGHTS

Analyte
Cl"
N03-
sou2
P0,j~3 as H2POj
HCO:
3
H*
MH4*
Na+
K*
Mg~
Ca**
Equivalent Weight
35.46
62.01
48.03
96.98
61.0

1.01
18.04
22.99
39.10
12.15
20.04
Factor3
28.2
16.1
20.8
10.3
16.4

990.1
55.4
43.5
25.6
82.3
49.9

a.   (peq./liter)  =  (mg/liter) x Factor

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 13 of  23

Expressing the concentration of HCO~ and  H+ in ueq. /liter, we find  (HCO~)  =

5.1/(H*).   Thus,  bicarbonate is negligible for solutions more acidic than  a

pH of about 5.0, i.e. for H* = 10 yequiv. /liter, HCO~  =  0.031 mg/liter.    It
can
also   be   shown   that   carbonate
follows:  (CO*)  = K.,  K2
                                   +2
                                             (CO*)
                                                     can   be   expressed  as
                            C03)/(H).    If  we  substitute  the
concentration  from the solubility of C02 at 25°c, and  K..  and K2  respectively
for  the  two  dissociation  constants  of  carbonic  acid  we would   obtain

(Cop a 2.9 x10~22/(H*)2  moles/liter.   This  shows  that  CO* is  negligible

for solutions more acidic than a pH of about 7.7 (H*  =  0.02 yeq. /liter).

     The anion-cation balance criteria used for reanalysis  by the  National

Atmospheric  Deposition Program are presented in Table  8-4.  This information

may prove to be a useful starting point for those organizations   wishing  to

use this information in screening and validating data.
TABLE 8-4.  NADP REANALYSIS CRITERIA
1.  Ion Balance

    Anions +  Cations (peq/liter)

           <50

           >50 < 100

           >100

2.  Specific Conductance Balance

    Measured Conductance (ymho/cm)

           <5

           >5 < 30

           >30
                                      Ion % Difference

                                         >+ 60

                                         >+ 30

                                         >± 15


                                       Conductance
                                       % Difference

                                         > 50

                                         > 30

                                         > 20
                                                    Frequency of Check

                                                     All samples at
                                                     monthly intervals
                                                     Frequency of
                                                        Check

                                                    All samples at
                                                    monthly intervals
   From Illinois State Water Survey for National Atmospheric Deposition
   Program

-------
                                                          Section No.  5
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1Sc
                                                          Page 14 of 23
8.4.5  Comparison of  Measured  and  Calculated  Conductances  -  For  dilute
solutions  (below  10~^M) of known composition, the equivalent conductance is
the sum of the equivalent ionic  conductances  at  infinite  dilution  (Table
8-5) .  From the relation between equivalent and specific conductance

       A = 1000K/N                                                      8-9

the conductance  in mho/cm can be calculated as follows:

                NT
       K - N.    r  A./IOOO         .                                    8-10
            1  i-1
where N. s z^M, with M, - g. moles of ion I/liter, z^ = valence or charge  of
ion i, and N_ is the total number of species used in the computation.
For the major ionic constituents in precipitation this will become:
         [10'pH(350) + 2(SOj)(79.0) + (NO^HTO.S) + (CDC75.5) +

                 .S) + (Na*)(50.9) + (K*)(7U.5) + 2(Ca*2)(60)] x 10"3
where  the  parentheses denote the ionic concentrations in aoles/liter.
With Equation 8-10 and Table 8-5, the calculated specific  conductance  of
solution containing
     H*   = 7x10~5 mol/liter, NH* s Mx10"5 mol/liter,
     SO,.* = MxICT5 mol/liter, and NO ~ = 3x10"5 mol/liter.
 is

     1000K  = 7x10'5 (350Mx10-5(7M.5)+2(4x10-5)(79.0)+3x10-5(70.6)
            = 3592x1O"5 mho/cm
 or
          < * 35.9 umho/cm.

-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 15  of  23
The calculated specific conductance (COND) values can be  compared with  the
measured values for precipitation samples, which are generally 10" M  or less,
by the relation
      Conductance % Difference
                                   COND  ,  , . - COND
                                       calc d       meas
                                       COND
                                           meas
x 100
8-11
     For the EPRI-OAPSP study (5), the median  value  of  the  Conductance  J
Difference  was  -0.8%  and, as expected, the greatest spread occurred at low
conductivities.  The  H*  ion  is  the  chief  contributor  to  the  specific
conductance  of a solution, and any significant error in the H  concentration
will generally be evident in a comparison of the  specific  conductances  and
the anion/cation equivalents.  The conductivity criteria used by the National
Atmospheric Deposition Program for reanalysis of samples are given  in  Table
8-4.

TABLE 8-5.  EQUIVALENT CONDUCTANCE AT INFINITE DILUTION, 25°C (7)

Ion
H*
NH/
Na*
K*
1/2Mg *2a
X . (mho/cm)
350.0
74.5
50.9
74.5
53.1
Ion XA (mho/cm)
1/2 Ca+2a 60.0
1/2 SO^ 79.0
NO " 70.6
Cl~ 75.5
HCO ~ 41.5

a.  1/2  = value  for  1 gram equivalent

-------
                                                         Section No.  8
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  155-
                                                         Page  16 of 23
8.5  Data Reporting
     Directly measured observables  typically  reported by an  organization   are
pH, specific conductance, concentrations of major constituents and the amount
of precipitation.  Recommended reporting units are

   pH - unitless;
   conductivity -  yS/cm or ymho/cm;
   concentration of ion - mg/liter  or yeq./literj  and
   precipitation - cm (1 in =  2.5%  cm).
Table 8-3 provides the relation and the transformation factors  for converting
mg/liter   to  yeq./liter  for  the  ions  of interest.   Specifics   on   the
computational procedures and/or flagging practices  used in precipitation data
reporting are provided below.

8.5.1  Average Concentrations  and Deposition  -   Precipitation-weighted  mean
concentrations,  C. for various ions are generally  reported  for a given time
interval (month, quarter, or year).


       s • i  pj v)i PJ                                            8"12
where  P. is  the  amount  of  precipitation in  event   j   (cm),  C^j   is   the
concentration  of  constituent i for event J  (mg/liter),  and ME is  the number
of events.

For pH or  H* concentration, the  cumulative  value   is   calculated,  and   the
precipitation  weighted  pH value is obtained by converting the cumulative H*
back to  pH.

             pH = -log    jf-i \3      7                                8-13
                            ?E

-------
                                                           Section No.  8
                                                           Revision No.  1
                                                           Date October 1,  1SE-
                                                           Page  17 of 23
      The average concentration  at  each  site   can  be   used  to  study   the
 distribution  of  the  constituents  as  a  function of time (month or  season}
 and/or  geographic  location.    It  might   also  be  useful to  report    the
 site-specific,  precipitation-weighted  standard deviation of the means  (S  )
 as  an  indicator  of  constituent  variability  for  different  seasons   anc
 geographical locations.  A proposed equation  for S , (10,11) is

                                                                           8-1*
 Total  deposition  of  the  ith  analyte  D.   per  unit   area  (mg/m )   in  a
 precipitation event or time interval  is calculated as:
          Di ' 10    l    J   ij
 where P   is  the  precipitation  amount  of  event   J   in  cm,   C. .   is  the
        J                                                          * J
 concentration  of  the  ith  analyte in  mg/ liter,  K  is the total nunber of
                                        11    2  2
 events, and the conversion factor is 10 cm /m .
 8.5.2  Median Concentrations - Average values  are also  reported  in   terms  cf
 the  median  (50th  percentile  value).   The  medians  and  their  respective
 confidence intervals are estimated from   the   ordered   observations obtained
 from  the  independent precipitation  samples.  The advantages of medians over
 means is that extreme values (outliers) have much less  effect on medians than
 on  means,  and  it  is  possible  to  readily compute confidence  intervals for
 medians.  In computing confidence  intervals for  the medians,  let

        xd)< x(2)<...
-------
                                                           Section No.  8
                                                           Revision No.  1
                                                           Date October  1, 19
                                                           Page 18 of 23

    confidence level,  P,  can be computed from the appropriate a given in   the
    table i.e., P = 1-a,  where a'denotes the significance level.

(b) For n > 20, the approximations below may be used to obtain the  confidence
    intervals at the 0.95 confidence interval.

         r« s 1/2 (n - 1.96/rT)                                       8-16a


         s» = 1/2 (n + 1.96/n~)                                       8-16b



      In general r* and s* will not be integers.  Let r and s be the  integers

 obtained by rounding r*  and s* upward to the next higher integer.

      For example, for a  set of 30 precipitation samples we obtain 29 pH,  22
 S0j.s,  and  19  NH^* values.  In order to compute the appropriate medians and
 confidence intervals  for  each  of  the  three  observable  parameters,-  the

 following procedure is followed:


(a) Order the observed values for each of the three observables starting  with
    the lowest and going to the highest.

(b) For pH:  the median will be the value of the 15th element.  The lower   and
    upper   bounds  of  the  confidence  interval  (P s 0.95),  obtained  from
    equations 8-l6a'and 8-16b, are the values of the 10th (r*s 9.22) and  20th
    (s*= 19*77) elements, respectively.

(c) For S0j.s:  the median will be the average of the 11th and  12th  elements.
    The lower and upper bounds of the confidence interval (P s 0.95), obtained
    from equation 8-l6a and 8-16b, are the values of  the  7th  (r*= 6.4)   and
    16th (s*s 15.59) elements, respectively.

(d) For NH^*:  the median will be the value of the 10th  element.   The   lower
    and  upper  bounds  of  the  confidence interval (P = 0.94), obtained  from
    Table  8-6, are the values of the 6th and  14th elements, respectively.

-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 19  of  23
TABLE 8-6.  CONFIDENCE BOUNDS FOR MEDIANS OF SMALL SAMPLES
                          (n<20)a

Confidence Interval Bounds
Sample Size
(n)

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
12
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

Lower
(r)
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
(element number)
Upper
(s)
5
6
7
7 '
8
9
9
10
10
11
12
12
13
14
14
15
a"


0.062
0.031
0.016
0.070
0.039
0.021
0.065
0.039
0.092
0.057
0.035
0.077
0.049
0.031
0.064
0.041

a. Based on Table A3 in W.
J. Conover, Practical Nonparametric
    Statistics. 2nd Edition, John Wiley 4 Sons, New York  (1980).
b.  Significance Level

8.5.3  Reporting and Treating Below-Detection-Lindt Data  -  Data  below  the
detection  limit (BDL)  or  the  minimal  detectable limit for the analytical
method used should be flagged with a code both in the printouts  and  in  all
computer  readable  data forms.  Table 8-7 provides as an example the minima
detection  limit  criteria  used  in  the   NADP   program   for   Laboratory
measurements.

-------
                                                          Section No.  8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 198U
                                                          Page 20 of 23
TABLE 8-7.  NADP MINIMUM DETECTION LIMIT CRITERIA FOR LABORATORY MEASUREMENTS

Chemical

Na
K
Ca
Mg
NH,
soj
NO!
POJ
cr
Measurement
Technique
Flame AA
Flame AA
Flame AA
Flame AA
Colorimetry
Ion Chromatography
Ion Chromatography
Ion Chromatography
Ion Chromatography
Detection limit
(mg/liter)
0.01
0.01
0.03
0.004
0.025
0.1
0.02
0.02
0.02

8.5.4  Reporting Out-of-Control Data - Analytical data obtained from a sample
batch  in which an out-of-control QC "sample is found should be flagged in the
data base as suspect and should not be used unless the laboratory  supervisor
determines  that the cause of the out-of-control condition did not affect the
analytical  results.   Data  reported  as  invalid  should  not  be  used  in
summaries, statistics, analysed, or other interpretation.  For data stored or
reported on computer readable media, it is often best to use a  character  or
code to indicate out-of-control, missing, BDL, and other such data.

8.6 QC Checks on Final Data
     As part of the ongoing  QC  program,  data  intended  for  use  in  such
summaries  should  be  checked   for  the  parameters  indicated below and any
discrepancies brought immediately  to the attention of the person with overall
program  responsibilities.

 8.6.1  Time and Dates  of  Sampling - Since acid precipitation networks  may  be
 scattered over   a  large  geographic  area  containing sites in different time
 zones, it is useful  to  reference all  event  times and dates  to one  time  zone,

-------
                                                          Section  No.  8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 21  of 23
e.g. Eastern  Standard  Time.   Such  necessary  changes from the  local times
usually recorded on field data sheets to this standard  reporting   time  zone
should be checked.

8.6.2 Codes, Flags and Identifiers - Where a code such as that  described  in
Section  8. 1  is  employed  for field observations and where a similar coding
system  has  been  employed   for   laboratory   operations,   the   accurate
transcription of subcodes should be checked at the 10? level.

8.6.3 Overall Transcription Checks - Other observables including  rain, gauge
vs. sample  precipitation  amounts,  field measurements (pH, cond.) and other
transcribed information should be checked against field data  sheets  at  the
    level.
8.6.4 Spotcheck/Recalculation of Data  -  The  laboratory  supervisor  should
regularly  check  and  recalculate  5% of the data points which can be spread
over the total sites  in  the  monitoring  network  and  should  include  the
specially difficult analyses and extreme values.

8.6.5 QC Checks for Data Summaries - Where quarterly or  less  frequent  data
summaries  are  prepared,  the  calculations (made by the person with program
responsibility or at his direction) should be verified as being correct  from
previously  screened,  clean, raw data.  Usually, one or two sites within the
summary period are selected at random and for those sites one or two analytes
are  checked.   This  is  equally  important  for  both manually and computer
derived summaries.  Quality control checks on such summaries  should  include
verification of

1. calculation of precipitation-weighted means
2. calculation of depositions
3- derivation of medians
4. 95* confidence bounds on the medians

-------
                                                          Section No. 8
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 22 of 23
5. reporting of maximum and minimum values.
     If yearly summaries derived from quarterly or monthly data are reported,
checks should be made for consistency between the four quarterly summaries or

the twelve monthly summaries and the data reported for the year.


8.7  References
1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol.   V
   -  Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems;  Part II - Operations and
   Maintenance  Manual.   U.S. Environmental  Protection   Agency,   Research
   Triangle Park, NC, EPA-600/4-82-042b (January 1981).

2. Handbook  for  Analytical  Quality  Control  in   Water   and   Wastewater
   Laboratories,  United  States Environmental Protection Agency, Cincinnati,
   OH, EPA-600/4-79-019 (1979).

3* Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems-  Vol. I-
   Principlea,   United  States  Environmental  Protection  Agency,  Research
   Triangle Park, NC, EPA-600/9-76-005 (1976) Appendix F.

4. T.R. Fitz-Simons and D.M. Holland, The Maximum Likelihood to Probabilistic
   Modeling  of  Air  Quality  Data,  United  States Environmental Protection
   Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC, EPA-600/4-79-044 (1979).

5. Electric Power Research Institute, "The Utility Acid  Precipitation  Study
   Program: Annual  Report  on  Operations  and  Results  for 1982." Contract
   U101-1,  Rockwell  International  Environmental  Monitoring  and  Services
   Center  (1983).

6. J.L. Mero, The Mineral Resources of the Sea,  Elsevler  Publ.,  New  lork,
   NY (1964) p.  25.

7. Handbook of Chemistry and Physics,  U8th  ed. Edited  by  R.C. Weast,  The
   Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, OH 44128, 1967-68.

8. J.P.  Lodge,   Jr.,   J.B. Pate,  W. Basbergill,   G.S. Swanson,   K.C. Hill,
   E. Lorange  and  A.L. Lazrus,  "Chemistry of United States Precipitation,"
   Final  Report  on  the  National  Precipitation  Sampling  Network,  National
   Center for Atmospheric Research, Boulder CO, (August 1968).

9. J.A.  Garland,   "Enrichment   of   Sulphate   in    Maritime    Aerosols,"
   Atmos. Environ.  _15,  787  (1981).

-------
                                                           Section  No.  8
                                                           Revision No.  1
                                                           Date October 1,
                                                           Page 23  of 23

10. J.M. Miller, "A Statistical Evaluation of the U.S.  Precipitation Chemistry
    Network,"  in  Precipitation  Scavenging,  P.B.  Semonin  and R.W.  Beadle,
    eds., CONF-741003 (1971*);   pp. 639-659.    Technical   Information  Center,
    Energy Research and Development Administration,  Springfield, VA.

11. H.M. Liljestrand and J.J. Morgan,  "Error  Analysis  Applied to  Indirect
    Methods for Precipitation Acidity," Tellus, 31,  M21-431 (1979).

12. G. Mehls and G. Akland, J. Air Pollut. Control.  Assoc., 23, 180 (1973).

-------
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 1 of 15
9.0  DATA QUALITY ASSESSMENT
     The determination of the precision and accuracy of precipitation data is
the principal means employed to quantitatively assess data quality.  Specific
procedures  developed  for  determining  precision  and  accuracy   for   the
measurement methods used in precipitation monitoring are presented below.  In
general, data  generation  is  a  three-step  process;   the  first  two  are
functions  of  field  operations,  and  the  third  one is part of laboratory
operations.  These are;

1. Collection of the sample in a suitable sampler.
2. Initial field analyses for pH, specific conductance, and weight.
3. Expanded chemical analyses in the laboratory*
     Data  quality  should  be  routinely  assessed  for  each  step  in  the
measurement  system.   Precision  of .the measurement system is estimated from
data obtained by using collocated samplers and employing identical  sampling,
handling  and analysis protocols for all samples.  Field measurement accuracy
is determined  by  regular  test  sample  audits.   Precision  of  field  and
laboratory  analytical  methods  can  be  derived  from  multiple analyses of
certain samples.  Accuracy of laboratory analyses is derived from  laboratory
analysis of internal and/or external blind audit samples.

9.1  Evaluation of Field Operations

9-1.1  Measurement System Precision - Precision  is  estimated  by  duplicate
sampling  with  collocated  precipitation  samplers.   Each  network of sites
operated by an organization should have a minimum of one duplicate sampler of
the  type  used  for routine monitoring.  The collocated sampler(s) should be
operated during routine sampling and be installed consistent with the  siting
criteria (Section 5.0).
     Sampling precision is known to vary among  sites  and  during  different
seasons  (1).   Each organization should therefore develop a schedule for the

-------
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 19E-
                                                          Page 2 of 15
deployment  of  the  collocated  sampler (s)  such  that  all   the   possible
site/season combinations are satisfied (2).
     In order to derive  a  precision  estimate,  data  from  the  collocated
sampler(s)  and  data  from  the  station sampler are compared.  The measured
differences in pH (pH units), conductivity (pmho/cm), total mass captured and
concentrations  of the various analytes (mg/liter oryeq/liter) are then used
to calculate precision.  For each pair of measurements, the signed (SCD)  and
absolute (ACD) collocation differences are calculated:
(SCD)
(ACD).
ik
                      - xik, and
                           ,
                                                            9-1
             'ik - ljrik -
where y.. is the observable determined for the duplicate sampler for the  ith
species  and  kth collocation event, and xik is the observable determined for
the corresponding station sampler for the same species and collocation event.
     Quarterly, the mean, SCD. ., and  the  standard  deviation,  S,..,  are
estimated  for  the  SCDs  of  each observable (i) obtained from the jth site
having collocated samplers:
         SCDy -
        k-1
              (SCD)
                          k.
                         r
                        -  (SCD).
                                                                 9-2
                                                                          9-3
where k. is the number of  collocation  events  at  the  jth  site  during  a
calendar quarter.
     Equations 9-2 and 9-3 could also be used for summarizing  the  ACDs,  if
appropriate.   If  the  network  contains  more than one site with collocated
samplers, a mean, (SCD)., and a pooled standard deviation, S«,4f  for  each
observable should be computed quarterly:
    (SCD).
      (SCD).

-------
    S
     ai
          _  n
Section No. 9
Revision No. 1
Date October 1, 19£J
Page 3 of 15
                9-5
where n is the number of sites  having  collocated  measurements  within  the
network.  Equations 9-1* and 9-5 can also be used for summarizing the ACDs, if
appropriate.
     An analysis of the distributions of SCDs for the  different  observables
in  precipitation monitoring reveals that they are symmetrical but may not be
derived  from  a  Gaussian  (normal)  population.    Therefore,   statistical
prediction  methods  based  solely on the assumption of a normal distribution
may lead to erroneous predictions.  To illustrate, consider  the  summary  of
upper  and  lower  SCD  limits  presented  in  Table 9-1 for an event sampler
network.  The entries in the table correspond to the  observed  (0)  95%  SCD
population limits, i.e. the 97.5th percentile is the upper limit (UL) and the
2.5th percentile is the lower  limit  (LL).   The  table  also  presents  the
computed  ratio  (P/0) where the predicted value (P) was derived for a normal
distribution.  The range of P/0 is 0.96 to 23.9  with  the  majority  between
1.00  and  3*00.  This indicates that using a normal distribution to estimate
the upper and lower limits for the SCDs would not be very  accurate  in  this
case.
     The usual Gaussian approach, which brackets 95} of the  SCD  population,
ls:  UL - (SOftj. + 1.96 S..       for a  site
        - (SCD).  + 1.96 S  ,       for a  network
               i          ai
     LL - (SCD)^ - 1.96 Sjj       for a  site
           	                                                            9-7
        - (SCD).  - 1.96 S  ,       for a  network
     Each network should maintain at least one pair of  collocated  samplers.
For  large  national  networks  it  might  prove more useful to form regional
clusters of sites for the purpose of  precision  estimation.   The  collected
samples  should  be  tagged  in  a  consistent  manner  so  their  respective
measurements in the field and the laboratory can be easily traced and used to
quantitatively assess monitoring precision.

-------
                                                                Section No. 9
                                                                Revision No. 1
                                                                Date October 1, 1984
                                                                Page 4  of 15
             TABLE 9-1.   NETWORK SUMMARY OF UPPER AND LOWER LIMITS OF THE
                         SCDs FOR DAILY SAMPLING
Observables
(units)
pH
(pH units)
Hydrogen Ion
(mg/liter)
Total Acidity
(mg/liter)
Conductivity
(ymho/cm)
Sulfate
(mg/liter)
Nitrate
(mg/liter)
Chloride
(mg/liter)
AniniiOTi ^i TO
(mg/liter)
Sodium
(mg/liter)
Potassium
(mg/liter)
Calcium
(mg/liter)
Magnesium
(mg/liter)
Phosphate
(mg/liter)
No. of
Collocation
Events
936

936

847

935

912

912

910

897

886

887
-
885

886

904

Observed 95Z*
Population Limits
LL OL
-0.44

-0.07

-0.06

-13.9

-1.07
A.
-0.72

-0.44

-0.22

-0.33

-0.21

-0.20

-0.03

-0.04

0.39

0.06

0.06

13.4

1.09

0.62

0.58

0.26

0.44

0.30

0.30

0.05

0.05

Predicted /Observed
(P/O)**
LL
1.12

0.96

1.09

1.43

1.05

1.04

2.20

10.6

1.60

2.87

3.78

2.52

23.9

UL
1.21

1.13

0/94

1.50

1.03

1.18

1.75

8.74

1.21

1.97

2.29

1.60

17.8

 * Obser id (0)  values  based on the  2.5  and  97.5  percentiles of  the SCDs  for Che lover
   (LL)  and upper (UL)  limits,  respectively.

* ' P/O ratxo obtained from predicted values  based on 95Z  probability limits of a normal
   distribution, i.e. P - mean ±1.96 std. dev.

-------
                                                          Section No.  9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  1984
                                                          Page 5 of 15
     A quarterly precision assessment report containing the descriptors below
should  be  prepared.   These  summaries should pertain to entire networks or
regional clusters of sites, as appropriate:

1. SCDs,  ACDs  and  associated  standard  deviations  for  each   observable
   following Equations 9-1 through 9-3 •
2. Network averages (SCD),  (ACD),  and  the  corresponding  pooled  standard
   deviations for each observable, following Equations 9-4 and 9-5.
3. Upper  (UL)  and  lower  (LL)  precision  probability  limits   for   each
   observable,  either  for a given site or for the entire network, following
   Equations 9-6 and 9-7.
     These quarterly summaries should be reviewed by program management,  and
out  of control conditions identified and corrected.  The precision summaries
should be submitted together with the  monitoring  data  to  the  accountable
organization.

9.1.2  Accuracy of £H and Conductivity Measurements - To assess the  accuracy
of  field  measurements  of  pH  and conductivity, audits should be conducted
using test samples prepared and sent from the central laboratory each  month.
The samples should be measured at the site as soon as possible after receipt,
and the results should be returned to the laboratory.  The laboratory  should
analyze  the test sample before the sample is sent to the field.  The results
of the laboratory  analyses  should  be  included  with  the  field  analysis
results.   The  QA  officer  should  record all the data on the Monthly Field
Audit Report (Section 9*4).  The acceptance criteria to be  used  as  control
limits on potential sample degradation are given in Table 9-2.
     Accuracy for each  measured  variable  is  estimated  by  computing  the
differences:
      dj ' fj - (1ij+ Xf j)/2                                              9-8
where d. is the difference in measurements for jth site (appropriate  units),
f j  is  the  field  analysis  of  observable for jth site, Ijj is the initial
laboratory analysis of observable before shipment to the jth site, and 1_ . is
the  final  laboratory  analysis  of the observable after return from the jth

-------
                                                          Section No.  9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  155-
                                                          Page 6 of 15

site.  Equation 9-8 should be used only if |1    -  lf ,|   is  less  than   the

acceptable control limits (Table 9-2).   If a site value  of d. in equation  9-c
exceeds the acceptance criteria in part b of Table 9-2,  this should alert  tbe

program  manager  that the pH electrode or conductivity  standard solution  ma 7
require replacing.


TABLE 9-2.  ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR TEST SAMPLE QUALITY  AND FIELD
            ANALYTICAL ACCURACY.


(a) Laboratory Before and After Audit Measurements (one-asterisk flag if exceeded)
pH £ 5.00                     I Before - After I         £0.1 pH unit

pH > 5.00                     I Before - After I         £0.2 pH unit

Cond. £15 umho/cm            I Before - After I         £2 umho/cm

Cond. > 15 umho/cm            I Before - After I    ,.n < 15*
                                   After       * 1UU

(b) Lab vs. Field Measurement Comparison (two-asterisk flag if exceeded)

pH £ 5.0                      lavg. field - average lab I £0.2

pH > 5*00                     lavg. field - average lab I £0.3

Cond. £ 15 umho/cm             (average  field - avg. lab I £ 3 umho/cm

Cond. > 15 umho/cm             lavg. field - avg. lab I   ,nn < 20%
                               —•^ ~avgT TaF^	x 100 -
     Data should be summarized in the Monthly  Field  Audit  Report  by  the  QA
     er,   who  also  computes

observed  pH and conductivity
officer,  who  also  computes  an average monthly network difference  3  for the
                                                                      m
                   m
                  C  d.                                                      9-9
 and the monthly variance,  S~, or standard deviation, Sm.

-------
3m " I Cm-
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,  195-
                                                          Page 7 of 15
                     m             •
                                                                           9-10
                1)  J-l

where 3  is the average monthly network difference for a given variable, d,  is
as  defined  in  equation 9-8 above, and m is the number of sites audited during
the month.  Monthly results should be summarized in a quarterly report  (Section
9.3).

9.1.3  Sampling Bucket Blanks - Sampling bucket blanks  should  be  obtained  to
ascertain  the  levels of constituents that contaminate the bucket over a period
of time when there is no precipitation.  This contamination can be due  to  poor
techniques used for bucket cleaning and handling in the laboratory and field, or
may be due to dry deposition entering the bucket around the lid seal.  A  bucket
blank is obtained by cleaning a sample bucket that has been in the collector for
seven consecutive days without  an  event  occurring  and  analyzing  the  rinse
solution.   A known amount of distilled or deionized water, e.g., 100 g, is used
to rinse the bucket, and this rinse is analyzed for the constituents SO]!, N(L,
Cl",  NH^,  Na*,  K*,  Ca*   and Mg* .  The ionic quantities measured should be
corrected for the deionized water blank.
     The bucket blanks serve as a quality control check in two respects.  First,
any  increase  in bucket blank contamination over time nay indicate the presence
of a problem.  Second, data from bucket blanks may be used as a  correction  for
event concentrations or deposition averages.  Bucket blanks are expected to vary
from site to site and season to season with  the  largest  values  occurring  at
arid,  windy  sites with poor lid seals.  Thus blank averages are most useful if
they have been derived for a site over a significant  time  period,  such  as  a
quarter of the year.
     The blank deposition can be used as an indicator of a problem.   The  blank
deposition  is calculated from equation 9-11 with P given by W/k(cm), where ¥ is
the weight of the deionized water rinse and  k  is  the  conversion  factor  for
sample weight to centimeters, e.g., 640 g/cm for the Aerochem Metrics bucket.

-------
                                                          Section  No.  9
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1, 19c-
                                                          Page 8 of 15
The blank deposition then is
     Db (mg/m2) = 10 P C = 10 (W/k) C                                      S-H

where C is the analyzed concentration of the ion in mg/liter.

     Since C and W are inversely proportional, the deposition is independent  of
the amount of rinse water.  In contrast, concentration varies with the amount of
water used and would have to be calculated as a function of W  for  comparisons.
After  a  data  base  of  blank  values  has  been accumulated for each site and
quarter, a mean or a median  can  be  obtained  and  updated.   The  median  ion
deposition  in  blanks  is  generally  less  than 8% of the median precipitation
values (1).  The occurrence of extreme blank values,  e.g., those  greater  than
the  lowest  5%  of event sample values, or, alternatively, greater than 3 to 10
times  the  blank  median,  can  be  used  as  an  indication  of  unduly   high
contamination.   The  actual  upper  limit  will vary with the analyte, site and
season.
     The blank values  can  also  be  used  to  correct  event  value  averages.
However,  this  is  not  a  straightforward procedure since the conditions under
which the blanks and the event samples were obtained  may  be  quite  different.
Corrections  should  be  made only on an individual site and seasonal basis.  To
simplify matters, the median or average blank  values  for  the  analyte  for  a
particular  quarter is subtracted from the median or average event value for the
same quarter and site.  For concentration, the median bucket blank value for the
ith analyte C., must be corrected for the rinse water blank and calculated for
the median  precipitation quantity  P, i.e:

         Ci(mg/liter)  s  (Cg-C^W/P                                         9-!2a
                    or
         C^ijeq/1)  =  lO^dng/literVEq.Wt.                                9-12b
 where CB and Cy are the measured concentrations  in mg/1 for  the analyte  in  the

-------
                                                          Section  No.  9
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 9 of 15
bucket  rinse  and  the  deionized  water,  respectively,   P denotes  the  median
precipitation volume  (ml)  or  weight  (g)  for  the  quarter,  Eq. Wt. is   the
equivalent weight of the analyte, and W has been defined above.
     If a daily sampling schedule is followed,  the above  C, which  is  for  a
weekly  time  interval, should be divided by the average number of daily samples
per week.  (It is assumed  here  that  the  chief  source  of contamination  is
deposition  of  dust  in  the  bucket  while  in the sampler and that  deposition
increases uniformly with  time.)  Table  9-3  shows  the  medians   of   both   the
absolute  analyte  blank  values  and  the  relative  magnitude  of these  blanks
expressed as percentage of the median precipitation values,  for   the   1982-1983
OAPSP  network (3).  The blank data are for 224 weekly samples  taken in the  last
quarter of 1982 through October  1983  from  most  of  the  sites,  whereas   the
precipitation  medians  are for approximately 1600 daily samples  from the  entire
network  for  1982.   The  blank  data  have  been  normalized  for   a   median
precipitation volume of approximately 500 ml but have not been  corrected  for the
average time interval between samples.  Since the number  of samples  per  week
averaged slightly less than two, the concentrations listed should  be halved.
     The  data  indicate  that  the  cations   generally   have    larger   blank
contributions  than sulfate and nitrate, and are consistent with  soil dust being
the chief source of contamination.  However, even without the  time  correction,
the  largest  bucket blank median value (for potassium) is only  6% of its  median
precipitation  concentration.   Thus,   these   blank   contributions   to   the
precipitation  averages  are small and can be neglected.  For specific sites and
time intervals the blank concentration may not always be  negligible,   in  which
case the blank concentration should be subtracted from the average.
     For those sites which frequently show large blank values,  the  sampler  lid
seals  should  be  checked  and/or  replaced  as  necessary.   If  the  seal  is
functioning properly, the  problem  may  be  caused  by  excessive  winds.   The
pressure  of the seal can be increased as indicated by the sampler manufacturer.
If neither of the above corrects the problem, bucket  preparation   and  handling
techniques should be evaluated and changed as necessary.

-------
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 10 of 15
TABLE 9-3. ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE BLANK VALUES.

Observable
: so,
N03
Cl
MHU
Na
K
Ca
Mg
Median Blank Values* 'b
(mg/liter)
0.0086
0.0068
0.0043
0.0068
0.0009
0.0012
0.0048
0.0010
Relative Median Blank Values0
(*)
0.5
0.5
3.0
3.0
1.5
6.0
5.0
5.0
a.  (Blank - D.I. H_0)Concn. x Rinse vol. /500
    (Median precipitation volume ~ 500 ml)
b.  For 224 samples
c.  expressed as median blank value as a percent of median
    concentration in approximately 1600 precipitation samples.
9.2 Evaluation of_ Laboratory Operations
      The QA officer should routinely assess  the reproducibility, precision,  and
accuracy of  laboratory  chemical analyses  of precipitation samples  in order to
obtain a representative indication of overall data quality.

9.2.1  Analytical  Precision  -  To  estimate  the  contribution  of   analytical
variability  to   total variability,  duplicate  analyses should be performed on
approximately 10% of  all  the  precipitation samples  routinely  analyzed  by  the
 laboratory.   Samples randomly selected  for  replicate analyses by the QC  chemist
 should contain a large quantity  of precipitation.  The  split samples   should  be

-------
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, "934
                                                          Page 11 of 15
properly  identified,  and  the  results of such duplicate analyses recorder and
reported to the QA officer and  program  manager  in  the  Report  of  Duplicate
Analyses  (Section  9.1*).  Analytical precision is commonly defined and reported
as the standard deviation of duplicate analyses.  An additional factor of  2  is
included  in  the  denominator  to take into account the random error associated
with  both  measurements.   Thus,  for  precipitation  measurements   analytical
precision for the ith analyte is defined as

                                                                          S-13

where d. denotes the difference for the duplicate analysis of the  ith  analyte,
and  N.  is  the  number  of  sample  pairs for the ith analyte in the reporting
period.

9.2.2 Accuracy of Chemical Analysis - Accuracy of chemical  analyses  should  be
determined  monthly  from  results of the analyses of blind samples submitted to
the laboratory by randomly selected field sites.   These  samples,  prepared  by
diluting  various  precipitation  standards  (NBS  or EPA), should be shipped in
sealed plastic bottles to the field sites.  Each sample should be identified and
accompanied  by  two postcards.  On arrival at the field site, the sample should
be refrigerated at JJ°C until it is forwarded to the laboratory.  At the  end  of
the  first week in which no event has occurred, the sample should be transferred
to a clean weighed  container  generally  used  for  shipment  (plastic  bottle,
plastic  bag  or sampling bucket).  The sample should be weighed, and an aliquot
should be measured at the site for pH and for  specific  conductance.   A  field
data  form  should be filled out with the measured values and the other required
data.  To do this, a simulation of a normal precipitation record will have to be
used.   Sample  and  site identification, sampling date(s), pH, conductivity and
weight should be recorded on postcards.  The sample and the data form should  be
sent to the laboratory (as for an event sample), and the postcards mailed to the
QA officers for both the monitoring network and for the blind sample preparation
laboratory;   thus,  if one card is lost, the information will be available from
the second.  Once received at the laboratory* such a  sample  is  treated  as  a

-------
                                                          Section No. 9
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 12 of 15

routine  sample  and  is  analyzed  in the normal manner for all constituents of

interest.

     At regularly scheduled intervals, when the analytical  laboratory  sends  a

printout of sample results to the QA officer, he should identify the blind field

samples and transfer their data to the QA data file.  He should also notify  the

analytical  laboratory to delete these results from the precipitation data file.
The laboratory is then informed on its performance  analyzing  the  QA  samples.

Data  should  be  summarized  by  the  same computational procedure indicated by

Equations 9-1 through 9-7.  The QA officer should also obtain  QA  samples  from

EPA's  EMSL  Quality  Assurance  Division and/or from the U.S. Geological Survey
semiannually as an external check on analytical accuracy.


9.3  Data Quality Reporting
     The QA officer should provide the following reports to the program  manager

on a routinely scheduled basis:


1. Measurement System Precision — Quarterly reports, summarizing  all  data  on
   collocated  samples and duplicate analyses performed during the three months,
   should include differences In analytical results for the  split  samples  and
   the  average  difference for each analyte.  The report should compare average
   differences with the QC ranges typical for the laboratory and the measurement
   method.

2. Analytical Accuracy — Quarterly reports, summarizing data on at least  three
   blind  QA  samples  analyzed  by  the  laboratory in the three months, should
   include the different constituent concentrations and  an  average  difference
   and  standard  deviation computed for each.  Data for the comparison obtained
   by the QA officer should include also a summary of all  spike  recovery  data
   for  the reporting period.

3. Field Measurements Accuracy ~ Quarterly reports should give the accuracy  of
   the  measurements performed by the  field operator using audit or test samples
   sent from the laboratory on a monthly basis.  Audit  results  should  include
   the  laboratory analyses of the sample before it was sent to the field and the
   field analysis.  The  data summary should give the mean and standard deviation
   for  each  station and  for the network as a whole.  Typical acceptance criteria
    for  pH and  conductivity are presented in Table 9-2.   These  data  should  be
    used  to  indicate  when  a  bad  pH electrode or conductivity standard needs
    replacing.

-------
                                                          Section  No.  9
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 13  of 15

4. Site Evaluations — Semiannual reports should be made providing a qualitative
   evaluation  of the site and operational procedures.  The auditor visiting the
   field sites summarizes his  observations  and  provides  recommendations  for
   corrective  action,  if  appropriate.  The auditor observes and documents the
   operator's performance in the  analysis  of  unknown  performance  evaluation
   samples for pH and conductivity.  The report should also summarize instrument
   performance checks conducted on the precipitation sampler and the rain  gauge
   and any recalibration that has been performed on the latter.

9.4  Data Forms
     Blank data forms on the following pages were  taken  or  adapted  from  EPA

forms and from other references.  The titles are at the top of the figures as is

customary.  The two forms included here are:


      1. Monthly Field Audit Report

      2. Report of Duplicate Analyses

9.5 References

1. L. Topol, "Precision of Precipitation  Chemistry  Measurements11,  Proceedings
   APCA  Specialty  Conference  on  Atmospheric  Deposition, SP-49, pp.  197-209,
   November 1982.

2. R.J. Schwall, M. Lev-On and L. Topol, "Guide for Collocation Planning"  Final
   Technical  Report  to  Work  Assignment  No. 51, EPA Contract No. 68-02-3767,
   Rockwell  International  Environmental   Monitoring   and   Services   Center
   (EMSC8391. FR), in preparation.

3> Electric Power Research Institute, "Acid Precipitation in the Eastern  United
   States   (1978-1980)",   Contract   Noa. HP 1376-1  and  RP 1630-2,   Rockwell
   International Environmental Monitoring and Services Center, Final Report.

-------
                                                       Section No. 9
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date October 1,
                                                       Page 11 of 15
                          MONTHLY 'FIELD AUDIT REPORT
Sample #:
Date of Preparation of Field Audit Sample:
                                                  (Analyst Signature)
LABORATORY ANALYSIS BEFORE SHIPMENTa

           TO THE FIELD
                               LABORATORY ANALYSIS  AFTER RETURK2

                                        FROM THE  FIELD
Date:
   Conductivity
                PH
                               Date:
                         Conductivity
                                      PH
1.
2.
3.
+Average
Std. Dev.
1.
2.
3.
^Average
Std. Dev.

           LABORATORY ANALYSIS OF AUDIT SAMPLES VS. FIELD ANALYSIS
                  Conductivity  (mho/cm)
                                                PH
 Site
Field
Date
  Field
Analysis
  Lab"
Analysis
Dirt.
  Field
Analysis
  Lab
Analysis
Diff/
 a)  These data are for three laboratory aliquots  which are analyzed before
     shipment of samples, are then refrigerated, and  are reanalyzed with tie
     samples returned from the field.
 b)  Values after return from the field.
 c)  Diff. = Field-Lab

-------
                                                       Section No.  9
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date October 1, 1984
                                                       Page 15 of  15
                         REPORT OF DUPLICATE ANALYSIS

Analyte
Routine^ Duplicate"
Analysis (ID ) (ID )
Technique Date Result Date Result

Diff.c
PH
Conductivity
Sulfate
Nitrate
Chloride
Phosphate
Carbonate
Bicarbonate
Acidity
Strong Acid
Ammonium
Sodium
Potassium
Magnesium
Calcium
a. Value reported as routine sample
b. Duplicate sample, might have different ID
c. Diff. = Duplicate - Routine

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1£6i
                                                          Page ' of  58
10.0  ACID PRECIPITATION MONITORING PROGRAM EVALUATION
     Establishing a schedule for audits and independent  checks  to   evaluate

the  quality of data provided by the total measurement system is  an  important

part of an overall  Quality  Assurance  Program.   A  complete audit  for  a

precipitation   chemistry   network   should  include  both  qualitative  and

quantitative  evaluations.   The  quantitative  evaluation,   derivation   cf
estimates  of  precision  and  accuracy,  has  been discussed in  Section 9-0-

Overall program  audits,  site  evaluations,  laboratory  systen   audits  and

performance audits will be discussed here.


10.1  Program Audits Guidance

     A program audit is a qualitative on-site inspection and appraisal of the

QA  efforts  used  for  the  program.   The topics that should be reviewed by

audits and the sections of this manual pertaining to them are as  follows:


1. Overall Program Operation (Management):
   Background material - Sections 2.0 and 3*0
   Review questionnaire - Section 10.2, items A through E;

2. QA Project Plan and Its Implementation:
   Background material - Sections 2.2 and 2.3
   Review questionnaire - Section 10.2, item F;

3. Site Documentation:
   Background material - Sections 4.0 and 5.0
   Review questionnaire - Section 10.3;

4. Site and/or Field Operation:
   Background material - Section 6.0
   Review questionnaire - Section 10.2, item G;

5. Support/Analytical Laboratory Operation:
   Background material - Section 7.0
   Review questionnaire - Section 10.4;

6. Performance Audits:
   Background material - Sections 6.0, 7.0 and 9.0
   Specific guidance - Section 10.5;

-------
                                                           Section No.  10
                                                           Revision No. 1
                                                           Date October 1, 196-;
                                                           Page 2 of 58

 7. Data Handling, Analysis, Validation and Reporting:
    Background material - Section 8.0
    Specific guidance - Section 10.6.

      For each monitoring network, a program audit should be conducted  as socr

 as  possible  after  the  start  of  monitoring;   subsequent audits should be

 conducted at least once each year thereafter.   In order to conduct a  program

 audit effectively, the auditor or audit team should:


(a) Decide on the audit scope - this should depend on  the size of the  program
    and the use of the data derived from the program.

(b) Select appropriate questionnaires and have organization personnel complete
    and  return  them  prior to the on-site visit.  Several questionnaires and
    checklists suggested for this application have been prepared and included
    in this manual.

(c) Review the completed questionnaires and supporting documentation prior  to
    the  on-site visit in order to become as familiar  as possible with  Program
    Operations and to discover potential problem areas ahead of time.

(d) Set-up and carry out on-site  evaluation  and  interviews  -  the  auditor
    should,  at  a minimum, visit the program operations headquarters,  a field
    site,  and  field  laboratory.   If  the  support   analytical   laboratory
    operations  are  to  be  evaluated,  then  the .auditor  should  visit the
    laboratory also.  He should interview responsible  individuals and  members
    of  the  technical  staff  with  respect  to the material presented in the
    completed questionnaire.

(e) Conduct an exit briefing with program  personnel  to  give  a  preliminary
    report  of audit findings and to set some expected time frame in which the
    organization can expect to receive the audit report.

(f) Prepare, edit and deliver a written report of audit  results  and  program
    assessment  in  DRAFT  form;  receive and incorporate comments made by the
    organization and issue as a completed document.

 10.1.1  Support Material - For a program audit the following material  should

 be used:


 1* Overall  Program Operation;  Field and Field/Lab Operations Questions - The
    auditor  should  use  questionnaires  similar to or identical with the two
    questionnaires given in Section  10.2.  The first of  these  questionnaires
    is   intended   to  cover management and organizational activities while the
    second addresses site operation  and field measurement activities.

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date  October  1,
                                                          Page  3 of  58

2. QA Project Plan - This document should be  checked  for completeness  against
   the material found in Section 2.0 and throughout this manual.

3« Site Documentation - A completed checklist/form such  as   that   given   in
   Section  5.0  should  be  obtained for at  least one  site in the monitoring
   network.  The auditor should visit that site and verify  the accuracy   of
   the  information  written on the form.  The questionnaire given in  Section
   10.3 of this chapter may be used for this  purpose.

**• Analytical Laboratory Operations - The auditors should use a questionnaire
   based on or identical to that contained in Section 10.4.

10.1.2.  Reporting - At the conclusion of any  program/laboratory/site audit

assignment  the  auditor  should  prepare  a   complete   evaluation report.  A

possible format for such a report would include, as appropriate:


1. General Background - This section identifies who was interviewed  and   who
   was  present  for the audits and their affiliation.   A general overview of
   audit procedures should also be given.

2. Field Laboratory - This  may  be  included  where   such  a  laboratory  is
   maintained  within, or is supported by, the central  analytical laboratory.
   The field laboratory and site operation may be evaluated  as a  separate
   entity or during an audit of overall operations.

3« Analytical Laboratory -  This  section • should describe  current  ongoing
   operations  in sufficient detail as to present a complete understanding of
   the level to which both QC and QA have been implemented.   Since  this  is
   the  major  portion  of  the report, this  section  will necessarily  include
   examples of documentation which the  auditor  feels  are  critical   to  an
   understanding  of operations.  Since support to a  precipitation monitoring
   program requires many different types of analyses, the auditor may   choose
   to   describe   in  detail  two  or  three  analyses  which  he   considers
   representative of laboratory operations.

4. Data Management - This section should describe data  management   practices
   and  the  levels  of  data  screening,  QC  checks  and  independent  data
   processing audits employed.

5. Conclusions and Recommendations -  In  this  section  the  auditor   should
   discuss the audit findings with a view to  potential  data impact,  and where
   possible, indicate potential courses of corrective action.
     The report should be prepared in DRAFT format and submitted to both  the

audit  requestor  and  the  audited  organization.  This allows for the early

clearing of potential misunderstandings and points of contention and offers a

-------
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 4 of 58
mechanism  for  the inclusion of additional information necessary to complete
the report.  Once the comments to the DRAFT report have been  received,  they
should  be reviewed and incorporated.  The report can then be issued in final
form and copies sent to responsible parties for appropriate distribution.

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  198M
                                                          Page 5 of  58
10.2  Overall Program Operation Questionnaire


                             GENERAL INFORMATION


Questionnaire Completion Date: 	

On-Site Visit Date:      	
Organization Name and Address:
Telephone No.  FTS: 	  Commercial:  (    )_

Person Completing Questionnaire 	

Position:                   	       	      	
Telephone No. (	)_
Organization Director:

Monitoring Supervisor:
Quality Assurance Officer:

On-Site Audit Conducted By:

Affiliation of Auditor(s):
Persons Present During Entrance Interview:
Persons Present During Exit Interview:

-------
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 6 of 58
A.  GENERAL
1.  How long has the program been operational?
    Number of Sites 	
    Operating Since 	
2.  What is the objective of the monitoring program?
    Baseline 	
    Trends   	
    Other    	

3.  Provide a current organizational chart indicating each person's
    participation in the current program.
4.  Have the following been prepared, approved, issued, revised?
    QA Project Plan	                              Date
    Documentation on Sites and Network    	              Date
    Standard Operating Procedures for Field Sampling  	 Date
    Standard Operating Procedures for Analytical Lab  	Date_
    Does the program operate in compliance with
    EPA Protocol?  Yes	  No	  Comments	
    NADP Protocol? Yes	  No	   Comments	
    NTN Protocol?  Yes	  No	  Comments 	
    Other Protocol?  Yes      No	  Comments 	
 6.   Was the operating protocol derived from any of the above and modified  to
     meet network needs?
     Explain 	

-------
                                                          Section  No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,
                                                          Page 7 of 58

7.  Indicate number of sites currently operational  as  part of network?
8.  How many of these sites have collocated instrumentation for precipitation
    measurements?

-------
                                                          Section No. 1C
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1,
                                                          Page 8 of 58
B.  STAFFING
    Please include a list of educational background, experience and training
    for each responsible person identified in the program organization charr.

    Are the following adequate to current and proposed program operation?

     Staff Site?            Yes     No       Comment
     Organization?          Yes	  No	    Comment
     Staff Qualifications?  Yes	  No	    Comment
     Staff Utilization      Yes     No       Comment
3.  Do staff members receive regular and periodic training to maintain
    and upgrade Job skills?  Please indicate examples of each responsible
    individual's training including period and training method (course?,
    on-the-job?, etc.)
  .  Are  staff members adequately conversant with appropriate standard
    operating procedures to carry out job duties?

      Yes 	       No	   Comment	
 5.   Has a staff member  been identified as a Quality Assurance Officer?
     Yes 	    No	   Comment	
     If not,  who handles  this responsibility?_
                                          (Name)
     Who does he report to?	
                                (Name and Title)


 6.  Which of the following references  are available  to staff members?

     (a) Atmospheric Environment 	
     (b) Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association
     (c) Environmental Science and Technology 	

     (d) (Other) 	

-------
                                                          Section  No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page'9 of  58
C.  NETWORK DESIGN
1.  Are all sites documented according to specified criteria?
     Yes           No           Comment	
     (Please attach an example of the documentation for one site)

2.  Has the network been designed in accordance with stated program
    objectives?  Include a brief description of any siting compromises.
    Yes         No        Comment
3.  Is there a written plan describing the overall network?

    Yes 	Title	 Date
    No
4.  Does the organization have records identifying the status and history
    of each site?  Does it include

    (a) Some site identification?
        Yes      No      Comment                   	
    (b) Site coordinates and elevation?
        Yes      No      Comment
    (c) Photos or slides, taken to adequately show siting?
        Yes      No      Comment                       	
    (d) Date monitoring initiated? 	
    (e) Model,  manufacturer and serial numbers of equipment at the site
        and sampling schedule? 	
    (f) Reason for periods of missing data?
    Is equipment installed at site in accordance with

    (a) Manufacturer's specifications? Yes 	 No 	 Comment
    (b) Network guidelines? Yes 	 No	 Comment	
    (c) Sound scientific principles? Yes 	 No 	 Comment

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,
                                                          Page 10 of 58
6.  Does the network design consider

    (a) Access? Yes 	No	Comment
    (b) Power availability? Tes	No	Comment	
    (c) Potential localized interferences such as closely located sources?
        Tes     No 	Comment	
7.  How often are sites visited?
8.  How often are samples removed?

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date  October  1,  1984
                                                          Page  11 of  58
D.  NETWORK OPERATION
1.  Is equipment in the network operated in accordance  with
    organization's standard operating procedures  (where such exist)?
    Yes	  No    Comment
2.  Are the operating procedures compatible with
    (a) Agency QA plan? Yes	  No	  Comment __
    (b) EPA guidelines? Yes	  No	Comment _
    (c) Manufacturer's.recommendations? Yes	 No	 Comment
3.  Is equipment operated on a (documented) schedule? (Please attach
    a copy for one site.) Yes	 No	Comment	
4.  Are an adequate supply of spare parts and expendables maintained at the
    site by the network to minimize downtime?
    Yes	 No	Comment	^	

5.  Are all sites operated year round? Yes	 No	
    Explain Schedule  	


6.  Is a bound logbook maintained at the site?      Yes	 No	
    containing records of site visits?
    problems? 	
    data?
7.  Is routine minor maintenance performed regularly at the site?
    Yes         No         Comment
    By Whom:
                (Name - Position)

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 12 of 58
8.  Does the person performing such maintenance possess  (or have access
    to):
    (a) Standard troubleshooting/maintenance procedures? Yes 	No	
        Comment
    (b) Instrument manuals? Yes 	No	Comment
    (c) Other guidance?  Explain 	
9.  Indicate which tasks (if any)  are included as part of site operation
    duties:

       	Task	          	Frequency	
10. Are any measurements made on samples at sites? Yes	 No_


    Comment
                           At Site          Freq.         Measurement Device

                            (Yes/No)     (Times per wk)

          Cond.            	    	       	
           PH


           Precip. depth


           Wt/Vol.


           Other
     (Attach pages  as  necessary.)

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  13 of  58
11.  How are samples shipped to analytical  lab?   (Please  circle
    appropriate response.)
          in buckets        without field measurements     by truck
          in bottles        with field measurements        hand  delivered
          other1                                          by mail
                                                          other*

          •Explain 	

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,
                                                         Page 14 of 58
E.  DATA AND RECORDKEEPING
1.  Please indicate data sources and,  as  necessary, attach examples of,
    or briefly describe, the data  format?

    (a)  field site/field lab data  include:
        rain gauge  charts 	
        copies of data sheets
        copies of logbooks 	
        other 	
    (b) analytical lab data include:
        analytical results	
        calibration data 	
        separate QC data 	
    (c) other data source used in conjunction with acid  precipitation:
        meteorological data	fc	
        aerometric data 	
        source emission data
2.  Are field data checked for reasonableness?

    Yes        No 	 Indicate what is checked

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 15 of 58
3.  Are analytical lab data checked for reasonableness?


    Yes        No        Indicate what is checked	
1.  Are a portion of data from field reverified by lab (such as
    duplicate pH, conductivity or weight measurements)?
    Yea	No	Specify
5.  Are such crosschecks used to validate or flag data?

    Yes 	No	 Indicate any cutoff points 	
6.  How are data finally reported? How often?
7.  Where and how are data archived? For how long?

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1, 198M
                                                          Page 16 of 58
F.  QUALITY ASSURANCE
1.  Is there a defined QA function ongoing within the  network?

    Yes        No 	 Comment 	
2.  Is this function independent of all routine operations?
    Yes        No        Comment	
3.  Does the individual, responsible for this function regularly evaluate
    or audit the following operations?
    (a) Site operations (Performance Audits)?    Yes	No	
    Comment on Frequency	
    (b) Site data?    Yes	  No	
    Indicate % of data recalculated  ..	
    (c) Analytical laboratory operations?     Yes	No	
    Indicate dates of last audits of lab	
    (d) Analytical laboratory data?     Yes	No	
    Indicate % data recalculated 	
    Does QA maintain (and/or prepare) independent check solutions or
    standards specifically used to monitor accuracy?
    Yes 	 No	   Comment on types, concentrations and uses
    Does  the QA  function  include the use of EPA supplied check samples
    such  as from interlaceratory surveys?
    Yes 	 No	      Comment  on frequency and analytes checked

-------
                                                         Section  No.  10
                                                         Revision Mo.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  17  of  57
6.  Does the analytical support lab participate in EPA,  USGS  and  other
    interlaboratory round robin test programs?

    Yes	No	Comment on frequency and attach last  results summary

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 18 of 57
G.  FIELD SITE EVALUATION
This portion of the questionnaire concerns measurements made  by field or
support personnel independent of any measurements made by the analytical
support laboratory.  If measurements are made only by the analytical lab,
please mark only those applicable.

This part of the questionnaire is to be repeated for each site visited
during a program audit.
1.  Site address
    Designation (no./identifier)
2.  Does the agency have the necessary hand tools, electrical testing
    and calibration equipment to operate and maintain equipment,
    calibrate rain gauges and repair samplers at the site?
              No	  Comment	
3.  For precipitation collection are the following types of equipment used?
    (a) Automatic precipitation collectors? 	
    (b) Bucket manual-type collectors?  	
    (c) Recording rain gauges (sensitive to +0.01 in. (0.25mm)?
    (d) Event pen markers on rain gauges?	•_
    Are buckets cleaned at site? Yes 	  No
    Identify responsible person  	~
 5.  Does site have adequate supply of deionized water? Yes	 No_
    (indicate source) and average conductivity (yS/cm)  	
 6.   Please  indicate the  types, make and model of field measurement
     equipment  (attach  pages  as necessary  - not necessary if site
     documentation has  been attached).

 7.   Are  there  an adequate number of clean buckets kept at the site?

     Yes     	  No	 Indicate  number  usually on hand 	
 8.  Is the collector sensor cleaned  periodically with deionized water?
     Yes       No      How often?	

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 19 of 57
9.  For wet/dry collectors, is the rim of the dryfall bucket wiped
    clean regularly?
    Yes      No      How Often?	
10. Is the rain sensor tested regularly?
    Yes      No      Each Site Visit?
    How Often?
    By what method?
11. Is the dryfall bucket inspected for moisture at each site visit?
    Yes      No      How Often?            	
12. Are rain gauge pens (weight trace and event) checked for ink?
    Yes      No       How Often?
13. Is the rain gauge clock wound at prescribed intervals?
    Yes        No        Indicate Interval?	
14. Is the clock accurate to +1/2hr per week?
    Yes        No        Comment     -_	
15. Indicate the frequency of calibrations for
    (a) Rain gauge 	per	
    (b) pH meter   	per
    (c) Conductivity meter	per
    (d) Balance for precipitation weighing	per
16. Are rain gauges calibrated
    (a) upon installation?       Yes	  No_

    (b) at least semi-annually?  Yes	  No_

    (c) after major maintenance? Yes	  No
    (d) when performance audits indicate the need? Yes	  No_

17. Is a conductivity standard solution kept at site?
    Yes           No          Indicate Source
    Indicate cone. 	umho/cm. Kept for how long?
18. Are the shelf life and accuracy of conductivity standards documented?
    Yes           No          Comment

-------
                                                         Section  No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  20  of 57
19.  Is the conductivity meter calibrated under  the same conditions  as
    used for the samples?
    Yes	  No	  Indicate Discrepancies
20. Are standard pH buffers kept at site?
pH 4
PH 7
pH 8
Other
Yes
(source)
(source)
(source)
(source)
No




21. Is the pH meter calibrated with simulated precipitation reference
    solutions in addition to standard buffers?
    Yes	  No	  Frequency 	
    Source of reference solutions
    Briefly outline procedure used
22. Is conductivity standard kept refrigerated when not in use?

    Yes	     No	  Comment	
23. Are pH and conductivity meter calibrations checked at least at one point
    immediately prior to sample measurement?
    Yes 	  No	Briefly outline procedure 	
24. Are measurements made at known temperature?
    Yes	  No	  Indicate Temp.°C
 25. Where are measurement data recorded?
    (a) Site Logbook? 	

    (b) Data Sheet?   	
    (c) Other?        	

-------
26. Are other check solutions maintained at site?

Conductivi ty
          level
source
               frequency
                of use
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 21 of 57
replacement
 interval
          level
source
                 use
shelf life
27. Is a check on the rain gauge calibration made regularly?
    Yes	No	 Indicate Frequency 	
28. Is the outside of wet bucket wiped dry before weighing?
    Yes          No            Comment 	
29. Is precipitation measured by weight? Yes_
    by volume? Yes 	 No	
                             No
30. Has the balance used to weigh precipitation  been  calibrated?
    Yes	 No	 Frequency 	

31. Has the balance calibration been  performed with traceable weights?
    Yes	 No	 Indicate traceability of weights	
 32. Is balance zeroed before each use?
    Yes          No            Comment

-------
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 22 of 57
33. How are pH and conductivity cells/electrodes stored between use?

     p_H                                 Conductivity


buffer (indicate pH)	     conductivity standard 	
deionized water	     deionized water	
other                               other
3*. Are samples allowed to come to room temp, before measurements are
    made?  Yes	No	 Comment	

35. Are separate sample aliquots used for pH and conductivity?
    Yes 	No	  If no, indicate which measurement is
    made first
36. Are aliquots discarded after use?
    Yes          No  	 Comment
37. How are samples shipped to laboratory?  (Circle appropriate response)
    In buckets/In bottles/In plastic bags

    By air/By surface mail/By truck
    With cold-packs/At ambient temperature

    Comments  	  	
 38. Are samples shipped within 2U hours of collection?
    Yes 	    No 	  Briefly describe sample storage and
    treatment prior to  shipment.
 39. Do copies  of  field measurements accompany sample?  Yes_

    No	 Are  any additional copies made? How many __

    Purpose 	

-------
                                                         Section No. 10
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 198M
                                                         Page 23 of 57
*0. Do these records  indicate (please attach an example data sheet if
    possible)
     date of event                       Yes	No	
     beginning and  ending dates
      for emulative  sampling period    Yes	No	
     amount of precipitation            Yes	No	
     temperature                         Yes	No	
     pH                                 Yes	 No	
     conductivity                        Yes	No	
     signature                          Yes	No;
     additional comments                Yes     No

-------
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 24 of 57
10.3  Site Documentation Evaluation
 10.3.1  General Guidance - During the initial phase of network  installation,
 each  site  should be documented using a site documentation form such as that
 included in Section 5.0 or that used  by  the  NADP.   This  form  should  be
 conpleted   by  organization  personnel  to  record  station  location,  site
 classification, station instrumentation, topography and  important  pollutant
 sources.  This documentation should be repeated at least annually thereafter.
     It  is  important  that  the  information   contained   on   such   site
 documentation  be  verified  as  accurate.  While it does not fall within the
 scope of the quality assurance function to prepare these site documents,  the
 Quality  Assurance  officer  should verify, for a small number of sites, that
 the information contained in such documents is  accurate  and  complete.   He
 should note any changes which may affect data quality and notify organization
 management of such problems.  Of particular importance  in  this  regard  are
 sites  where  collocated  instrumentation  has been placed;  such data may be
 used to estimate measurement or data precision.
     The suggested questions in 10.3.3 should only be used  as  guidance  and
 should  be  modified  as necessary to fit the exact documentation used in the
 Site Description Report.   In  general,  the  site  evaluation  auditor  will
 perform the following tasks:

(a) obtain  from organization management completed copies of  site  description
   do cumentation;
(b) schedule on-site  visits for all or a representative number of sites;
(c) evaluate site and seek information to answer those questions given in  the
   questionnaire  (10.3-3 or Appendix B);  and
 (d) prepare a  site  evaluation report.
 Tiis  site documentation evaluation may be  performed  concurrently  with  the
 site  visitations  required  for program audits.

 10.3.2  Site Evaluation Reporting - At  the conclusion of a site evaluation or
 evaluation  of a group of sites  for a single organization, the auditor  should

-------
                                                         Section  No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 25  of  57
prepare a brief written report.   This  report   should   include  at   least  a
discussion  of  observations  made  during  the   site  visit  as noted  in  the
questionnaire and a copy of the site documentation used for   the   evaluation.
Where  major  discrepancies  are  noted)  additional  information  needs to be
included.  If further documentation has been provided by the  auditor, a newly
completed   accurate   site   description   document    should  be attached.
Recommendations to improve siting and thus the data quality obtained  from  the
respective sites should be included.

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 26 of  57

10.3.3  Site Documentation Review - to be  completed  for each  site reviewed

1.  Site Address 	
    Designation (Number/Identifier) 	
2.  Has the data acquisition objective changed?
    les	 No	 Comment	
3.  Verify the longitude and latitude by independently obtaining
    maps of the area. OK	Problem	
4.  Are the names, addresses and identification of responsible
    individuals still valid?  If not, note changes.
5.  Verify that all instrumentation is present and note any that are
    not operational.  Give reason for_non-operation and estimate of
    down-time.  Is this a potential data impact or? Comment	
6.  Has additional equipment been added since the site documentation
    was prepared or equipment removed or changed?  Add any changes to the
    equipment list.
 7.   If measurements are made at the site (or closely located site
     laboratory), verify the indicated information on type, model,
     description, etc., of  pH and conductivity meters, balance, etc.
     OK          	    Problem	
 3.   Is there a map  indicating location and distances to the major
     sources which may affect data  gathered at the site?
     Yes            No

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision Mo.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 27 of 57

9.  Is it still valid?  Yes 	   No 	Or have the number and/or

    location of sources changed?	

    Note problem areas	


10. Review sketch of map.  Is it complete with respect  to indication of
    roadways, parking areas, buildings (including number of  stories),
    tree lines, power lines, bodies of water, and fences?
    Complete	 Incomplete (note problem areas) 	
11. Verify all distances using a tape measure or rule?   Indicate

    significant discrepancies. 	
12. Walk around the site and compare view in the four cardinal
    directions with that as given in the site photos.  If photos
    have not been included with the site documentation, the
    auditor should take at least one in each of the four cardinal
    directions (N,S,E&W) looking outward from the main sampler.

13. Are there any obstacles with a height that subtends an angle of 30°
    with the ground horizontal?
1U. Are the precipitation collectors and/or rain gauges at least
    7 feet (2 meters) apart and no further than 15 meters apart?
15. Are rain gauge and precipitation collector placed in a line
    perpendicular or parallel to the prevailing wind, or in the
    direction specified for network sites?  If parallel, is the
    wet bucket end upwind of the rest of the collector?

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1981
                                                         Page 28 of  57
16.  Is the rain gauge level?  Yes 	 No	 Comment
17*  Is the access door to the  rain gauge on the  leeward side of the wind

    path? Yes	 No	Comment	


18.  Is the rain gauge capable  of  measuring 0.01" (.025cm)  of precipitation?

    Yes 	No	Comment	


19.  Is the precipitation fall  to  the sites unobstructed?  (The auditor
    should comment on vegetative  obstructions such as trees which do
    not now pose any problem but  which may impact precipitation within
    the next few years.)	
20. For collocated precipitation collectors is the distance between
    then 7-45 ft (2-15 meters)?
    Yes        Ho        Comment 	
21. Will there be any changes made to the site or site equipment in
    the near future?  Note the intended changes and schedule, and
    estimate any potential data impact. (Attach sheets as necessary.)

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 29 of  57
10.4  Laboratory Operations Evaluation
     Each analytical support laboratory should be   evaluated  at  least  once
each  year  to  qualitatively  assess  the  laboratory's  ability  to produce
analytical data of high quality.  Such an evaluation is commonly referred  to
as  a  systems  audit  and  is  performed  in  a  manner  very similar to  that
described in Section 10.2 for systems audits of overall operations.

10.4.1  Procedure - A laboratory systems audit is  normally  conducted  in three
steps.   First,  a questionnaire, such as that included in  Section  10.4.2, is
sent to the analytical laboratory prior to the audit visit.  The  laboratory
should  then  fill out the questionnaire as completely as possible and return
it with sufficient documentation through the use of attachments.  Second, the
questionnaire  is  reviewed by the auditor to become familiar with the system
operations and to determine  any  weaknesses  and   potential  problem  areas.
Third,  after  the questionnaire has been reviewed, the onsite  interviews are
scheduled.  The preliminary review of-the questionnaire serves  the purpose of
allowing  a  greater  amount  of  time to be spent onsite examining  potential
problem areas.
     The auditor should interview the laboratory manager, any person  who  has
direct analytical responsibility for precipitation sample analysis,  personnel
associated with data validation,  analysis  and reporting,  and   the  person
identified  by  the  laboratory  manager  who  has responsibility- for quality
assurance.  The information gathered from these interviews  should  be  complete
and  up  to  date  and  should present an adequate picture  of the  current and
proposed levels  of  implementation  of  all  quality assurance  activities,
including internal quality control.
     At the conclusion of the series of interviews, the auditor should inform
the  laboratory  manager  of  the  audit  interview  results  and discuss any
potential data impacting problems uncovered.  This is commonly  referred to as
an  exit  interview.   During  this  activity,  the auditor also  explains the
reporting procedures and schedule.

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 30 of  57
10.4.2  Analytical Laboratory Questionnaire

                             GENERAL INFORMATION

Questionnaire Completion Date	

On-Site Visit Date	

Laboratory:
Street Address:
City: 	 State: 	Zip:

Laboratory Phone No. (Area CodeX	)	

Organization Director: 	

Laboratory Director: 	
Quality Assurance Officer: 	
   (Quality Control Chemist)

Questionnaire completed by (if more than one, please indicate which
aection(s) of the questionnaire completed):
On-Site Audit Conducted by:
 Affiliation of Auditor(s):
 Persons Present During  Entrance Interview:
 Persons Present During Exit Interview:

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  31 of  57
A.  GENERAL

1.  Please use a simple block diagram to show the  organization structure
    and how the laboratory functions within it.

2.  Standard Operating Procedures (SOP)
    a. Has the organization written and implemented official
       Standard Operating Procedures?

       Yes	  No	  Comment	
       Implementation Date: 	
    b.  Is the SOP Manual followed in detail?

       Yes       No       Comment
    c. Does it contain all quality control steps practiced?

       Yes	  No	  Comment	

    d. Does each analyst have a copy-at his/her disposal?

       Yes	  No	  Comment	

    e. Has an instrument performance study been completed for each
       analysis?

       Yes       No       Comment

-------
                                                      Section No. 10
                                                      Revision No. 1
                                                      Date October 1, 1984
                                                      Page 32 of 57
3.  Please provide a complete list of laboratory personnel, their
    educational background, analytical experience in general and
    specific experience in precipitation sample analysis.

4.  Laboratory Staff Training

    a. Is a formal training program used?     Yes	      No	

       If yes, is it:

           Organization wide                  Yes	      No	

           In-house                           Yes	      No	

           On-the-job training                Yes	      No	

    b. Training ouside local organization (courses attended).
      Course
    description                      Course     Course     Year of
     or title       Who attended ~   length      type*    attendance
     •State,  Federal,  College,  University or other
     c. Publications routinely received  and  used  by the organization.

-------
                                                         Section Mo. 10
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1, 1984
                                                         Page 33 of 57
    5.   Laboratory  Facilities
                           Available                   Comments
       Item                Yes    No      (adequacy of facility and/or space)

 1.  Support Gas 	

 2.  Lighting 	
 3.  Compressed Air

 4.  Vacuum Systems
 5.  Electrical Services

 6.  Hot and Cold Water _

 7.  Laboratory Sink 	
 8.  Ventilation System

 9.  Hood Space 	
10.  Cabinet Space
11.  Bench-top Area

12.  Lab Space 	
13. Lab Space Utilized
    for Offices	
14. Office Space
15. Storage Space

-------
                                                      Section No. 10
                                                      Revision No. 1
                                                      Date October 1, 1984
                                                      Page 34 of 57'
6.  Laboratory Equipment

I of
Item units
Balance
analytical
Vacuum Filtration
apparatus
BBS traceable
calibrated
thermometer
Desiccator
Ion
Chroma tograph
Technicon
Atomic Absorption
Balance, top
loader
Class "S"
weights
Balance table
Distilled water
or deionized water
Conductivity meter
Glassware
pH meter
Drying oven
Hot plates
Refrigerator


Equipment
Make Model



















Condition/Age
Good-Fai r-Poor





-













Ownershi p
Air Water



















> of time used
in Rainwater
Programs



















-------
B.  SAMPLE LOGISTICS
    Receiving Clerk
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 35 of 57
Initials
                            (Name)
                                                        Yes
         No
 1.  Are all chemicals dated on receipt and
     discarded when shelf life is exceeded?

 2.  Are all samples received by the laboratory
     logged into a bound notebook?

 3.  Are all samples filtered before analysis?

 4.  Are all samples stored in the refrigerator
     between analyses?

 5.  Are all containers washed before they are sent
     to the field?

 6.  Is the conductivity of the last rinse water
     measured for 10% of the washed containers?

 7.  If the conductivity of the rinse is greater
     than 2 vimhos/cm, is the container rinsed further?

 8.  After the containers and lids are dried are the
     containers capped immediately?

 9.  Are precautions taken not to touch the inside
     of the containers and lids?

10.  Are all samples stored in a refrigerator when
     not being analyzed?

11.  Are precautions taken not to breathe on
     the sample?

12.  After completion of the analyses, are the
     samples stored in a refrigerator for at
     least six months?

-------
C.  GRAVIMETRIC MEASUREMENTS


1.  Is the analytical balance calibrated daily
    with weights traceable to NBS?

2.  Is a Balance Calibration Log kept up
    to date?

3.  Is routine factory service scheduled?

    Date next service is due: 	     	
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 36 of 57

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 37 of 57
D. £H MEASUREMENT

   Analyst	        Initials
                    (Name)

                                                       Yes       No

 1.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of  the
     standard operating procedures?                    	    	

 2.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     Instrunent performance data?                      	    	

 3.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?                              	    	

 4.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of  the
     latest monthly QC plots?                          	    	

 5.   Is the analyst aware of the most recent
     control limits?                                   	    	

 6.   Does the analyst have a copy of -the most recent
     list of samples in-house to be analyzed?          	
     Date of list
 7.  Are all solutions properly labelled?

 8.  Has a pH Meter /Electrode Acceptance Test been
     completed and documented for the meter and
     electrode currently in use?

 9.  Is the pH electrode rinsed well before and after
     buffer and sample measurements?

10.  Before and after samples are analyzed, is the
     pH meter and electrode calibration checked
     with simulated precipitation reference
     samples (low ionic strength)?

11.  Is the pH meter recalibrated after every set
     of twenty samples with simulated precipitation
     reference samples (low ionic strength)?

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 38 of  57
12.   After the initial calibration of the day, when the
     meter is recalibrated after  a series of measurements,
     is the old calibration information written  down
     before the meter settings  are changed?            	

13*   Is the pH electrode reference solution analyzed
     first and are the results  compared to the
     pre-established control or warming limits?         	

14.   Are the following control  samples analyzed  with
     each run?
                            Distilled Water Blanks     	

                                       Old Samples     	

                                       QC Spike         	

15.   Are electrodes stored as recommended by the
     manufacturer?                                     	

16.   Are electrodes checked and filled, if necessary,
     before each analysis?                             	

-------
E.  TOTAL ACIDITY ANALYSIS
                                                         Section No. 10
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 39 of 57
    Analyst -
                   (Name)
Initials
                                                        Yes
        No
 1.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     the standard operating procedures?

 2.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     instrument performance data?

 3.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?

 4.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     the latest monthly QC plots?

 5.   Is the analyst aware of the most recent
     control limits?

 6.   Does the analyst have a copy of the most recent
     list of samples in-house to be analyzed?

 7.   Are all solutions properly labelled?

 8.   Has a pH Meter/Electrode Acceptance Test been
     completed and documented for the meter and
     electrode currently in use?

 9.   Are micropipets calibrated on at least a quarterly
     basis or whenever the tip breaks?

10.   Are repipets calibrated on a quarterly basis?

11.   Is the stock 1.0 N NaOH standardized each
     month against potassium acid phthalate and
     protected from C02 absorptions?

12.   Is solution temperature carefully monitored
     during analysis to see that it changes by
     less than 0.1°C?

-------
13*   Are conditioning solution data and analyst
     spike data calculated and plotted real time?

14.   Are the i|» function correlation coefficients of
     these data examined to ensure that they are
     greater than 0.9990?

15.   Are the following analyzed each day?

         Three conditioning solutions and an
         analyst spike initially.

         An analyst spike and a conditioning
         solution at the end of the analysis.

         A QC spike.

16.   Are electrodes stored as recommended by the
     manufacturer?

17.   Are electrodes checked and filled if necessary
     before each analysis?
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision  No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 40 of 57

-------
F.  AUTOMATED COLORIMETRY MEASUREMENTS
    Analyst
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  198U
                                                          Page U1 of  57
Initials
                           (Name)
                                                        Yes
        No
 1.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     standard operating procedures?

 2.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     instrument performance data?

 3.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?

 4.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     latest monthly QC plots?

 5.  Is the analyst aware of the most recent
     control limits?

 6.  Does the analyst have a copy of-the most recent
     list of samples in-house to be analyzed?

 7.  Are all solutions properly labelled?

 8.  Is a Standard Preparation Form completed
     when new stock standards are prepared?

 9.  Are dilute calibration standards prepared
     fresh daily?

10.  Is the analyst spike prepared fresh daily
     from an independent stock?

11.  Is the calibration curve at least a five
     point curve?

12.  Is the first calibration curve of the day
     checked for detection limit and linearity?

13.  Are the analyst spike data calculated and
     plotted real time?

-------
14.   Is each new calibration curve checked to see  that
     instrumental response changed less than
15.   Are the following control samples analyzed  with
     each run?
                                       Blanks

                                       Old Samples

                                       Analyst Spikes

                                       QC Spike

16.   Is water pumped through all lines daily before
     and after analysis?

17.   Are pump tubes changed at least once per
     month?

18.   Is the pump cleaned when the pump tubes are
     changed?

19.   Is soap solution pumped through all lines
     once per week?

20.   Is the flowcell cleaned with a sulfuric acid-
     potassium dichromate solution once per month?

21.   Is the pump oiled once per three months?

          Date of last service _
22.  Is the colorimeter mirror assembly and color
     filter cleaned and the alignment optimized
     once per three months?

          Date of last service          	
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision  No.  1
                                                         Date  October  1,  1984
                                                         Page  42 of  57

-------
G.  ION CHROMATOGRAPHY ANALYSIS
    Analyst
                        (Name)
                                                          Section  No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page U3  of  57
Initials
                                                        Yes
         No
 1.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     standard operating procedures?

 2.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     instrument performance data?

 3.  Does' the analyst have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?

 4.  Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     latest monthly QC plots?

 5.  Is the analyst aware of the most recent
     control limits?

 6.  Does the analyst have a copy of-the most recent
     list of samples in-house to be analyzed?
          Date of list
 7.  Are all solutions properly labelled?

 8.  Is a Standard Preparation Form completed
     when new stock standards are prepared?

 9.  Are dilute calibration standards prepared
     fresh weekly?

10.  If manual techniques are used, are samples
     and eluent prepared fresh daily from the same
     concentrated stock buffer?

11.  Is the analyst spike prepared from an
     independent stock?

12.  Is the calibration curve at least a four point
     curve for each analytical range?

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No*  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 44 of'57
13»   la the first calibration curve of the  day
     checked for detection limit and linearity?

14.   Are the percent recoveries for the analyst
     spike data calculated in real time and
     compared to pre-established warming and
     control limits?

15.   Are the following control samples analyzed
     with each run?
                                       Blanks
                                       Old Samples

                                       Analyst Spikes

                                       QC Spike
16.  Is the drip tray examined daily for reagent
     spills, and are spills cleaned up daily?

17.  Are pumps oiled once per week?

18.  Is the anion precolumn cleaned once per month
     with 0.1 M Na2C03?

19.  Is the Br", NO" resolution checked once
     a month and documented?

-------
                                                         Section No. 10
                                                         Revision No. 1
                                                         Date October 1,  1984
                                                         Page 45 of 57
H.  ATOMIC ABSORPTION ANALYSIS
    Analyst
                    (Name)
Initials
                                                       Yes
        No
 1.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     standard operating procedures?

 2.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     instrument performance data?

 3.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?

 4.   Does the analyst have his/her own copy of the
     latest monthly QC plots?

 5.   Is the analyst aware of the most recent
     control limits?

 6.   Does the analyst have a copy of the most recent
     list of samples in-house to be analyzed?
          Date of list
 7.   Are all solutions properly labelled?

 3.   Is a Standard Preparation Form completed
     when new stock standards are prepared?

 9.   Are dilute calibration standards prepared
     fresh monthly?

10.   Is the analyst spike prepared from an
     independent stock?

11.   Is the instrument allowed to warm up at
     least 15 minutes with the flame on before
     the final wavelength adjustment is made?

12.   Is the calibration curve at least a five
     point curve?

-------
13.   Is the first calibration curve .of the day
     checked for detection limit and linearity?

14.   Are the analyst spike data calculated and
     plotted real time?

15.   Is each new calibration curve checked to
     see that instrumental response changed less
     than 5*7

16.   Are the following control samples analyzed
     with each run?
                                       Blanks
                                       Old Samples

                                       Analyst Spikes

                                       QC Spike
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 46 of 57

-------
                                                        Section Mo. 10
                                                        Revision No.  1
                                                        Date October  1,  1984
                                                        Page 47 of 57
I.  DATA MANAGEMENT

    Data Clerk
                  (Name)
                                                        Initials
                                                       Yes
                                                               No
1.  Are field data sheets filled in an organized
    manner?

2.  Does the data cleric do a 100% QC check for
    accuracy of data input to the computer?

3.  Is output from computer checked with input
    data?

4.  Does strip chart reduction by on-line electronic
    digitization receive at least 5% manual spot
    checking?

5.  Are control charts or equivalent checks (e.g.,
    computer calculated range limits" or regression
    charts) current and available for inspection?

6.  Do laboratory records include the following
    information?

    a.  Sample identification nunber
    b.  Station identification
    c.  Sample type
    d.  Date sample received in laboratory
    e.  Time, date and volume of collection
    f .  Date of analysis
    g.  Analyst

    h.  Results of analysis (including raw
        analytical data)

    i.  Recipient of the analytical data

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 48 of 57
 7.   Are rain gauge chart data for event times
     and amount checked?

 8.   Does laboratory follow chain-of-custody
     procedures from sample receipt to discard?

 9*   Doea the data clerk routinely repot quality
     control data sheet information to the  analyst?

10.   Does the data clerk submit quality control data
     sheet information to the lab manager along with
     the analytical data to be reported?

11.   Are computer printouts and reports routinely
     spotchecked against laboratory records before
     data are released?

12.   Are manually interpreted strip chart data
     spotchecked after initial entry?

13.   Are minimum detection limits calculated by an
     approved method or baseline standard deviation?

14.   Are calibration curve coefficients tabulated
     and regularly reviewed as evidence for instrumental
     control?  (An alternative is to use Regression-
     Hypothesis testing in lieu of control  charting.)

15.   Are control charts, regression charts  or computer
     QC data bases up to date and accessible?

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page U9 of 57
 -   LABORATORY QUALITY CONTROL

  Quality Control Chemist 	
                                (Name)
Initials
                                                        Yes
         No
 1.   Does the QC chemist have his/her own copy of the
     standard operating procedures?

 2.   Does the QC chemist have his/her own copy of
     instrument performance data?

 3.   Does the QC chemist have his/her own copy of
     safety instructions?

 4.   Does the QC chemist have his/her own copy of the
     latest monthly QC plots?

 5.   Is the QC chemist aware of the most recent
     control limits for each analytical method?

 6.   Does the QC chemist prepare and submit a blind QC
     spike once per month for each analytical method?

 7.   Does the QC chemist routinely review and report
     blind QC spike data to the laboratory manager?

 8.   Does the QC chemist update control limits and
     obtain new control chart plots once per month?

 9.   Does the QC chemist review the quality control
     data sheet provided by the data clerk, and then
     decide whether or not to release data for
     reporting?

10.   Does the QC chemist prepare monthly check
     samples for the field sites?

11.   Does the QC chemist compare the laboratory and
     field data to the monthly check sample's value
     and report this to the laboratory manager?

-------
                                                          Section No. 10
                                                          Revision No. 1
                                                          Date October 1, 1984
                                                          Page 50 of 57
K.  LABORATORY MANAGEMENT

    Laboratory Manager	    Initials
                             (Name)

                                                        Yes      No
 1.  Does the laboratory manager have his/her
     own copy of the standard operating procedures?

 2.  Does the laboratory manager have his/her
     own copy of instrument performance data?

 3.  Does the laboratory manager have his/her
     own copy of safety instructions?

 4.  Does the laboratory manager have his/her
     own copy of the latest monthly QC plots?

 5.  Is the laboratory manager aware of the most
     recent control limits?

 6.  Does the laboratory manager review the
     following before reporting data?

     a.  The data itself

     b.  The quality control data sheet with
         analyst notes

     c.  The quality control chemist QC reports
     d.  The ion summation ratios for the data
     e.  The calculated vs. measured sample
         conductivity
 7.  Does the laboratory manager ensure that at least
     5% of the data have been checked indepedently
     by the QA officer? (p. 1 of 6, Section 3)

 8.  Does the laboratory manager ensure that all the
     necessary corrections have been implemented
     in the data base before release?

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,
                                                          Page 51 of 57
10.5  Performance Audits
10.5.1  Network Performance Audits - A performance audit for a  precipitation
monitoring  network  should be made at least once per year on all sites.  The
purpose of the audit is to quantitatively assess site  operations  which  are
usually  performed during the site and/or field laboratory audit visit.   This
on-site visit may be combined with a site evaluation or other types of audits
such as program systems audits or laboratory systems audits.
     Detailed  and  complete  protocols  for   performance   audits   of   an
organization's  precipitation network should be developed by the organization
operating the network.  A complete performance audit should  be  designed  to
include, as a minimum, the following activities:

1. Check Sample Analysis — The auditor takes to  the  site  a  150-ml  check
   sample  of  known  pH  and conductivity.  Such samples are prepared by the
   auditor's support laboratory  to  closely  resemble  that  site's  ambient
   samples  in  terms of pH and conductivity.  The sample can then be used as
   follows:

   (a) The station operator is requested to provide a precleaned bucket.
   (b) The auditor adds the sample to the clean bucket.
   (c) The station operator is- asked to treat this sample as though it were a
       routine precipitation sample.
   (d) The auditor observes,  asks  questions,  and  takes  notes  on  sample
       treatment  and field measurements (usually sample volume or weight, pH
       and conductivity).
   (e) The  auditor  records  the  results  of  the  pH,   conductivity   and
       volume (wt)  measurements  and,  based  on a comparison of the support
       laboratory value with  that  obtained  by  the  station  operator,   an
       assessment of the accuracy of site measurements is obtained.
2. Calibration of Weighing Bucket Rain Gauge — The  auditor  brings  to  the
   site  a  set of calibrated weights.  Such weights may be obtained directly
   from the rain gauge manufacturer but should be certified at the  auditor's

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 52 of 57

   support   lab   prior  to  the  audit.   At the site the auditor proceeds as

   follows:


   (a)  The rain  gauge stripchart in use is marked, checked  for  the  correct
       time   setting, removed and a new chart put in place.  The new chart is
       used  for  the audit.

   (b)  The gauge funnel and collection bucket are removed.

   (c)  The weight-handle assembly is placed on the platform normally occupied
       by the collection bucket and the gauge is zeroed.

   (d)  Weight plates representing 1" depths (approximately 825 grams each for
       the   Belfort  gauge)  are  then  stacked  onto  this  assembly and the
       indicated  inches  of  precipitation  are  read  from  the  stripchart
       recorder.

   (e)  If the gauge is properly calibrated,  each  weight  should  cause  the
       stripchart to indicate 1" of rain.  Since added weights are known, the
       found (read from the stripchart)  and  audit  (calculated  from  known
       weight) precipitation amounts may be compared.

   (f)  The gauge is calibrated to at least twice  the  maximum  precipitation
       expected   for  that site or to 8", whichever is greater.  If  the gauge
       is out of calibration by more than 0.05 in. at any depth, it  must  be
       adjusted  according to the manufacturer's directions.

   (g)  The stripchart is removed and the original chart replaced and  the  pen
       set   to  the correct time.  The audit chart is annotated and  kept with
       the records of the audit.
3» Operation of Wet/Dry Automatic Sampler (e.g.  Aerochem  Metrics)  — This  is
   performed  to  check proper sampler operation and  to make  certain that the
   sampler would collect an entire precipitation event if one  occurred.    To

   check  this,  the  auditor  should add 1-2  drops of distilled or deionized

   water to the precipitation sampler sensor.   The sampler is  judged  to  be

   operating  normally  if,  within  a  few seconds,  the  lid  covering the wet

   bucket moves to cover the dry bucket.

        After the wet bucket has been open for several minutes, the  auditor

   should  touch  the  sensor  plate to check  that it is  heating.   If so, the

   moisture is removed from the sensor plate by blowing.    The  sensor  plate

   then dries more quickly and the lid should  cover  the wet bucket again.

-------
                                                         Section No.  10
                                                         Revision No.  1
                                                         Date October  1,  1984
                                                         Page 53 of  57
        Lid opening and closing cycles  may occur  during an event.  Where   the
   rain  gauge  at the site has been interfaced with  the sampler and  equipped
   with an event pen,  the auditor should check if marks,  indicating a   lid
   cycle, are recorded on the rain gauge strip chart.

4. Review of Site Procedures and Data Documentation   —  The  auditor should
   observe  site  personnel performing  all the routine site operation duties.
   This should include handling of samples and sampling containers, checks on
   instrumentation  and data recording.  If a check sample has been analyzed,
   as described above, part of this check has already been performed.
        If an analysis check sample has not been  used, the auditor should  ask
   site personnel to describe in detail how samples,  buckets  and measurements
   are  handled.   After  determining  (or observing)  sample handling,   the
   auditor   should   then   interview   site personnel  to   gather   detailed
   information on standards ( pH and conductivity),   sample   treatment after
   analysis,  water  supply  and  data   recording.  This interview is used to
   assess operator training and performance and to establish  sample and  data
   integrity up to the point where both leave the site.

10.5.2  Performance Audit Reporting - At the conclusion of the audit, a short
report should be prepared summarizing audit results and recommendations.   The
audit report should serve to establish  that a precipitation sample  from   the
audited  site  is  collected,  handled,  measured,  and  shipped to a support
laboratory for further analysis in a proper manner, and  that all  data   are
properly  documented.    A  format for this report is  suggested below  together
with material to be included under each topic.

1. Introduction  -  summary  of  data,   time, place  of  audit,   site    and
   organization  identification;  and identification  of people present during
   the audit.
2. Audit procedures - summary of  audit  procedures   employed together  with
   notation  of  any  deviations from previous accepted procedures.   Included
   are references to traceability to establish credibility of all  standards
   used for the audit.

-------
                                                          Section No.  10
                                                          Revision No.  1
                                                          Date October  1,  1984
                                                          Page 54 of 57


3* Site operations and audit results - summary of  data  obtained  both  from
   observations  and  interviews of site personnel;   included in this section
   should be copies of data forms used at the  site  and/or  other  pertinent
   documentation;   included at the end of this section are summary tables of
   the audit results themselves.

4. Discussion of audit results and recommendations  -  brief  discussion  and
   interpretation  of the results together with a discussion of any problem's
   impact on data integrity and  quality.   Recommendations  should  also  be
   included to remedy such problems.

10,5.3  Laboratory Performance Audits - As a part of the  independent  checks

to  evaluate  the  quality  of data provided by the total measurement system,
performance audits of the central analytical laboratory provide an assessment

of  .measurement  accuracy.   These  audits  are  carried  out  by  having the
laboratory  analyze  well-characterized,   independently-prepared   simulated

precipitation solutions.

     Performance audits should be conducted at least quarterly  by  analyzing

rain-type  solutions  for  all  the  .pbservables  reported  in  precipitation

samples.  It is acceptable to send the samples to the laboratory and  request

that  they  be  processed as "blind" samples.  Performance audits of field pH

and conductivity should be performed during an on-site program audit.

     Samples useful for performance assessment are available  from  at  least
four organizations - Environmental Protection Agency/Environmental Monitoring

Support   Laboratory   (Cincinnati),   United   States   Geological   Survey,
Environmental  Protection  Agency/Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory
(Research Triangle Park), and the Canadian National Water Research Institute.
The  first  three  organizations  conduct  interlaboratory  surveys every six

"months;  the Canadian tests are more frequent.   Each  analytical  laboratory

supporting   an  acid  precipitation  monitoring  program  is  encouraged  to

participate in these round-robin surveys.

 1.  EPA Cincinnati -   (Quality   Assurance  Branch,  EMSL  -  Cincinnati,  EPA,
    Cincinnati,   Ohio  45268,  513/684-7327).  QC water/wastewater samples are
    available without cost.  All samples are prepared from ACS  reagent  grade
    chemicals   and  are  sent  as concentrates in sealed glass ampoules.  When
    diluted  to  the indicated volume,  values obtained by the laboratory  should
    agree with  those given by the EPA.   Samples are available for:

-------
                                                            Section  No.  10
                                                            Revision No.  1
                                                            Date October  1,  1984
                                                            Page 55  of 57

         Minerals/Physical Analyses - Na*,  K"1",  Ca*2,  Mg*2,  SO'2, Cl", F",  pH,
         alkalinity/acidity,   total  hardness,  total   dissolved solids,   and
         specific conductance (available in two concentrations).

         Nutrients -  Nitrate-N  ammonium,-N,   Kjeldahl-N,   orthophosphate   and
         total phosphorus (available in two concentrations).


  2. United  States  Geological  Survey  -   (Leroy  Schroder,   Water  Resources
     Division,  USGS National Water Quality Laboratory, 5293 Ward Road,  Arvada,
     CO 80002).  These samples approximate   precipitation  samples.    They   are
     available  in  a  limited  supply  and may be requested only by government
     laboratories.

  3. EPA Research Triangle  Park  -  (Performance  Evaluation   Branch  -  MD77B
     EMSL-RTP, EPA, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711, 919/541-4531).  These are
     commercially prepared, reference, concentrated synthetic  rain  samples  of
     well-characterized  composition.   They  are  prepared from reagent grade
     salts,  following  a  procedure  developed  by  the National  Bureau   -,of
     Standards.   Samples  are  characterized  by analysis  by  EPA and three (3)
     independent laboratories.  Dilution instructions  are   supplied  with   the
     samples,  together  with  appropriate  reporting forms. They are available
     free of charge to both private and governmental organizations.

  4. Canadian National Water Research Institute - (Mr.  K.I. Aspila or Ms. Susan
     Todd, National Water Research Institute,  P.O. Box 5050, 867 Lakeshore  Rd.,
     Burlington, Ontario L7R4A6, 416/637-4638 or 637-4653). Samples consist of
     soft water, precipitation and synthetic rain and have  all the constituents
     present in precipitation.  Samples available only during  test periods.

     For ongoing accuracy assessment during those quarters  when interlaboratory

or  round-robin  surveys  are  not  available,  the laboratory is encouraged to

obtain and use additional samples  from  the  suppliers  given  above.   It  is
important  that  all  samples  used  for such accuracy assessment be submitted
"blind" in order to obtain a representative picture of ongoing operations.  .. -

     For performance audits, it is not recommended that the laboratory  prepare
its  own  independent standards since no easy means exists  to  characterize  them

well before use.  In all cases the known integrity of the  purchased  standards

is  higher  than  that which can easily be  achieved by a single laboratory,  and

the turnaround time on results for such samples should be sufficiently short to

prove useful.

-------
                                                            Section No. 10
                                                            Revision No.  1
                                                            Date October  1,  1984
                                                            Page 56 of 57
10.6  Data Processing Audita
10.6.1  General Guidance - Data processing may involve reading a strip chart or
other  instrument  output tape, calculating the concentrations and transcribing
these results to a data form.  In a data processing audit a certain  percentage
of results is recalculated.  In a system which has a large proportion of manual
data processing activity,  the  audit  should  be  regularly  performed  by  an
individual  other  than  the  one  who  originally  reduced  the  data.   In  a
computerized data acquisition environment the difference in personnel  may  not
be  as critical but, in general, the audit should be performed as independently
and objectively as possible.
     The data processing audit should be performed on each  of  the  groups  of
data  as  they  are  reported.   Thus  if  an  agency is reporting summaries by
quarter, each quarter's data should be checked.  Similar strategies  should  be
employed for semiannual or annual reporting.
     The auditor should obtain the complete data  base  for  that  period.   At
least  5}  of  the  total  number  of  events  in the audit data base should be
selected at random for checking.  Since calculation of data is critical  for  a
proper  derivation  of precision summaries for collocated sites in the network,
at least one site with collocated samples should be  included  in  the  audited
data.   For  each  site,  at  least  two analytes other than pH or conductivity
should be recalculated.  Note that the same two analytes may be  used  for  all
sites.
      If- the recalculated results do not agree to within  rounding  errors  with
the   reported  values,  the entire data base should be rejected and returned to
the laboratory  supervisor  for  further  quality  control  measures  and  data
validation before being released.

 10.6.2  Estimating the Percent Error in a Data Base  -  The  following  can  be
applied  to  estimate  the  percent error in data bases.  Each organization will
differ in the  total number  of values in its data base and the acceptable  error
 level.    For   large data  bases  (N>3000) and for the simple case where no errors
 are  found in n values  tested, the  following  table  gives  the  approximate  n

-------
                                                            Section No. 10
                                                            Revision No. 1
                                                            Date October 1, 1984
                                                            Page 57 of 57
values  required  to  be checked to yield the listed error probability £ at the
significance level x:

      x            I  0.05    I  0.05    I  0.05    I  0.05    I  0.10 I  0.10
      p            |  0.01    I  0.02    I  0.05    I  0.10    I  0.01 I  0.10
      n            I  298     I  148     I   58     I   28     I  229  I   22
Thus for a large data base, if 148 values are checked and no errors found,  the
probability  of errors in the base is less than 2% at the 5% significance level
(959 probability).
     For small to moderate  size  data  bases  (N^3000),  the  above  binomial
approximation  is inadequate.  Therefore, an approximation to a non-replacement
sampling model is used.  For testing that the data base has less than 2% errors
(at  the  5% significance level), the following table yields the number of test
values n needed, for N values in the data base:

      N  I  100     I  1000    I  3000
      n  I   78     |   140    I   146    -

     If errors are found in the tests, the upper and lower confidence bounds  t>
of  the  error  fraction  (f)  of  a  data base of size n can be estimated from
Equation 10-1.

          f * nb ± 1.96[n(l-b)] 1/2                                        10-1

where the test is applied to n=300 measurements  (n - 0.1N)  and  f  failures
(errors)  are  found.   The  larger  the  parent  base N, the more accurate the
estimate.  Thus if a random check of 706 values in a data  base  of  over  7200
values yields 14 errors, the error bounds are approximately 3.3 to 1.29.

-------
                       APPENDIX A
        Operation and Maintenance Procedures for
           Precepitation Measurement Systems
(Originally Volume Vb of the Quality Assurance Handbook,
            EPA 600/4-82-042b,  Revised 1986)

-------
                         CONTENTS OF APPENDIX  A


Section

1    INTRODUCTION

     1.1  COLLECTION SITES

     1.2  PARAMETERS AND ANALYTES GENERALLY
          MEASURED

     1.3  SAMPLING PERIODS, DEFINITION OF EVENT

     1.4  REFERENCES

2    FIELD OPERATIONS

     2.1  EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
          2.1.1   Station Supplies
          2.1.2   Spare Parts
          2.1.3   Precipitation Collector
                  Description
          2.1.4   Rain Gauge Description

     2.2  INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS
          2.2.1   Precipitation Collector
                  2.2.1.1 Installation
                  2.2.1.2 Acceptance Tests
          2.2.2   Rain Gauge
                  2.2.2.1 Installation
                  2.2.2.2 Acceptance Tests

     2.3  EQUIPMENT CHECKS, MAINTENANCE AND
          TROUBLESHOOTING
          2.3.1   Precipitation Collector
                  2.3.1.1 Routine Checks
                  2.3.1.2 Special Calibration/
                          Maintenance
                  2.3.1.3 Winter Maintenance
          2.3.2   Weighing Bucket Rain Gauge
                  2.3.2.1 Routine Checks
                  2.3.2.2 Calibrat ions
                  2.3.2.3 Winter Maintenance

-------
                         CONTENTS (Continued)

Section

2    2.8  QUALITY CONTROL
          2.8.1  Unknown or Quality Control Test
                wSamples for the Field
          2.8.2 "site Visits/Audits
          2.8.3  Blind Samples for the Laboratory

     2.9  FIELD PROCEDURE SUMMARY

     2.10 REFERENCES

3    CENTRAL LABORATORY SUPPORT OPERATIONS
     FOR THE FIELD

     3.1  CLEANING AND SUPPLYING OF GLASSWARE
          AND PLASTICWARE
          3.1.1  Cleaning of New or Used
                 Plasticware
          3.1.2  Cleaning of Glassware
                 3.1.2.1  Glassware Used for
                          Metal Analyses
                 3.1.2.2  Glassware Used for
                          Anions and NH%
          3.1.3  Supplying Containers to the Field

     3.2  PREPARATION OF STANDARDS FOR THE FIELD
          3.2.1  Preparation and Measurement of
                 Conductivity Standards
          3.2.2  Preparation and Measurement of
                 pH Reference Solution
          3.2.3  Preparation of Quality Control
                 Samples

     3.3  INITIAL EVALUATION OF FIELD EQUIPMENT
          3.3.1  Evaluation of Conductivity
                 Meters and Cells
                    3.3.1.1  Evaluation of Accuracy
                             and Precision of Meter
                    3.3.1.2  Evaluation of Linearity
                             of Meter
          3.3.2  Evaluation of pH Meters
          3.3.3  Evaluation of pH Electrodes
          3.3.4  Evaluation of Field Balance
                 and Thermometers

-------
                          CONTENTS  (Continued)

Section

2    2.4  SAMPLE COLLECTION AND HANDLING
          2.4.1   Avoiding Contaminat ion
          2.4.2,,  Sampling Schedules
          2.4.3   Collection and Handling
                  Procedures
                  2.4.3.1   Wet Buckets
                  2.4.3.2   Plastic Bag  Liners
                  2.4.3.3   Bottles

     2.5  FIELD  MEASUREMENTS
          2.5.1   Weighing Sample Containers
                  2.5.1.1   Balance Specifications
                  2.5.1.2   Procedure
          2.5.2   Specific Conductance  Measurement
                  2.5.2.1   Apparatus Requirements
                  2.5.2.2   Procedure
                  2.5.2.3   Conductivity Measurement
                           Problems and Tests
          2.5.3   pH Measurement
                  2.5.3.1   Apparatus and  Equipment
                  2.5.3.2   Procedure
                  2.5.3.3   Electrode Problems
                           and Tests
          2.5.4   Temperature
                  2.5.4.1   Requirements
                  2.5.4.2   Procedure

     2.6  SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION, PRESERVATION,
          STORAGE,  AND SHIPMENT
          2.6.1   Background
          2.6.2   Procedure
                  2.6.2.1   Weekly Cumulative
                           Samples
                  2.6.2.2   Daily, Event or
                           Sequential Samples
          2.6.3   Field Blanks
                  2.6.3.1   Buckets
                  2.6.3.2   Bottles

     2.7  DOCUMENTATION
          2.7.1   Logbook
          2.7.2   Rain Gauge Charts
          2.7.3   Field Data Forms

-------
                         CONTENTS  (Continued)

Section

3    3.4  MONITORING OF FIELD OPERATION
          3.4.1  Evaluation of Field Conductivity
                 and pH Measurement Systems
          3.4.2  Evaluation of Field Precipita-
                 tion Collector, Rain Gauge, and
                 Balance

     3.5  REPORT FORMS

     3.6  REFERENCES

4    LABORATORY PROCEDURES

     4.1  GRAVIMETRIC MEASUREMENTS
          4.1.1  Apparatus
          4.1.2  Calibrat ion
          4.1.3  Procedure

     4.2  PH MEASUREMENT

     4 . 3  CONDUCTANCE MEASUREMENT

     4.4  SAMPLE FILTRATION

     4.5  ACIDITY MEASUREMENTS

     4 . 6  DETERMINATION OF SULFATE

     4 . 7  DETERMINATION OF NITRATE

     4.8  DETERMINATION OF CHLORIDE

     4.9 DETERMINATION OF ORTHOPHOSPHATE

     4.10 DETERMINATION OF FLUORIDE

     4.11 DETERMINATION OF AMMONIUM

     4.12 DETERMINATION OF SODIUM, POTASSIUM,
          MAGNESIUM AND CALCIUM

     4.13 REFERENCES

-------
                                                       Section No.  1
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31,  1986
                                                       Page  1  of   4
1.0  INTRODUCTION
     The  increasing  national awareness of the harmful effects  of  acid
deposition on the ecology and materials has led to a significant increase
in  the  number  of deposition monitoring networks  and  related  effects
studies.  It has  become  necessary  to  provide  uniform, systematic and
approved  precipitation  monitoring procedures so that the acquired  data
are accurate and comparable among  all  monitoring networks.  The purpose
of  this  operations  and maintenance (0 & M) manual is  to  describe  in
detail the currently recommended  procedures for conducting precipitation
monitoring.    However,   it  is  essential  that  these  procedures   be
supplemented by the quality  assurance  tasks  which are presented in the
Quality Assurance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems (1). While
these two manuals contain the procedures recommended by the Environmental
Protection  Agency,  it must be emphasized that  network  protocols  take
precedence if conflicts occur.
     The  basic  goals  of  this manual are to instruct  how  to  collect
representative  samples  without  contamination  and  to  preserve sample
integrity  for  analysis.   The  possibility  of  sample   contamination,
degradation, or reaction must  be  minimized.   The sample collector, the
first  object  that contacts the sample, must meet these basic goals  and
must be reliable.   The  Department  of  Energy  (DOE)  Health and Safety
Laboratory  (HASL)  type automatic, wet/dry collector (2), (3),  (4)  has
been tested and accepted by most  U.S.   monitoring networks.  Discussion
is  limited  to this type of collector.  A reliable rain  gauge,  pH  and
conductivity meter, a balance, and other accoutrements are also needed in
a monitoring station.
     The  material  in this manual is based primarily on  the  procedures
used in the  Electric  Power   Research  Institute  (EPRI)  precipitation
network  and the Utility Acid Precipitation Study Program (UAPSP) in  the
Eastern United States, in  the  National  Atmospheric  Deposition Program
(NADP),  and  in the Multi-State Atmospheric Power  Production  Pollution
Study (MAP3S).

-------
                                                       Section No. 1
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  2  of  4

     The EPA handbooks for air pollution measurements (5,6) and for water
measurements (7)  were  used  as  guides  for  format  and  content.  The
analytical  procedures are based on those in the manual:   Development  of
Standard Methods for the Collection and Analysis of Precipitation (March,
1986)  (7).   To  have this 0 & M manual stand  alone  without  requiring
referrals to the other EPA  handbooks,  some  duplication of material was
required; this material is referenced.

1.1  COLLECTION SITES

     Collection  sites  must  be located to meet the  objectives  of  the
monitoring program—for example,  baseline, regional or urban, and siting
criteria  is  given in Section 5.0 of the quality assurance  manual  (1).
The quality assurance  manual  also  contains  the  general rules for the
placement  of  precipitation  collectors,  and  the  appropriate   siting
documentation.  In addition, siting characteristics may be quantified (8)
if desired.  In essence, the site must yield representative samples—thus
must not have obstructions which may affect the results.

1.2  PARAMETERS AND ANALYTES GENERALLY MEASURED

     The constituents  and/or  indicators  commonly  measured  are listed
below.   All are measured in the laboratory; items 8, 9,  and 10 are  also
measured in the field.

 1. Sulfate (SO?) - Concentrations  above the  baseline values are caused
    mainly by human activities, principally by the release of S0«  during
    the burning of fossil fuels and during refining processes; tne SO™ is
    oxidized  to sulfate in  the atmosphere.
 2. Nitrogen  Compounds  (NOZ,  NH* and -  NO  -  essentially  NO +  N02)
    concentrations  above the baseline values are caused primarily by tne
    burning of fossil fuels, such as  for  transportation purposes; NH^
    occurs chiefly from biochemical reactions.

-------
                                                      Section No.  1
                                                      Revision No. 1
                                                      Date July 31, 1986
                                                      Page   3  of  4


 3*  Chloride Ion (Cl~) - Originates chiefly  from  sea salt aerosols.
                                  _o
 4.  Phosphate   (orthotribasic  PO, )   - Source  is  soil,  rock,    and
    fertilizers; an important nutrient.

 5*  Metal  Ions  (Na+, K+, Ca++, Mg+*) - Na+ originates  mainly  from   sea
    salt aerosols,  but all of these ions  can originate  from  soil dust in
    desert, semiarid and intensively cultivated areas.

 6.  Acidity -  both  SO-  and  N02   form   the  strong  acids  found   in
    precipitation;  organic acids are frequently also present.

 7.  Alkalinity - Calcareous  material  (e.g.,  soil carbonate (C0~)),  can
    make precipitation alkaline, and can neutralize the  effects or  acids.

 8.  £fl  - A quantitative measure of precipitation acidity or  alkalinity.
    In a theoretically clean  atmosphere, a  water sample  in equilibrium
    with  atmospheric C0» would measure pH 5.6; the acidity  increases   as
    the pH decreases from 5.6 to zero.  Alkaline  samples have pH  7  to  14.

 9.  Specific  Conductance  -  The  reciprocal  of  the  resistance   of  a
    solution; its magnitude depends  on  the  concentrations  and  types of
    dissolved salts.

10.  Precipitation  Amount - Value required both to calculate  the  weighted
    mean values of theconstituents  and  to  derive  the  total amount of
    materials deposited over a  time period.


1.3  SAMPLING PERIODS, DEFINITION OF EVENT


     Precipitation  sampling  schedules  that  are  commonly used include
weekly, daily, event, and subevent (sequential).   An  event  can  be defined
as a storm separated from a second  storm  by a dry interval, commonly at

least six hours in the winter or at least three hours  in the summer.   The

sampling schedule depends  on the  objectives  of  the program  and  on the
available  funds.   Aerometric  and/or  meteorological  studies  such  as

transport modeling often require  daily  or   hourly sampling.  Studies of

long-term  trends,   and spatial and temporal  variability   generally  use

longer sampling intervals.  Sampling periods longer than one  week are not
advisable  because  significant changes may  occur to  the sample while  it

remains in the collector.

-------
                                                       Section No. 1
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  4  of  4
1.4  REFERENCES
1. Quality  Assurance  Handbook for Air  Pollution  Measurement  Systems,
   Vol. V  -  Manual  for  Precipitation  Measurement   Systems,  Part I -
   Quality  Assurance  Manual.U.S. EnvironmentalProtectionAgency,
   Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/4-82-042a (January 1985).

2. Volchok,  H.L.,  and R.T. Graveson, Proc.  Second  Fed. Conf. on  Great
   Lakes., pp. 259-264 (1976).

3. Galloway, J., Water, Air and Soil Pollution 6,  p. 241 (1976).

4. Bogen, D.C., Water, Air and Soil Pollution 13,  p. 453 (1980).

5. Quality Assurance Handbook  for  Air  Pollution  Measurement Systems -
   Vol. I  - Principles, U.S.Environmental Protection Agency,Research
   Triangle Park, N.C., EPA-600/9-76-005 (December 1984).

6. Quality  Assurance  Handbook for Air Pollution  Measurement  Systems  -
   Vol.  II  -  Ambient   Air   Specific   Methods^U.S.Environmental
   ProtectionAgency,Research Triangle Park,N.C.,   EPA-600/4-77-027a
   (May 1977).
7. Development  of  Standard Methods for the Collection and  Analysis  of
   Precipitation, U.S.Environmental  ProtectionAgency, Environmental
      >pj
      >it
Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati,  OH (March 1986).
8. Eaton,  tf.C.   and E.L. Tew, "Site  Evaluation Assistance to  New  and
   Existing Acid  Precipitation  Collection  Sites  in the State-Operated
   Network,"  Research  Triangle Institute, RTP, NC,  under  EPA  Contract
   68-02-4125 (August 1985).

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  1  of  49
2.0  FIELD OPERATIONS

     Precipitation  collection   field   operations   are  covered  in the
following major areas:

     1. Equipment operation and  maintenance;
     2. Sample collection, handling, measurement, preservation,  storage,
        and shipment;
     3. Documentation of  field activities;
     A. Quality control procedures.

Precipitation samples are very dilute, thus large measurement errors  can
occur due to  contamination  or  degradation.   Field  procedures must be
accomplished  in  a way that ensures measurement accuracy.

2.1  EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES

     This  section  contains a list of the field equipment  required  for
typical precipitation collection  stations,  followed  by a list of spare
parts for support of these stations.  The section concludes with detailed
descriptions  of  the  precipitation   collectors  and  rain  gauges most
commonly  in use.  The rain gauge measures the amount  of  precipitation,
and  the  precipitation   collector  collects   the  sample  for  chemical
analysis.  The two devices are not interchangeable.

2.1.1  Station Supplies

     The equipment and supplies  required depend upon sampling objectives.
Equipment  and  supplies  for a weekly precipitation  sampling station  are
listed in Table 2-1.  If  plastic  bag  bucket liners are used, the number

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 2 of 49
              TABLE 2-1.  FIELD EQUIPMENT LIST FOR EACH STATION
Equipment/Material                                      Min. Quantity/Site

Automatic precipitation collector                             1
Collection buckets (3.5 gal) for sampler and lids             5
Fuses for sampler                                             2
Recording rain gauge with event marker                        1
Rain gauge mount                                              1
pfl neter, electrode                                           1
Buffer, pH 4.0, and 7.0 (1 liter)                             1
Conductivity meter and cell                                   1
Standard KCl solution, 74 yS/ca (500 mL)                      1
Temperature probe                                             1
Pipette, syringe (20 mL capacity)                             1
Tips, disposable (pkg. of 100)                                1
Balance (20 kg capacity) or graduated cylinder (2 liter)      1
Set attachment weights for balance (1,2,2,5,10 kg)            1
Hailing cartons                                               3
¥ash bottle                                                   1
Test tubes, plastic (17x100 mm) disposable, or vials (35 mL)  375
Test tube rack                                                1
Rain gauge charts (package of 100)                            1
Self-adhesive labels                                          300
Envelopes                                                     300
Logbook (bound with perforated pages)                         1
Data forms                                                    300
Kinvipes or other tissues (boxes)                             15
Shipping tape (rolls)                                         3
Kallet, rubber                                                1
Deionized vater
Saran wrap  (roll)                                             1
Bucket  tie down                                               1

-------
                                                       Section  No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 3 of 49
          TABLE 2-1.  FIELD EQUIPMENT LIST FOR EACH  STATION  (cont.)
Equipment/Material                                      Min.  Quantity/Site

Additional Requirements for Bags:

Bucket modified for use with bags                             2
Bucket lids                                                   2
Plastic bucket liners (bags)                                 50
Strap with Velcro fasteners                                   2
Polyethylene gloves (box of 100)                              1
500 nL polyethylene bottles                                  50
Indelible marking pen (black)                                 2
Scissors                                                      1
Plastic cable ties (pkg. of 100)                              1

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  4  of  49

of  vet  buckets required are reduced from five to two  and a  supply  of
bucket liners, plastic gloves, plastic bottles, cable ties, two retaining
straps,  and scissors vould be added to the list.  Equipment required for
event or daily precipitation  sampling  is  similar.  Similar supplies as
listed in the table are also recommended for event or daily sampling. For
sequential sampling, the list  in  Table  2-1  should include a different
type  of  collector,  a lover capacity (2.6 kg) more  sensitive  balance,
polyethylene bottles  vith  caps,  and  possibly  a means for storing and
shipping  the sample in a cold state (insulated containers and freeze-gel
packs), and few, if any, buckets.   If  meteorological  and/or aerometric
•easurenents  are made, the appropriate instruments must be  included  in
the list; hovever, these instruments are not discussed in this manual.
     All  sites require deionized or distilled vater.  If this cannot  be
produced at the site, it can  be  purchased  locally.  It is advisable to
use  only  vater vhich has the analysis (or conductivity) printed on  the
label.  The specific conductance of  the  water should be 3 yS/cm or less
and should be measured before the water is used.

2.1.2  Spare Parts

     Precipitation  collector fuses should be kept at each station  along
vith spare parts and supplies.  For larger networks, these items are more
conveniently supplied through the field manager or the central laboratory
vhen needed.  Supplies for a  network  of 10 to 12 stations are listed in
Table  2-2.   The polyethylene bottles are for special  sampling  studies
and/or for sample storage in  the laboratory.
     Electrodes  in contact with solution have a limited life because the
vet glass membrane ages.   Only  electrodes  that  can be stored in a dry
state have a long shelf life.  However, electrodes should not be emptied,
cleaned and filled with  electrolyte  solution  by the station operators.
Vhen  an electrode breaks or  becomes suspect (Section 2.5.3.3), it should

-------
                                                       Section  No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 5 of 49
        TABLE 2-2.  SUPPLIES LIST FOR A NETWORK OF 10 TO 12  STATIONS
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL                                            NO.
Precipitation collector fuses (12)                             1
Precipitation collector sensor and motor box                   2
Rain gauge clock                                               2
Rain gauge chart clip                                          3
Rain gauge chart paper (package of 100)                        3
Rain gauge pens and ink (set)                                  1
pH meter                                                       1
pH electrode                                                   3
Buffer, pH 3.0, 4.0, 6.0, and 7.0 (1 gal)                      2
Conductivity meter                                             1
Conductivity cell (cell constant ~1)                           2
Standard KCl solution, 74 yS/c«                               (a)
Syringe (20 «L)                                                20
Pipette, disposable tips                                       100
Shipping cartons and collection containers                     36
Polyethylene sample bottles
  16 02 (500 mL)                                               600
   8 oz (250 mL)                                               600
   4 oz (100 mL)                                               600
   2 oz ( 50 mL)                                               200
Wash bottle                                                    12
Temperature probe                                              3
Test tubes, plastic (17x100 mm) disposable, 35 mL vials        1000
Test tube racks                                                12
Self-adhesive labels                                           1000
Envelopes                                                      1000
Logbooks                                                       12
Data forms                                                     300
Kimwipes or other tissues (boxes)                              36
Shipping tape (rolls)                                          12
Plastic bucket liners (bags)                                   500
Polyethylene gloves (pkg. of 100)                              12
Bucket modified (for use with plastic bucket liners if
 netvork uses bags)                                            24
Collection buckets and lids (3.5 gal)                          24
Saran wrap (roll)                                              12
Strap with fastener                                            24
Marking pen (black)                                            24
Scissors                                                       12
Plastic cable ties (pkg. of 100)                               12
Bucket tie down                                                24
(a) Make up as needed

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  6  of  49

be replaced vith a new  tested  electrode  from  the  central laboratory.
Regardless  whether  the  electrode is used or stored,  it  has a  finite
useful life.

2.1.3  Precipitation Collector Description

     The  HASL-type precipitation collector (see Figure 2-1 and  Appendix
A) has tvo containers and a  common  lid.   The  lid seals the wet sample
bucket   when   precipitation  is  not  occurring,  and  thus   minimizes
evaporation and  contamination  by  dry  deposition  or  dustfall.   When
precipitation occurs, the lid moves off the wet bucket and covers the dry
deposition bucket.  Two polyethylene buckets  (1,2) are generally used to
collect wet and dry deposition, respectively, for inorganic species.  For
organic constituents, glass or stainless steel containers should be used.
The conmon lid is driven by a motor that is controlled by a rain  sensor.
The sensor contains a face  plate  with  a  grid closely spaced above it;
when  the grid and plate are shorted by a drop of water  (precipitation),
the motor is actuated to lift the  lid  from  the collection bucket.  The
sensor  contains  two heating circuits: one goes on when  the  temperature
falls below approximately 4°C  to  melt  snow or ice on the sensor plate,
and  the second goes on when the lid lifts off the sample bucket to  heat
the  sensor  to  about  55°C.   Heating   increases  the  rate  of  water
evaporation from  the sensor, and hastens the closing of the wet bucket by
the lid after precipitation ceases  to  minimize the exposure time to dry
fallout.   A seal between the bucket and the lid is achieved by a plastic
foam gasket under the lid and by  a  spring  load;  however,  with strong
winds  the  lid  may wobble, and some contamination  may  enter  the  wet
bucket.  A bucket tie-down is useful in windy weather.

-------
                                                            Section No. 2
                                                            Revision No. 1
                                                            Date July 31,  1986
                                                            Page 7 of  49
plata activates
ncraeable lid when
                                             bucket to another
   Airmirfljpt Table

*
                               Motor Bex
                                 (under table top)
  Figure 2-1.  Wee/Dry Precipitation Collector

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  8  of  49
2.1.4  Rain Gauge Description
     To reference all  the  precipitation  amounts  against a standard, a
recording  rain  gauge is used to measure the quantity of  precipitation.
Recording rain gauges  are  of  two  basic  designs  (identified  by   the
principle on which they operate)—the weighing-type gauge and the tipping
bucket-type gauge.  Recording rain  gauges should be capable of measuring
precipitation  to approximately 0.25 mm (0.01 in.), and be accurate to  a
few  percent.   For  the  weighing  gauges,  the  sensitivity  is  a   few
hundredths  of an inch (less than 1 mm), and the accuracy is  independent
of precipitation rate and is  about  1%  of  full scale.  For the tipping
bucket  gauges,  the generally accepted accuracy is 1% for  precipitation
rates of 25 mm/h (1 in./h) or less,  4Z  for  rates of 75 nun/h (3 in./h),
and  6Z for rates up to 150 mm/h (6 in./h).  The precipitation rates  are
either measured directly  or  derived  from  the cumulative precipitation
data.   The weighing gauges generally have 8-day clocks and charts, and a
0 to 30 cm (0 to 12 in.) dual  traverse  weighing  range.  See Appendix B
for a typical weighing rain gauge manual.
     The recording rain gauge should have an event marker pen to indicate
vhen the wet-side collector bucket is open or closed.  The times  can  be
read off the 8-day chart.  The  Aerochem Metrics collector will interface
vith  the  Belfort 5-780 series rain gauge.  The event pen  typically  is
actuated, rising from  its  baseline,  when  the collector lid opens; and
remains  actuated  until the lid closes, whereupon the pen falls  to   its
baseline  position  again.   To   prevent   the  event  marker  pen  from
interfering  with the sample trace pen on the weighing gauge, the two are
offset on the time axis.   Thus  only  one  pen can be set at the correct
rime.   Care  must be taken to use the correct event beginning or  ending
time.  Since the operator  is  seldom  present  to  observe the collector
behavior  during  an  event,  the event  marker  pen  is  invaluable   for

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  9  of  49

indicating  a  collector   malfunction.    For   precipitation  collector
assembly, operation, installation, and servicing, see the  manufacturer's
instructions.

2.2  INSTALLATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS

     After  a  suitable  site   location  is  chosen,  the  precipitation
collector and rain gauge must be properly installed and system acceptance
tests performed before actual precipitation data can be collected.

2.2.1  Precipitation Collector

2.2.1.1  Installation—
     The precipitation collector  should be mounted on the ground  so that
the rims of the buckets are level and at least 1 m above the ground.  The
collector should  be  properly  anchored  against  strong  winds,  and the
bucket  should  be secured to the precipitation collector by means  of  a
spring or elastic cord  (bungee  cord)  hooked  to  the bucket handle and
collector  table edge.  The precipitation collector may be shielded  from
the wind, but it should not be put in  an area where excessive turbulence
vill  be  caused by the shield or where there are  obstructions  such  as
trees and buildings (Reference 3,  Section  5).  For the placement of any
neighboring  collectors and rain gauges of equal or smaller  height,  the
distance between rain  gauge  and  collector,  or  between  collector and
collector,  should be at least equal to the height of the taller   object.
Correct spacing should minimize  interference  as well as splash effects.
To  ensure  that the collector dry bucket does not act as an  obstruction
for the wet bucket  (or  precipitation  sample),  the collector should be
aligned  either  perpendicularly to the prevailing winds or with the  dry
bucket downwind  of  the  wet  bucket.   The  ground  surface  around the

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  10  of 49


collector  and rain gauge should consist of natural vegetation or gravel.

It should not be paved because  a  hard  surface  may cause contamination
from dust settling and water splashing into the collector or gauge.


2.2.1.2  Acceptance Tests-

     Precipitation  collector  acceptance   tests  should  be carried out

before  the  collector is used in the field.  These  tests  include:  (1)

sensor heating and  actuating  the  lid  when  the sensor is shorted with

water  drops,  (2) sensor cooling and return of the lid to  the  wet-side

bucket upon removal of the  shorting  material  (water may be wiped dry),

(3)  sensor temperature attainment (50°-60°C) when the lid is off the wet

bucket, (4) sensor temperature  (1°-2°C)  when  ambient temperature falls
below  freezing  and  (5)  lid  cycling  and  sealing  observation.   The

procedures to be used for these acceptance tests are outlined below:


     a) With  the  collector  lid in its normal  position  over  the  wet
        bucket, add several drops of water to the sensor.  The lid should
        move  off the wet bucket within seconds, and should cover the dry
        bucket.  After the  water  evaporates,  the  lid should return  to
        cover the wet bucket.  If there is no response, check to see that
        the sensor is connected to  the  motor  box and that the power  is
        on.   If  neither  is  the problem, the sensor or  motor  box   is
        probably faulty and should be  replaced.   To remove the box, see
        the manufacturer's instructions.

     b) Affix   a   temperature  probe   (thermistor,   thermometer,    or
        thermocouple) to  the  sensor  plate  near  the screw head in the
        plate.   Make sure good contact occurs, and cover the probe  with
        an insulating material.  Short the grid and plate together with a
        paper  clip or coin.  The temperature should start to climb in  a
        few  minutes,  and  should  level  off  at  50°  to 60°C.  If the
        temperature  setting is incorrect, it can be adjusted by  turning
        the potentiometer screw inside  the  sensor  box.  Directions are
        given in the manufacturer's  instructions,  reprinted in Appendix
        A.

     c) Remove the shorting object.   The  lid  should close within a few
        seconds and  the  temperature should fall to ambient.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  11  of 49
     d) During  steps b and c, check  that the lid does not  cycle.   Also
        check the lid seals.

     e) If the lid does not  seal   the  wet  bucket,  check to see if the
        plastic  foam  gasket  is secured in the  correct  position.   To
        remove the seal, see the  manufacturer's instructions and Section
        2.3.1,  step  5.   If  this   is  not  the  problem,  contact  the
        manufacturer.

     f) If the lid cycles  while  the sensor  is  shorted,  the cause is
        probably  a bad magnetic switch in the motor box or the  lid  arm
        that actuates the switch.  The arm may be loose or may have moved
        too  far  out (more than 1 mm (1/32 in.)) from the switch  as  it
        passed the switch  during  lid  movement.   If  the latter is the
        case,  the lid arm can be adjusted and secured by tightening  the
        1/4 x 20 head screw in the bronze collar that secures the arm and
        the clutch to the motor shaft.

     g) Check  the sensor heating circuit at freezing temperatures.   The
        Aerochem Metrics collector  has  a  standard  heater/ammeter test
        plug  which connects the sensor and the table cannon plugs.  When
        the heater goes on, 0.6 to  0.7  A  of  current flows through the
        heater.   The  sensor  can  be cooled  at  warm  temperatures  by
        unscrewing the  sensor  probe from  the  collector  table and by
        placing it in a refrigerator  freezer compartment.  A  temperature
        probe on the sensor will  give  its  temperature.  Current should
        flow  when  the temperature falls to 0° to 2°C.  The  temperature
        setting of this circuit cannot be  altered except by changing the
        resistor in the circuit.
     If any of the above tests indicate a malfunction, either the problem

oust  be  remedied  or the apparatus returned to  the  manufacturer.   In

general, the problem  can  be  rectified  by  the  operator replacing  the

sensor or the motor box.  Do not replace any switches.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  12  of 49
2.2.2  Rain Gauge
2.2.2.1  Installation—
     The  rain  gauge should be mounted on a firmly anchored  support  or
base so that its funnel rim is level and  at about the same height as the
collector  rim  to enable comparisons of collection amounts  between  the
tvo.  The Belfort gauge  can  be  mounted  with  three  bolts  to a level
platform of 30.5 x 30.5 x 0.48 cm (12 x 12 x 3/16 in.) hot-rolled  steel,
velded to a 5.1 cm (2 in.)  diameter  1.0  m (3.5 ft.) pipe.  The pipe is
sunk  in  cement for stability, and it should extend above  ground  about
0.53  m  (21  in.)  to  bring  the  gauge  to  the  same  height  as  the
precipitation collector. Alternatively, the gauge can be mounted (bolted)
to cinder blocks.   Boles  can  be  drilled  in  the  cinder block with a
masonry  bit.  The level of the gauge can be adjusted by the addition  of
washers to the bolts.  The gauge  level can be checked with a carpenter's
level  placed  at two intersecting positions.  The gauge mouth should  be
high enough so that it will not be covered by snow.
     In open, windy areas, a wind  shield  (e.g.,  swingleaf wind shields
such  as the Alter used by the U.S.  Weather Service) should be used with
the rain gauge.
     For rain gauges which contain a clock (recorder), the access door to
the  chart drive should be on the leeward side of the gauge and should be
kept closed to minimize dirt  and  moisture  affecting  the chart and the
clock  mechanism.   Never oil any part of the gauge except for the  chart
drive, and oil this only when necessary with a light machine oil.

2.2.2.2  Acceptance Tests-
     Rain gauge acceptance tests should  include checks on the following:
1)  sensitivity  and  accuracy, 2) clock function, 3)  pen  and  recorder
function, and 4) event pen function.  The procedures to be used for these
acceptance  tests are outlined below.

-------
                                                  Section No. 2
                                                  Revision No. 2
                                                  Date July 31, 1986
                                                  Page  13  of 49
a) With the  weighing  rain  gauge   level  and  zeroed,  add  water
   equivalent  to several inches.  For the Belfort rain gauge  5-780
   series, 1 in. - 824 g.

b) If the rain gauge does not read correctly, adjust it according to
   the manufacturer's instructions (Appendix B, Instruction Book for
   Universal Recording Rain Gauge).

c) With  the  pens  inked  and a chart in place, turn  the  drum  to
   produce a zero-level  trace; add water equivalent to 0.51 mm (0.02
   in.), and measure the response.  (For the Belfort recording  rain
   gauge 5-780 series, 0.51 mm «  16.4 g (0.02 in.).  If there is no
   response  or  if  the response is more than 1.0  mm  (0.04  in.),
   contact  the  manufacturer.   Check  the  turnover  point on dual
   traverse gauges.  For tipping bucket gauges, add water in 0.25 mm
   (0.01 in.) increments, and note when the bucket empties.

d) Wind the chart drive  (or clock) until  it is fully wound, and set
   it  for the correct time.  Let the clock run for at least  24  h,
   and check the pen traces and the  clock time.  The time should be
   correct  to within 0.5 h/24 h of running.  If the clock does  not
   meet this specification,  it  should  be  replaced.  If any other
   problems are evident but are not addressed in the  manufacturer's
   instructions, call the manufacturer.

e) Note that the event and weight trace pens are offset about 4 h so
   that  they cannot interfere with each other.  Set the weight  pen
   for the correct time.  Make sure that the pens (weight and event)
   are writing.  If contact between the pen tips and the chart paper
   is made  but  writing  does  not  occur,  draw  some  ink  with a
   toothpick  down  the pen tip to form a. small pool at the  contact
   point.

f) Connect the wires to the proper  terminals  on  the collector and
   the rain gauge.  Short the collector rain sensor, and observe  if
   the event pen moves up about  3  mm  (1/8 in.) from its baseline.
   Remove  the  short, and note if the event pen falls back  to  its
   baseline position.  If problems  with the event pen occur, notify
   the manufacturer.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  14  of 49

2.3  EQUIPMENT CHECKS, MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

     This  section  contains  the checks or maintenance  that  should  be
conducted on a routine  basis  on  the  precipitation  collector and rain
gauge.    In  addition,  equipment  problems  that  commonly  occur   are
discussed, and  troubleshooting  remedies  are presented.   Records of all
equipment  checks  and  maintenance should be clearly documented  in  the
station logbook.  If malfunctions occur,  attempt to diagnose and correct
the problem as soon as possible.  If the problem cannot be corrected, ask
the field manager  and/or  the  equipment  manufacturer  for  advice  and
direction.   Record  the  diagnosis and corrective action  taken  in  the
logbook.

2.3.1  Precipitation Collector

     The precipitation collector  does  not  require  calibration, but to
ensure  proper  functioning  of the collector the  following  checks  and
Maintenance should  be  conducted.   The  tasks  are divided into routine
checks, special calibration/maintenance and winter maintenance.

2.3.1.1  Routine Checks—
     These  checks  should be performed at daily or weekly  intervals  in
accordance with network procedures.

1. Collector Sensor Test - Short the sensor with a piece of metal or some
   water to check the lid opening and the sensor heating functions.  When
   the  sensor  short  is  removed, the lid  should  close  within a  few
   seconds, and the sensor should  ce*>l.   If  an event pen is used, mark
   its traces on the rain gauge chart for these tests.  Clean  the  sensor
   at monthly intervals or as needed.
2. Inspection of Dry Collector Bucket - If the collector has a dry bucket
   (as the wet/dry collector has),  check  the bucket after an event or a
   time  period in which an event depositing more than 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  15  of 49


   of precipitation has occurred.   Ascertain  if the dry bucket contains
   or  did contain any precipitation.  Precipitation in the dry bucket is
   possible evidence of a collector malfunction.   Possible causes of such
   a malfunction are (1) a dirty or faulty sensor, (2) a too high  sensor
   heating temperature and/or a low  precipitation  rate, (3) a defective
   magnetic  mercury switch in the motor box, or (4) the lid arm too  far
   out from the magnetic switch to actuate it.  All of the above reasons,
   except for the dirty or faulty sensor, can cause lid cycling.

3. Test  of Wet-Side Bucket or Plastic Liner - At weekly intervals, if no
   event has occurred, test the wet-side bucket for cleanliness.  Add 250
   mL  of  deionized  or distilled water, swirl the bucket  so.  that  its
   interior is washed,  and  measure  the  specific  conductance  of  the
   solution.  If the conductance is over 3 pS/cm, rinse the bucket  until
   the rinse water  conductance  is  less  than  3 yS/cm.  Conductivities
   greater  than 3 uS/cm indicate that the bucket is contaminated due  to
   poor  initial  cleaning,  dry  deposition  and/or  handling.   If high
   conductivities  are frequent at a site, poor collector sealing  and/or
   an  operator  handling  problem  are   probably  present  and  must be
   corrected.

4. Examination  of  the  Event Pen Marker Trace -  At  weekly  intervals,
   inspect the event marker trace to  see  Ti  the lid cycled.  The event
   trace openings and closings should correspond to the beginning and end
   of the event as indicated by the  slopes  of  the sample weight trace.
   Numerous  up  and down markings in short time intervals  indicate  lid
   cycling.  Some cycling traces  may  occur  when  no event is apparent;
   this  can  occur  during short, light rain events.  Cycling  during  a
   heavy rainfall is symptomatic of a collector problem.  No lid movement
   traces  when  the  sample weight trace shows that  an  event  occurred
   indicates either a collector or sensor malfunction.
2.3.1.2  Special Calibration/Maintenance—

     These  special  maintenance  and  troubleshooting  tasks  should  be

undertaken as needed.  Any  other  maintenance  advised  by the equipment

manufacturer should be carried out at the recommended time periods.


1.  Minimizing  Lid  Lifting  by  Strong Winds - Where  strong  winds  are
   common, check the lid to be sureitdoes not wobble or is not lifted
   off the bucket by the wind.  If either is a common occurrence, replace
   the springs on the collector with  stronger ones, and readjust the lid
   arm and the counterweight balance.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  16  of 49


2. Lid  Cycling  -  As  a common occurrence,  lid cycling can  be  due  to
   several causes.  First, cycling during  low rainfall can take place if
   the hot sensor plate dries the sensor rapidly.  If this is a  frequent
   occurrence, lower the temperature  by  turning the potentiometer screw
   (see  manufacturer's instructions).  Second,  the lid arm can be  loose
   or too far out from the magnetic switch  in the motor box.  Third, the
   svitch may be defective.  (For the last two,  see Section 2.1.2.2, step
   6).

3. Lid Malfunctioning - Another common source of collector problems is  a
   faulty  sensor.   The  lid  may   remain   open,   not  open  or  open
   intermittently.  The lid staying open indicates a shorted rain sensor.
   A short can be verified by  unscrewing  the sensor cannon connector at
   the BO tor box.  The lid should then close  over the wet bucket; if  the
   lid does close, check if dirt is  shorting  the sensor plate and grid.
   If  so, clean with a toothbrush or by passing a card between the  grid
   and plate.  For the other problems,  the simplest remedy is to replace
   the sensor.

4. Replacement of Collector Lid Seal - Replace the plastic foam underseal
   on  the lid annually or as soon as needed.  It will  deteriorate  with
   ti»e, especially in  hot,  dry  climates.    The  collector lid seal is
   removed using the following procedure:

   a) With  the collector power disconnected, place the collector lid  in
      the middle position.

   b) Remove the two (2) screws on the edge of the lid.

   c) Remove the two (2) L-brackets into which the screws were threaded.

   d) Remove the lid pad by prying it  gently  along its edge with a coin
      or a screwdriver.

5. Cleaning  Techniques  and Schedule - Wash  the  collector  rain  sensor
   monthly with deionized water toremove  dirt, salt, and film buildup.
   If a film persists, clean the sensor grid  and plate with detergent and
   a toothbrush. Wipe the rim of the dry bucket  weekly with clean tissues
   (e.g.,  Kimwipes)  to prevent carryover  of dustfall  to  the  sealing
   gasket and then to the vet bucket.

6. Site Maintenance and Inspection  for  Obstacles - Periodically mow the
   grass  and  inspect the site area for new  obstacles  (e.g.,  a  growing
   bush or tree)  that  may  become  an  obstacle  even  though  not  one
   initially.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  17  of 49
2.3.1.3  Winter Maintenance-
     Check the sensor temperature if the ambient temperature falls  below

freezing to ensure  that  the  heater  is  working.    This may be done by

adding  snow to the sensor and observing if the snow melts (the lid  will

open).  If  necessary,  the  following  may  be  conducted to prevent the

freezing of equipment:


1. Prevention  of  Lid Freezing—To prevent the lid  from freezing to  the
   bucket, the following is recommended (4):

   a) Attach a peaked roof (available  from  Aerochem Metrics) to the lid
      to prevent buildup of snow on the lid and to help insulate the lid.

   b) Cut a small notch in one corner of the roof to insert a power cord.

   c) Attach  the  power  cord  inside  the roof  to  an  air  thermostat
      (Honeywell or WRAP-ON) set for  about  2°C (36°F); tape the cord to
      the roof arms.

   d) Use  a 60-tf or 75-W light bulb as a heater; set the bulb on a piece
      of 9 mm (3/8 in.) Styrofoam on the lid top to  prevent a hot spot.

   e) Install a piece of 18 mm (3/4 in.) Styrofoam under the slope of the
      roof to minimize heat loss.

   f) To  compensate for the additional weight on the lid, add two  large
      U-bolts to the counterweight shaft (approximately 200 gms).


2. Prevention of Lid Arms Freezing to  Table—To  prevent freezing of the
   lid arms to the table, insulate one from the other.

   a) Wrap and tape a plastic sheet around-each lid  arm to make a boot.

   b) Tape one end of the boot to the table and the  other end to the arm.

   c) Check  to see that the boot is secure and does not tear loose  when
      the lid arms move between the closed and the open bucket positions.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  18  of 49
2.3.2  Weighing Bucket Rain Gauge
     The weighing bucket rain gauge  must be calibrated upon installation

and   at  least  at  annual  intervals  thereafter.    To  ensure   proper

functioning of the gauge, the following  routine checks, calibrations and

Maintenance  should be conducted.  Any other maintenance  recommended  by

the manufacturer should be carried out.
2.3.2.1  Routine Checks—

     These  checks  should  be  performed  at  daily,   weekly  or monthly
intervals as appropriate.


1. Adjusting  the  Zero Setting - At daily or weekly  intervals  with  no
   precipitation in the rain gauge,  adjust the zero setting if necessary
   with  the  (red) fine adjust screw.  The zero setting  will  fluctuate
   with temperature, but generally not  more than +0.75 mm (0.03 in.).

2. Checking the Pail Level - When the rain gauge pail is removed, be sure
   it is replaced correctly so that it is level.

3. Adjusting and Winding the Clock - Weekly, for an eight day clock, wind
   the clock (or chart drum) on the weighing gauge, and correct the  time
   setting if necessary.  Be sure to  correct for backlash and to set the
   time  correctly  with  respect to a.m.  and p.m.  Note the  event  pen
   times are offset from the weighing pen  by about 4 h; set the weighing
   pen to the correct time.

4. Inspection  of Pens and Ink - Weekly, inspect the pens to see if  they
   have ink and are writing.  If  they  are  not writing, clean the pens,
   refill  them,  and be sure they are working.  To help start  the  pens
   writing, use a flat toothpick to  make  the ink from the pen reservoir
   form  a  small  pool at the point of contact between the pen  and  the
   chart.

5. Chart Replacement - At  the  prescribed  interval,   generally  weekly,
   remove the old chart and replace i": with a new one.   Close the  access
   door to the chart.

6. Level Check -  At  bimonthly  intervals,  measure  the  gauge level to
   ensure that it is still horizontal.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  19  of 49
2.3.2.2  Calibrations-
     Two types of calibrations are recommended.  A single point check  to

be performed monthly and  a  multi-point  calibration  to be conducted at

least annually.

1. Rain  Gauge  Check - Once a month, add several known  weights  of  tap
   water to the rain gauge to  see   that  it is measuring correctly.  For
   the Belfort weighing gauge, 25.4  mm » 1 in. * 824 g.

2. Rain Gauge Calibration - At 12-month intervals (unless test. 1 shows it
   is necessary sooner),  calibrate  and  adjust the weighing bucket rain
   gauge  at  each  25 mm (1 in.) level according to  the  manufacturer's
   instructions.  A set of weights   and  a linearity tool can be obtained
   from  the  manufacturer for the calibration.   Alternatively,  weighed
   quantities of tap water can be used.  For the Belfort gauge, 25.4 mm »
   1 in.  =» 824 g.  With a dual traverse pen recorder such as the Belfort
   (0 to 6 in.  and 6 to 12 in. traverses), the range 127 to 178 mm (5 to
   7  in.) has been found difficult  to calibrate and to keep  calibrated.
   To minimize use of this range  interval,  the rain gauge bucket can be
   emptied after each event or week  of events.  In the winter, antifreeze
   must be added to the weighing  gauge  bucket to help melt the captured
   snow.  Thus a severe or prolonged storm can bring the gauge to the 127
   to 178 mm (5 to 7  in.)  level.   If  it  is  found that a calibration
   problem  exists  in  the  127  to 178 mm (5 to 7  in.)  range,  it  is
   recommended that the bucket  be   emptied  whenever  the 127 mm (5 in.)
   range  is approached and that new antifreeze be added.   If a  tipping
   bucket gauge is used, it can be calibrated by adding a measured volume
   of   water,  using  a  slow  drip  technique,  as  specified  in   the
   manufacturer's instructions.
2.3.2.3  Winter Maintenance—

     In the winter, rain gauge problems can be caused by (1) snow filling

or drifting out of the gauge, (2) freezing of the collected precipitation

vhich can damage the gauge bucket,  and  (3) the cold affecting the clock
and/or ink.

     Therefore, the following actions should be taken:

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  20  of 49
     a) Remove the funnel in the inlet mouth.
     b) Add  approximately  1600 g (2 in.)  of an  ethylene  glycol-methyl
        alcohol (40:60) antifreeze mixture  (Belfort manual,  Section 4.3).
        To retard evaporation,  add 180 mL (6 oz) of a 10V motor oil.   Do
        not adjust the gauge  reading  after  adding the antifreeze.  The
        gauge vill indicate rainfall of approximately 50 mm (2 in.).  The
        ethylene glycol-methanol with precipitation added to yield 150 mm
        (6  in.)  of solution will freeze below -40°C (-40°F).  For  less
        severe conditions, use  approximately  50  mm (2 in.) of ethylene
        glycol  antifreeze  alone.  When enough  precipitation  has  been
        collected to yield 127 mm (5  in.),  the mixture will be liquid at
        -24°C (-12°F). Since the weighing gauge is most difficult to keep
        in calibration in the 127 to 178 mm (5 to 7 in.) range, empty the
        gauge  when  the  127 mm (5 in.) level is reached,  and  add  new
        antifreeze.   The  antifreeze  will  not  only aid in melting the
        snow,  but  will prevent freezing of collected precipitation  and
        resulting damage to the container.

     c) In extremely cold periods, the clock (if not new) may run slowly,
        and/or  the ink may not flow.  Low-temperature ink  is  available
        from the  rain  gauge  manufacturer.   Use  of  a low-temperature
        lubricant may be helpful if the clock runs too slowly.
2.4  SAMPLE COLLECTION AND HANDLING


2.4.1  Avoiding Contamination


     Careful  handling of equipment and samples to prevent  contamination
is  extremely  important.   The   dissolved   substances  have  very  low

concentrations,  so any contamination will result in large errors.   Thus

all articles that contact the samples must be clean.  All the Buckets and

containers  have  been  cleaned  at the  central  laboratory.   Only  the

materials (e.g., sample buckets, electrodes,  cells, and probes) that are

used  and  not  returned to the laboratory must be  rinsed.   All  rinses

should be done with deionized or distilled water.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  21  of 49
2.4.2  Sampling Schedules
     Sampling schedules generally used include  weekly,  daily, event, and
subevent.  Daily and weekly samples should be removed at the same time of
day for each sampling period unless  precipitation  is  occurring at that
time;  then a delay of up  to 12 h for daily sampling and 24 h for  weekly
is permissible.  For event schedules, remove the sample immediately after
the event or at a set time daily.
     For  sequential schedules, treat the samples similarly to the  event
samples.  Since one event may produce several samples, it is important to
identify  each  sample  in the chronological order  of  occurrence.   For
sequential sampling it is  important  that  the time corresponding to each
subevent  specimen be known so that correlations with other data  can  be
nade.
     The  samples  are  identified  and   measured  for  amount,  pH, and
conductivity.  They are then sealed in plastic bottles,  if event or daily
samples* and stored in a   refrigerator  until  shipment (Sections 2.5 and
2.6).

2.4.3  Collection and Handling Procedures

     Precipitation  samples  are collected in wet  buckets,  plastic  bag
bucket liners, or plastic  bottles.   The  methodology  for each is given
below.
     The containers for the wet samples should have been cleaned prior to
shipment to the field and do not require rinsing in the field before use.
Never  substitute a precipitation collector dry bucket for a wet  bucket.
At all times, take care not to contact  the inside wall of a container, a
lid or a cap with any object—especially one's finger which can  leave  a

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  22  of 49


deposit of  salt  and  oil.   The   container   should  be  capped  until

inmediately  before  use,  and must be resealed  immediately  after  use.

Since human breath contains ammonia, do not exhale into a container.


2.4.3.1  Wet Buckets—
     I mediately before use, label  the  new  precipitation collector vet

bucket  (or  for sequential sampling, the capture  bottles).   Veigh  the

bucket after the label is affixed.   The label should contain the station

identification,  the  date placed in use, and the bucket weight  (without

lid).  After the  sampling  period,  the  final  weight  is added.  Use a

pencil  or  ball  point pen to inscribe the labels.  Below  are  standard

operational procedures  to   be   adopted   when  handling  precipitation

collection buckets.


     a) Do  not remove a clean bucket from the plastic bag in which it is
        shipped until it is to be placed in the collector.

     b) Check  the  collector bucket for precipitation at  the  scheduled
        times.  Move the lid from the wet  bucket by contacting a coin or
        metal  object to the sensor grid-plate to activate the motor  and
        move the lid to the dry sample bucket.   The lid will remain open
        until  the metal object bridging the sensor is removed.  NEVER TRY
        TO FORCE THE LID OPEN BY HAND.

     c) Remove the bucket  from the  collector  at the scheduled time, and
        replace it with a  clean, weighed, labeled bucket.

     d) Remove the lid from the new  bucket  after  it has been placed in
        the precipitation  collector, and cover the removed sample  bucket
        with the new lid to minimize the chance of contamination.  Fasten
        lid on old bucket  with masking tape.

     e) If  no sample is present, seal the empty bucket and return it  to
        the laboratory, or,  depending  on  the protocol, rinse it at the
        field  station for  reuse (see Section 2.6.3).

     f) Remove  and replace the rain gauge chart.  Record readings (times
        of start and end of  precipitation)  on data form.  For the final
        amount  of  precipitation reading, use the maximum value  on  the

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  23  of 49


        rain chart at end of event  because  loss of water by evaporation
        will occur on standing.

     g) If  there is no antifreeze in the rain gauge, empty its bucket. If
        there is antifreeze, do not empty the bucket until the reading is
        127  mm  (5.0  + 0.3 in.);  then empty the  bucket  and  add  new
        antifreeze.

     h) Veigh bucket and sample (see Section 2.5.1).


2.4.3.2  Plastic Bag Liners—

     When plastic bags  are  used  for  bucket  liners,  the  buckets are

modified  by  drilling  a vent hole near the bucket rim to allow  air  to
escape (5).  A new bag is inserted in the bucket each week and removed at

the  end of the weekly collection period.  Avoid touching the  inside  of

the bucket  or bag below its top except when wearing polyethylene gloves.


     a) To  insert the  plastic  bag  (5),  use  a  clean  pair of plastic
        disposable gloves.  Open the bag to fill it with air.

     b) About 4 to 5 in. down from the opening, squeeze the bag closed to
        capture the air in the bag.

     c) Push the inflated  bag  into  the  bucket  until  it  touches the
        bottom.

     d) Fold  the  upper 4 or 5 in.  of the bag over the bucket   rim  and
        adjust to minimize creases on the rim.

     e) Secure the bag flap to the  outside  of the bucket just above the
        first  ridge (and above the handle) with a retaining  strap  (see
        Figure 2-2).

     f) The bag can be opened more  fully  inside the bucket by smoothing
        the bag against the inside wall.  Always wear clean gloves  while
        doing this.

     g) Weigh the bucket + bag assembly and record the weight.

     h) Cover bucket  with  its  lid  until  it  is  to  be placed in the
        precipitation collector.

-------
                                                        Section No.  2
                                                        Revision No.  1
                                                        Date July 31,  1986
                                                        Page 24 of 49
                                   Ridgtin
                                   Molded Budwt
                                   Vent Hole
Figure 2-2.  Plastic Bag Liner  Assembly

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  25  of 49


     To  remove the sample (e), carry the covered bucket  containing  the

liner vith or without a sample to the site laboratory.


     a) After the  bucket  containing  the  liner,  retaining  strap, and
        sample is weighed, remove the retaining strap without passing  it
        over the open bucket (to avoid any contamination falling in).

     b) Push up some of the liner flap  outside  the bucket to enable the'
        top of the liner to be grasped.

     c) Lift the bag up out of the bucket several inches.

     d) Holding the bag with one hand, squeeze the bag shut about one in.
        below the bucket riot and  close  the  bag  with  a cable tie.  If
        sample is frozen, allow it to  melt completely before closing the
        bag with the cable tie.

     e) Remove  the bag from the bucket, swirl to mix contents, and  wash
        one of its bottom corners with deionized water.

     f) Elevate the cleaned,  dried  corner  so that it is not in contact
        with solution and cut off about 1/2 in. using cleaned scissors.

     g) Lower  the cut corner, carefully pouring an aliquot of the sample
        into a clean,  500-mL,  wide  mouth  plastic  bottle.   Label the
        bottle  with  an  indelible marking pen.  Discard  any  collected
        sample remaining in the bag.


2.4.3.3  Bottles—

     For event or daily sampling, the number of buckets required, as well
as  storage and shipment space, are minimized by transferring the  sample

from the bucket  after  it  is  weighed  (Section  2.5.1.2)  to  a 500-mL
labeled,  wide-mouth polyethylene bottle.  If frozen, the sample must  be

completely melted and mixed before transferring.  If sufficient sample is
present (e.g., more than 300 mL), use 50 mL to rinse the shipping bottle.

One 500-mL bottle per event is a sufficient sample  for all measurements;
the rest of the sample may be discarded.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  26  of 49

     For  sequential  samples,  which  are  collected  through  a  funnel
directly  into  prenunbered, prelabeled polyethylene  bottles,  seal  the
bottles immediately after the samples are collected.
     Wash the sample bucket or, for  sequential precipitation collectors,
the  funnel  and tubing with deionized water until the rinse water has  a
specific conductance below 2 uS/cm (step 3,  Section 2.3.1).
     The samples are now ready  for  field  measurement;   check  that the
containers are correctly labeled.

2.5  FIELD MEASUREMENTS

     The field measurement procedures for weighing, conductivity, pH, and
reaper a ture  should be identical to those used by the central laboratory.
Each bucket is weighed both  before  and  after  sampling.  If sufficient
sample  (more  than  70 g)  is available, its  pH  and  conductivity  are
aeasured both in  the  field  laboratory  and  at the central laboratory.
These measurements are used as a check to detect sample changes.  If less
than 70 g of sample  are  collected,  the  sample  is sent to the central
laboratory without measuring conductivity and pH.

2.5.1  Weighing Sample Containers

2.5.1.1  Balance Specifications—
     The  balance  should have a capacity of 20 kg and a precision of  at
Isast +10 g.  The mass of  precipitation  collected  by the precipitation
collector is measured to determine the rain collector efficiency compared
:o the rain gauge.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  27  of 49
2.5.1.2  Procedure—
     a) Before  each  weighing,  brush off the balance  pan  with a  soft
        brush.

     b) With the  balance  level,  adjust  to  zero  (see  manufacturer's
        instructions).

     c) Before sampling, place a new bucket,  or a bucket containing a new
        plastic bag liner, without its  lid  (and/or bottle with its lid)
        on  the balance, and weigh to the nearest gram.  Do not allow the
        bucket lid's inner surface  to  contact  any  object.  Record the
        weight  on  the  data form and on the  container  label  (Section
        2.7.3).

     d) Before weighing the bucket  containing  a sample, tap the covered
        bucket  to knock any water drops off the inside lid surface  into
        the bucket, wipe off the  outside  of the bucket, remove the tape
        and the lid from the bucket, and place lid with its outer surface
        on the table.

     e) After the balance has been  zeroed,  place the bucket without its
        lid  on  the balance pan, cover the open bucket  with Saran Wrap,
        and weigh to the nearest gram.

     f) Record the weight on the bucket label and on the field data form.

     g) Subtract the initial weight of the empty container from the final
        weight of container  plus  sample  to  obtain  the sample weight.
        Record on field data form.

     h) Avoid breathing onto the sample to prevent ammonia contamination.

     i) If sample is more than 70 g, remove  an aliquot of about 20 g for
        conductance and pfl measurements.  For this, a disposable  syringe
        can be used.  If sample is frozen, allow it to melt completely  in
        its   closed  container,  and  swirl  the  container  to   assure
        homogeneity before  removing  the  aliquot.   Reweigh sample plus
        container to obtain aliquot weight by difference.

     j) Seal  container  with lid; obtain and record total weight  to   be
        shipped to the central  laboratory.   If sample is shipped in its
        bucket, secure the lid with a rubber mallet.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  28  of  49
2.5.2  Specific Conductance Measurement
2.5.2.1  Apparatus Requirements—
     The conductivity meter should permit selection of several  different
Measurement ranges  between  0  to  10  and  0  to 1000 pS/cm, and have a
precision of +0.5Z of range and an accuracy of at least +1.0% full scale.
The range  most  frequently  used  is  0  to  100  pS/cm.   A temperature-
compensated cell with a cell constant of 1.0/cm is preferred.
     For  calibration, use a KCl solution of known  specific  conductance
and be sure the temperature of  the  KCl  standard and the sample are the
same.   For  rain samples, a 0.0005M KCl solution  which  has a  specific
conductance of 74 uS/cm at 25°C is appropriate.
     The  specific conductance of the sample can be measured on the  same
aliquot as used for pH.   If  this  is  to  be done, measure the specific
conductance  before  measuring the pH to avoid any possible error due  to
electrolyte contamination from the pH electrode.

2.5.2.2  Procedure—
     Measure  the  specific conductance for all samples over 70 g,  using
the procedure in Method 120.1 (Specific conductance) (6).

1. Summary of Method
   a) Measure  the   specific   conductance   of   a   sample  by using a
      self-contained   conductivity  meter,  Vheatstone  bridge-type   or
      equivalent.
   b) Analyze samples preferably at  25°C.   If not and if the meter does
      not  have  automatic temperature compensation, measure  at  20°  to
      28°C, and correct to 25°C.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  29  of 49
2. Sample Handling and Preservation
   a) Perform analyses in  the  field   laboratory   and/or  the  central
      laboratory.

   b) If  analysis  is not completed within 24 h  of  sample  collection,
      store sample at 4°C for preservation.  Vash the apparatus vith high
      quality  distilled/deiqnized water,  and prerinse with sample before
      use.

   c) Remove sample aliquot for  measurement,  and  seal the bulk sample.
      Allow  sample  aliquot  to  come  to  ambient  temperature   before
      proceeding with conductance measurement.


3. Specific Conductance Meter Standardization

   a) Follow  the  manufacturer's instructions for the operation  of  the
      instrument.

   b) Allow sample aliquot to come  to  room  temperature  (23°-27°C),  if
      possible.

   c) Use 74 pS/cm standard.  For  dip  tube  cell,  rinse and shake test
      tube or vial three times with deionized or distilled water.

   d) Add  1.3  cm (0.5 in.) of 74 yS/cm solution to test tube; swirl  to
      coat walls;  drain.  Add  20  mL  of  solution  or  enough  to cover
      electrodes;   insert  rinsed conductivity cell.  Remove  and  shake;
      repeat two times.

   e) Insert cell; set meter to  conductivity,  and  control knob to read
      74.   Readjust  after  1  min.  Move cell up  and  down  to  remove
      bubbles, readjust to 74 if required.

   f) Discard solution; shake cell and tube dry.  Put a second aliquot  of
      74  pS/cm solution in same tube; check reading.  Readjust meter  if
      necessary.  Discard solution.

   g) For closed bottom type cell, use  above  instructions  omitting the
      test   tube,  and  add  sufficient  water  or  solution  to   cover
      electrodes.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  30  of  49
   h) Determine  the  temperature  of  the  sample  to  +0.5°C.    If  the
      temperature  of  the sample is not 25°C,  make  the" correction  (as
      shown belov) to convert reading to 25°C.   After measurement,  either
      discard  the solution or save it for pH measurement;  never pour the
      solution back into its container.   Record the data in logbook.

   The  following  temperature corrections are based on the standard  KCl
   solution, and are used with instruments  with no automatic temperature
   compensation.  -

   (1) If the temperature of  the  sample  is  below  25°C, add  2% of the
       reading per degree.

   (2) If  the temperature is above 25°C, subtract 2% of the reading  per
       degree.

   Report results as conductivity (yS/cm) at 25°C on the data form.
4. Conductance Test

   a) For dip tube cell, rinse  and  shake  a  new test tube or vial five
      times   with  deionized  or  distilled  water.    Rinse  and   shake
      conductivity cell three times.

   b) Pour deionized or distilled water into test tube or vial.  Dip  and
      shake cell three times  before  reading.   Let  solution stand until
      quiescent.  If the conductance exceeds that of  the deionized water,
      repeat rinses until it is equal to that of the  water.  Record latter
      of  two  readings  on  the  field data  form  for  conductivity  of
      distilled water.

   c) Drain and shake tube; shake cell dry.

   d) Rinse test tube or vial  with  sample.   Pour  sample  into tube to
      cover  electrodes.   Reseal bulk sample container.  Dip  and  shake
      cell three times, then, after  solution  has  come to rest, measure
      conductance and record.

   e) For  closed  bottom  type  cell, use  similar  procedure,  and  add
      sufficient deionized water or sample  to cover electrodes.

   f) Save this sample for pH test.

   g) Rinse cell with deionized water; drain, shake,  blot and store.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  31  of 49

2.5.2.3  Conductivity Measurement Problems and Tests—
     The conductivity cell generally has few problems; store the cells as
recommended  by  the manufacturer.  The working conductivity standard  is
0.0005H KC1, which will  slowly  degrade  and  is easily contaminated. To
•inimize  errors due to changes in the calibration standard, replace  the
74 uS/ca working solution at approximately quarterly intervals.
     tfhen a nev working standard  is  received,  correlate it against the
old  working  standard.   Report the measured value of  the  old  working
standard to the central laboratory,  and  always return enough of  the old
standard  to the central laboratory so that it can be remeasured.   Never
return the old  working  standard  before  checking  it  against   the new
solution.
     Store  the  conductance  standards  in a  refrigerator  to  minimize
changes but always bring them to room temperature before use.  Changes of
less than 32 «ay be ignored.  If the change is more than 3%, order a  new
standard from the central laboratory.
     If the conductance meter has  an  internal  standardization circuit,
use  it  to  check  the  KCl standard  by  following  the  manufacturer's
instructions.  If the KC1 standard has changed from its original value by
•ore  than  52,  inform the central laboratory  immediately.   Since  the
internal meter calibration is not a  traceable  standard,  it must not be
substituted for the KCl solution.
     Another  means of evaluating the working conductance standard is  to
compare it against  the  Q.A.   samples  received  periodically  from the
central  laboratory.   Return the test samples to the central  laboratory
vith the next sample shipment for remeasurement.  If the laboratory finds
that the field conductance differs from the laboratory value by more than
102, the central laboratory will  replace  the  old conductance standard.
Store the cells as recommended by the manufacturer.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  32  of 49
2.5.3  pH Measurement
2.5.3.1  Apparatus and Equipment (7)—
     LABORATORY  pH  METER  — The meter may have  either  an  analog  or
digital display with a  readability  of  0.01  pH unit.   A meter that has
separate   calibration   and  slope  adjustment  features  (8)   and   is
electrically shielded  to  avoid  interferences  from  stray  currents or
static  charge  is necessary.  It may be powered by battery or  110 V  AC
line; if battery povered, the meter must have a battery check feature.  A
temperature  compensator  control  to  allow  accurate  measurements   at
temperatures other than 258C is desirable.
     SENSING ELECTRODE —  Select  a  sensing  electrode  constructed  of
general-purpose glass.  This electrode generates lower resistance,  faster
response, and has a reliable range of 0-14 pH units.  Refer to the manual
accompanying   the  probe  for  the  manufacturer's  recommendations   on
electrode storage.
     REFERENCE ELECTRODE — The  reference  electrode recommended for wet
deposition analysis is one equipped with a ceramic junction.  The ceramic
construction  minimizes   differences   in  potential  between high ionic
strength buffers and low ionic strength samples thus reducing errors from
residual junction potentials.  A  reference probe equipped with a ceramic
junction  in  an  annular  ring  configuration  generates a  more  stable
potential in less time due to a  higher flow of internal electrolyte into
the  solution.  Single pore ceramic frit junctions also provide  adequate
electrolyte flow.
     COMBINATION ELECTRODE  —  The  combination  electrode  combines the
indicating  and reference elements in a single unit.  Since sample volume
requirements are a consideration  when  analyzing wet deposition samples,
combination  electrodes  are  more  convenient than  separate  glass  and
reference electrodes.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31,  1986
                                                       Page  33  of 49


                                                                -4
     Before  use, the electrode should be equilibrated in 1 x 10    mol/L

hydrochloric acid (7) and  stored  in  the  same solution.   Refer also to

Appendix C.
     THERMOMETER  — The thermometer should be readable to 0.5°C  in  the

ambient range.
     Stations  may  receive the required calibration buffer  and  storage

solutions from the  central  laboratory,  according  to network protocol.

The  stations  should notify the laboratory when the buffers need  to  be

replaced.


2.5.3.2  Procedure—

     The  pH  is  measured for all samples weighing over  70 g.   If  the

measurement is made on  the same  aliquot  as  that used for conductivity,

the  pH  must  be  measured after the  conductivity  (6).   An  alternate

procedure using dilute  buffers is presented in Appendix C.


1. Scope and  Application—This  method  is  applicable  to precipitation
   samples'.

2. Summary of Method—The pfl of a sample is determined  electrometrically
   by using a glass electrode with a reference electrode.

3. Sample Handling and  Preservation—

   a) Perform the analyses on site immediately after sample collection.

   b) After removal of  a sample  aliquot, seal the bulk sample container;
      if the container  is a bucket use a rubber mallet to secure the lid.

4. Reagents—Standard buffer solutions  may be available from  the central
   laboratory, according to network protocol.  Store buffer solutions  at
   room temperature.

5. pH  Measurement—Always, determine the conductance first.  Rinse  water
   should be the best grade of deionized or distilled water available.  A
   combination electrode is recommended.  Rinse the pH electrode prior to
   each measurement.  Report the  pH  to  the  nearest  0.01 unit and the
   temperature to the nearest 1.0°C on the data form.

-------
                                                    Section No.  2
                                                    Revision No. 2
                                                    Date July 31, 1986
                                                    Page  34  of 49
CALIBRATION FUNCTION:
a) Adjust  the  temperature control on the meter to room  temperature.
   Rinse the  electrode(s)  with  three  changes  of  water  or with a
   flowing  stream from a wash bottle.  Dispense two aliquots  of  the
   buffer with the higher pH into separate,  clean sample cups.  Insert
   the electrode(s) into one aliquot for 30 seconds.

b) Remove the electrode(s) from the  first aliquot and insert directly
   into  the  second.   Allow either two minutes for  equilibration or
   allow sufficient time for the reading to remain steady within ±0.01
   pH unit for 30 seconds.

c) Adjust the calibration control until the reading corresponds to the
   temperature corrected value of the reference buffer solution.
SLOPE FUNCTION:

a) Rinse   the  electrode(s)  with  three changes of water  or  with  a
   flowing stream  from a wash  bottle.   Dispense  two aliquots of the
   second  reference  buffer solution into separate,  clean sample  cups.
   Insert  the electrode(s) into one aliquot for 30  seconds.

b) Remove  the electrode(s) from the  first aliquot  and insert directly
   into  the second.   Allow the system to equilibrate.

c) Adjust  the  slope function until the reading corresponds  to  the
   temperature corrected value of the reference buffer solution.


CALIBRATION CHECK:

a) Remove  the electrode(s), rinse thoroughly, and place into the first
   reference  buffer solution.  If the pH does not read within  ±0.01
   unit  of the  temperature  corrected  value,  repeat the calibration
   procedure until the buffers agree.
SAMPLE  MEASUREMENT:

a) Again,   remove   the  electrodes  from the  buffer  and  rinse  them
    thoroughly,  using multiple rinsings (wash bottles are recommended).
   Use   30 mL of water and  be sure  to rinse the tip.  Gently blot  the

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date  July 31, 1986
                                                       Page   35  of 49


      electrode tip dry.  Determine the pH of the pH CHECK SAMPLE.   Allow
      the  electrode to equilibrate without stirring for  2-4 minutes,  or
      allow sufficient time for the reading to remain steady within +0.01
      pH  unit for 30 seconds, and read and record the pH to the  nearest
      0.01 pH unit.

   b)  Repeat above step only using the same 20 mL aliquot used to measure
      conductivity.   Record  the pH of the PRECIPITATION SAMPLE  to  the
      nearest 0.01 pH unit.

   c)  Discard the 20 «L aliquot used for conductivity and pH measurements
      (do not return the aliquot to the bucket) and rinse the  electrodes
      one last time.  Store the pH electrode in the KC1-HC1  solution (see
      Section 2.5.3.1).  Change the storage solution weekly.


2.5.3.3  Electrode Problems and Tests—

     Two  diagnostic tests which indicate the aging of the electrode  are

presented here.

     The first test  uses  periodic  test  samples  sent  out to the field

stations  by  the  central laboratory.  The samples should  have  pH  and

specific conductance  values  typical  of  precipitation. They should be

unknown to the site operator, and are measured for both variables.  These
are measures of the station's accuracy if the laboratory  value is assumed

to be correct and if no solution change occurs in shipment.

     The   test  solution  is  poured  into  five  test  tubes  and   the

conductivity and then pH of each  tube  are measured as if they were five
different  samples.  That is, the conductivity cell and pH electrode  are
rinsed before  and  after  each  tube  is  measured.   The  readings  are

:abulated and the average value and standard deviation calculated.   From

:hese results and from  the   time  required  to  attain  stable readings,

electrode  performance  and  precision can be  evaluated.   The  standard
deviation(s) is calculated from the relation:
          s =
5
E (x. - x)2/n
                                1/2
2-2

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  36  of 49

where x. and x are the measured and the average pH readings of the series
and where n is the number of sample aliquots measured.
     If  the  average  of five field pH  measurements  differs  from  the
laboratory by more than ±0.15 unit,  or the standard deviation is greater
than  O.05 pH unit, the pH electrode may need replacing.   The samples are
returned to the laboratory vith the  results  for recheck and evaluation.
Consultation  with the station operator on the technique may identify the
source of the problem.
     The second test uses a reference solution,  which has a known pH and
a  conductivity  similar  to  those of rain  samples,  to  check  the  pH
electrode at the station at weekly  intervals.  The measurement procedure
is  identical to that used for the rain sample.  Store the solution in  a
refrigerator, and replace  it  when  needed  or  when  the solution pH or
conductivity appears to have changed.  For the reference solution, the pH
value should agree vith the value  assigned  by the central laboratory to
better than +0.10 unit.
     If  the first measurement differs by more than +0.1 pH unit from the
others for the same solution, this  value  should  be excluded. Thus, for
the  test sample, a sixth sample tube should be measured.  If  this  poor
first reading behavior is  exhibited  by  an electrode, and if sufficient
precipitation  sample  exists,  two tubes of  each  precipitation  sample
should be measured for pH, and the second value entered on the data form.
The  ti«e to attain a stable reading, i.e., when pH is constant to  +0.01
unit for 30 sec., should be no more than 2 minutes for a properly working
electrode.   Results  of  these  tests  serve  as  guides  for  both  the
measurement  technique  and  the   equilibration   time  to  be  used for
precipitation  sample  measurements.  If an electrode consistently  shows
behavior poorer than   that  given  by  the  above  time and pH difference
criteria, the electrode should be  replaced.  If the reference solution pH

-------
                                                       Section  No.  2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date  July 31,  1986
                                                       Page   37  of 49

•easureaent has changed from the previous month's  value by more than  0.10
unit,  check the solution's conductivity.   If the conductivity has changed
by more than  10%  from  its  original  value,   the  solution and not  the
electrode  has  probably degraded and should be replaced.  Always  return
enough of  the  solution  so  that  it  can  be checked  by  the central
laboratory.

2.5.4  Temperature

2.5.4.1  Requirements —
     The  temperature  probe must display at least 0.5°C  increments.    A
thermistor, thermocouple, or thermometer can be used. The probe should be
calibrated by the central laboratory.

2.5.4.2  Procedure—

     a) Before measuring  a  solution, rinse  the   temperature probe with
        deionized water, and shake it dry.
     b) To  minimize  contamination,  do not insert the  probe  into  any
        solution until after the other  measurements,  i.e., conductivity
        and pH, have been made.
     c) Read and record the temperature to the nearest 0.5°C.

2.6  SAMPLE IDENTIFICATION, PRESERVATION, STORAGE, AND SHIPMENT

2.6.1  Background

     Samples must be adequately  identified  so  that they can be readily
and correctly matched up with their data forms. The sample  label  should
contain station identification,  sampling date, and sample weight.  Use a
pencil  or a ball-point pen to mark the label so that it is  still legible
if it gets wet.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  38  of 49

     Sample  degradation  can  be caused  by  chemical  interactions—for
example, with particles or gases, or biochemical reactions.  Preservation
of  sample integrity after removal from the collector can be improved  by
filtration, sealing the sample, and storage in the dark.  Freezing is not
recommended.   Refrigeration is typically used for daily or event samples
but not for weekly samples.  To minimize contamination, sample filtration
is performed in the central laboratory.
     In the case of  duplicate  (collocated)  or  sequential  collectors,
treat  each  sample  container  as a  separate  sample.   For   duplicate
collectors,  distinguish  the  samples  by  adding a -1 and -2 beside the
station  identification space on the data form.  For sequential  samples,
add -11, -12, -13, and so  forth  to  denote  the  chronological order of
collection for each event.
     Sample  shipments  are  made weekly to the  central  laboratory  for
economic  reasons  for  weekly,  daily,  event,  or  sequential  samples.
Generally,  the shipment should be made early in the week (preferably  on
Mondays or Tuesdays) and shipped to  the  central lab by the U.S.  Postal
Service  first  class  mail,  or by other carriers  that  will  guarantee
delivery within three days.  The method  used should be prescribed by the
network  protocol.   All samples must be well-identified, and  should  be
accompanied by the appropriate data forms.
     The central laboratory, upon  receipt  of the shipment, will replace
the  used sample buckets or containers with clean ones by return mail  or
other delivery mode.
             0
2.6.2  Procedure

     Label each sample  with  station  identification,  date  of sampling
period, and sample weight  (Section 2.4.3.1).

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  39  of 49
2.6.2.1  Weekly Cumulative Samples—
     a) Be  sure the sample is sealed, identified,  and accompanied by its
        data form.

     b) Pack the weekly sample collection bucket or plastic bottle (if  a
        liner is used) into a cardboard carton or other protective box.

     c) Seal the carton, and ship it to  the  central laboratory by first
        class mail or other method if prescribed in the program protocol.


2.6.2.2  Daily, Event or Sequential Samples—


     Refrigerate event and sequential samples until they are shipped, and
keep them cold during shipment.  Ship by first class mail or other method

if prescribed in the program protocol.


     a) Be sure the  samples   are   sealed,   properly  identified,  and
        accompanied by their data forms.

     b) Pack the samples in  cardboard-enclosed  Styrofoam boxes with gel
        freeze-packs.   Keep the freeze-packs in the freezer  compartment
        of the refrigerator for about 24 h before shipping to ensure that
        they  are completely frozen.  The gel packs are preferred because
        they are less likely to leak when  thawed.  Generally, four packs
        per  box is sufficient to keep  the samples cold for 4 or 5  days.
        Seal the cartons, and ship to the central laboratory.


2.6.3  Field Blanks


     Field blanks are used to  determine  the contamination of the sample

bucket  or  plastic  bag bucket liner when there has been  no  measurable
precipitation for a week.  The blanks levels are measured from a thorough
rinse  of  the bucket or its plastic liner and yield information  on   the

previous bucket cleaning, operator  handling,  contamination while in  the
collector, and so forth.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  40  of 49

2.6.3.1  Buckets—
     For  weekly samples, when there has been no precipitation, the empty
wet-side bucket is removed from the precipitation collector. Depending on
network protocol, the bucket is either sealed and shipped to the  central
laboratory or treated at the field lab as follows.  At the field lab, 100
mL  of  deionized  water  is poured into the bucket, and  the  bucket  is
swirled and tipped for the water to reach as much of the interior surface
as  possible.   Allow  the water to stand for about 5  minutes  and  then
measure the conductance as in Section  2.9.  Also measure the conductance
of  the deionized water.  Record both values in the site logbook  and  on
the field report form.  Record  under  "Remarks" that the report is for a
field blank.  Mail the field report form to the central laboratory.
     Rinse  out the bucket several more times using sufficient  deionized
water (approximately 100 mL)  to  reach  all  the  surfaces.  Collect the
third rinse and measure the conductance.  Continue the rinses until there
is no difference between the  conductance  of the deionized water and the
rinse  sample.   Cap the empty bucket securely and save for reuse on  the
precipitation collector.

2.6.3.2  Bottles—
     For  daily  or  event  samples which  are  shipped  to  the  central
laboratory in plastic bottles, if no  precipitation has been collected in
a  week,  prepare  a  field blank following the  procedure  described  in
2.6.3.1.  Perform the rinses that are required for buckets and record the
conductances  on the field report form and note under "Remarks" that  the
report is for a  field blank.  If  the  protocol calls for analysis of the
blank, the first rinse  is shipped to  the central laboratory in a labeled,
sealed plastic bottle using a similar procedure as for a sample.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  41  of 49
2.7  DOCUMENTATION
     All  data,  observations,  and  changes  or  modifications  must  be
documented with dates on the proper  data  forms and/or in logbooks.  The
data  forms should be in duplicate (NCR paper) with one copy kept in  the
station records and one shipped with the sample.  The logbook entries are
•ade  out  in duplicate.  One copy of the logbook entry is  kept  at  the
station and the other is mailed with  the data form and the rain chart to
the central laboratory.

2.7.1  Logbook

     Use a bound  logbook  with  perforated  pages  that  can be torn out
easily.   Record  all problems and actions; dates and  times  of  visits;
equipment changes; procedural changes or modifications; standard solution
changes;  electrode  replacement; operator changes, and so forth, in  the
logbook.  Submit one copy to the central laboratory and keep the other at
the station.

2.7.2  Rain Gauge Charts

     Mark  the  rain gauge chart with station identification,  dates  and
notations for tests, and any  problems  encountered, and submit weekly to
the central laboratory.

2.7.3  Field Data Forms

     The  field data form must contain all of the following  information:
station, operator, date, sample  weight,  sampling times, field values of
?H and conductance, and any problems encountered.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  42  of 49


     Start  a new form when a clean bucket is installed in the collector.
(For daily, event or sequential  sampling  use a new form for each sample

collected.)  Complete  the  form  when the sample  is  removed  from  the
collector. An example of a data  form  used by the State-Operated Network
for  weekly sampling is in Figure 2-3.  The items below refer  to  Figure

2-3.

     o  STATION NAME and ID supplied by the project coordinator.

     o  OBSERVER'S  signature and printed initials; person completing the
        form even if substituting for regular observer.

     o  Enter DATE ON and OFF (mo/day/yr)  and the local TIME when sample
        buckets are installed and removed; specify 24-h time.

     o  Check appropriate boxes for the  three SITE OPERATIONS.  Diagnose
        items  1  and 3 from the event pen trace on the rain chart.   Add
        evidence for  item  1,  for  example,  the  lack  or  presence of
        moisture  in  the dry bucket and the reasonableness  between  the
        collector and  rain  gauge  amounts in  the  PRECIPITATION RECORD
        below. Be sure the weight trace is complete for the sampling time
        period.

     o  SAMPLE CONDITION is  a  qualitative  observation of precipitation
        quality.   Note  any comment on obvious causes of  the  condition
        under REMARKS.

     o  Complete the form for SAMPLE WEIGHT  by entering weight of SAMPLE
        BUCKET with BAG (if one is used).  Include total weight of sealed
        bucket, bag,  and  sample,  beneath  SAMPLE  WEIGHT  designation.
        Start  a  new form for newly  installed bucket by entering  BUCKET
        WEIGHT of bucket with a bag.  Obtain  the weight of precipitation
        in exposed bucket by subtracting BUCKET WEIGHT + BAG from  BUCKET
        + BAG -t- SAMPLE WEIGHT, and entering it as SAMPLE WEIGHT.

     o  The PRECIPITATION  RECORD  gives  daily  TYPE  (if known) and the
        AMOUNT  (in.).  Circle proper type (R,S,M, or U) under each  day.
        The M denotes a mixture of rain plus snow/sleet/hail.  Obtain the
        daily  AMOUNT  from  recording rain gauge, and record  it   in  the
        squares.  Trace (T) indicates  precipitation of 0.25mm (0.01 in.)
        or  less.   If rain gauge, chart, or pen malfunctioned and  if  no
        amount  can  be  observed,  circle  MM.   For  cumulative  weekly

-------
                                                            Section No. 2

                                                            Revision No. 1

                                                            Date July 31,  1986

                                                            Page  43  of 49
UJ
cc

o

ULJ
CC
O

s
CC
O
o
O
LU
       o
      03

      •g
       a
      E
      o
      IX

      o
      0
      9

      U)

OBSERVER
—
e
m —
z S
z
o
•t
-
cc
*" , ,
So
UJ Z
S £
>
5
S;
;= i

a
>
55
Q C
C
2
1 Collector appaa'S 10 have operated properly and sampled all precipitation events during entire sampling period


;>
r
-4
\
5

c


J
)

UJ
a ac
00
CD
3 Collector opened and closed at least once during the week



u
T
H

ION COMPLETE FOR ALL SAMPLES CONTAINING PRECIPITATION
SAMPLE CONOIT
1 Bud droppings
O
Z
(/>
Ul
>

*s
• o
0



Ud
1-
C
>-
u<
X
CJ
=3
CO
ac
>
>
0
o
i
u.
o
2 Cloudy or discolored
3 Soot or dm (Describe All Else in Remarks)















1-
la
u.
C O _.
§h-
UJ
| Si
5 s5
z
I/I
» o>
5 i -
X IA
fi -
25 M
2
>. »-
O «
?« *
§5
W (_ ~
WH S?
3
Z


c _ z o
— O m IAJ
£r5 °5

3
?2
2
o J
3
2
(/) e
K
3
2
(r) e
ac
3
2
I/I e
ac
3
2
 e >
a: i
D
2 :
(O • t
OC r
3
2 :
(/) e i-
K r
3 .
2 -
u> e h
OC IV
3 -
2 2
Ul e v
ac rs
Z T MM
Inches (gauge
Inches (wt )
2
2
t- e e
N
5
2
h-
M
i 1
w»
— w
c
u
* S
Gauge
Bight i 0 00058
anon From Rair
ei = Sample W
2 Period Precipif
lion From Samp
Total Samplm
Total Precipita
a
o
UJ
0 s"3 2 ° «
i Jii IH
E £ "5 € s 2 =0
u H-UUIO. < i o
UJ
cc
OL.
6
<%
Ul
? i i
 9-
S. > u
l-2o
/> >•*
c •
0 .
I
•o
u
Measur
T3
w
(O
" 13
C
CO
73
V
0
0
"O
re
^
c
re
co
I!
<<2
>-
Q
O
5
J
_«MM
•



•
•
^•H—

II

•

	
e

)
)
»
>
O
\a
u
at
8
SAMPLE
le Corrected
u
F
re
T3
I/I
ID
;
w> 
-------
                                                  Section No. 2
                                                  Revision No. 2
                                                  Date July 31, 1986
                                                  Page  44  of 49


   samples,  add  all  daily rain gauge amounts,   and  record  TOTAL
   SAMPLING  PERIOD  PRECIPITATION  (in.).    Do  not merely subtract
   initial  reading for week from final reading because errors occur
   due to evaporation.  Convert TOTAL COLLECTOR PRECIPITATION amount
   collected  from grams to inches by multiplying SAMPLE  WEIGHT  by
   0.00058 in./g, and record in appropriate boxes.

o  Space is provided for ONE  measurement of sample conductivity and
   pH.  Only one is necessary, but if the quality of the measurement
   is  suspect  and if  over  70 g  of  sample  remain,  repeat  the
   measurement,  and  record  only the final  value.   Mention  only
   problems in the remarks section.  (Instructions in Sections 2.5.2
   and  2.5.3.) Enter DATE of determination as veil as volume in  mL
   of sample ALIQUOT REMOVED.   Record  CONDUCTANCE of DISTILLED (or
   DKEONIZED) WATER used for rinses and SAMPLE MEASURED  conductance
   corrected to  25°C.   If  resistance  bridge  cannot be adjusted,
   insert  measured value of 74 yS/cm standard in STANDARD  MEASURED
   to calculate  CORRECTION  FACTOR;  then  calculate and record the
   SAMPLE  CORRECTED value.  For conductivity meters adjusted to  74
   US/cm value using  KC1  standard,  the  correction factor is 1.0.
   The  sample aliquot used for the conductance measurement can also
   be used for pH measurement.  Never return any aliquot to the bulk
   saJiple.   Avoid contaminating bulk sample or aliquot.  Measure pH
   of SAMPLE  aliquot  (Section  2.5.3).  After  the  measurement is
   completed,  recheck  the  pH 4 buffer value, and enter it  if  it
   differs by less than +0.03 from 4.00.   If the difference is more
   than  +0.03,  repeat  calibration, and remeasure the  pH  of  the
   sample aliquot and  the pH 4 buffer.

o  Obtain SUPPLIES by  circling  the  appropriate  material.   If pH
   standards are needed, write it in this section.  To avoid running
   out, request  new  material  when  about  one-fourth  of original
   supply remains.

o  The REMARKS space is  provided  for  the  observer  to record any
   unusual problems, weather, or other occurrences at the field site
   or in  the  laboratory.   Unusual  occurrences  in  site area may
   include  contamination  by  the  operator, moisture  in  the  dry
   bucket, plowing,  harvesting,   burning,   increased  atmospheric
   pollution  or  dust,  or power outage.   The  importance  of  the
   information  requested   in   the   remarks   section   cannot be
   overemphasized.   Careful  observation of the sample  and  occur-
   rences  in   the  surrounding  environment  can  aid  greatly   in
   evaluating   the validity of the sample and in the  interpretation
   of  the data  collected.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  45  of 49
2.8  QUALITY CONTROL
     Quality control  procedures  are  used  on  a  routine basis to help
assure  the  collection of high quality data.  Complete documentation  of
all observations and measurements, the use of known test solutions for pH
tests,  and the recheck of the pH calibration after  sample  measurements
are exaaples of quality controls.  In addition, these types of audits are
used  to test the field operators and the central laboratory.  The  first
type, performance  audits,  uses  blind  samples  made  up by the Network
Quality  Assurance  Manager  or central laboratory for  pH  and  specific
conductance measurements  to test  the measurement capability at the sites.
The second type is field  systems  audits by an experienced observer.   The
third type requires the field personnel to forward a sample received from
quality  assurance  personnel  to the central laboratory disguised  as  a
regular precipitation sample  to  test  both  field and laboratory sample
handling and analysis.

2.8.1  Unknown or Quality Control Test Samples for the Field

     To evaluate the  quality  of  each  station's  pH  and  conductivity
Measurements as well as to detect problems with these measurements,  test
samples of  rain-type  composition  should  be  received from the central
laboratory on a regular (e.g., quarterly) basis.

1. Measure these samples  for pH and conductance as soon as possible after
   receipt.   Use  the  same  procedure   as  for  precipitation  samples
   (Sections 2.5.2 and 2.5.3).
2. Fill  out  a  data form; record the data and  the  results  in  SAMPLE
   CHEMISTRY, and identify the sample in REMARKS.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  46  of 49


3. Return the results on a data form,  and the remainder of the sample to
   the central laboratory.


     At  the  central laboratory,  the sample is remeasured to be sure  it

has not changed during shipment  to  and  from  the station.  Comparisons

between  the site and laboratory results will assist in the validation of

routine field data.  If  the  comparison  results  are  poor, the Network

Coordinator  should initiate troubleshooting with the field  operator  to
determine the cause of the  problem  and  take the appropriate corrective

action.


2.8.2  Site Visits/Audits


     To review the quality of the measurement system and to evaluate each

station's  performance firsthand,  a site visit should be conducted once a

year or at least once every  two  years  by  experienced  personnel.  The

audit covers all aspects of site operation.


1. About 4 to 6 weeks before  the  audit,  a questionnaire should be sent
   from  the  Network Coordinator's office to the field personnel.   They
   fill in the questionnaire  (Section  10.0,  quality assurance handbook
   (3))  and return it prior to the auditor's visit so that  the  auditor
   can assess the operator's overall  capabilities  and prepare pertinent
   questions.

2. The  auditor  will either add a test sample to a clean bucket  at  the
   station, or give the sample  to   the  operator  for  measurement.  The
   operator  will weigh the sample, measure its pH and conductivity,  and
   record the data on a data form.

3. The  auditor will inspect all equipment, check the calibration of  the
   rain gauge, offer advice, and ask  questions  while  the operator goes
   through the rounds and  tests.

4. If  there are any problems, the  auditor  attempts to correct them; and
   failing to do so, the auditor will bring them to the attention of  the
   site supervisor.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31,  1986
                                                       Page  47  of 49


5. The site personnel will be  informed  of the results at the end of the
   audit.   A  written  audit  report  will  be  submitted  to  the  site
   supervisor, site sponsor, network coordinator  and other officials who
   are  concerned with operation of the site.   A follow-up on  corrective
   action will be made in  60  days.   The  follow-up  can  be by letter,
   telephone or revisit.


2.8.3  Blind Samples for the Laboratory


     Blind  samples  will be sent to each station at  various  times   for

testing and forwarding to the  central laboratory for analysis as part of

the  quality  assurance  program.   The following  are  instructions   and

guidelines to be followed:

1. A reference sample can be shipped in a 500-mL polyethylene bottle  with
   tvo preaddressed postcards, a mailing label, and a set of data.

2. Refrigerate the sample at 4°C until it can be submitted to the central
   laboratory during a week in which your site had no wet deposition.

3. If your  precipitation  samples  are  submitted  in  buckets, pour the
   contents  of the bottle into a clean sample bucket (one which has   not
   been used in the field) when  you  are  ready  to submit the reference
   sample; weigh, and record as usual on a data form.

   If your precipitation samples are sent in bottles, transfer the sample
   to one of your bottles, weigh, and record as usual on a data form.

4. Remove  your  normal  aliquot   and   measure   its  pH  and  specific
   conductance; record these values as usual on the data form.

5. Fill  out the rest of the regular field report form, and ship it  with
   the sample to the central laboratory as a normal precipitation sample.
   Make up the information for PRECIPITATION RECORD, and so forth, on the
   data form.

6. Furnish  the  information   requested   on   the  two  postcards which
   accompanied the sample and mail the self-addressed cards.

7. Place a clean bucket in the collector, and proceed as usual.

-------
                                                       Section No. 2
                                                       Revision No. 2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  48  of 49
2.9  FIELD PROCEDURE SUMMARY
     To  serve  as an outline,  an operating procedure  summary  is  given

belov.  It  includes  the  basic  steps,  but  it  is  not complete.  The
conductivity  and  pH  procedures  are those applicable to  most  of  the
current instruments, but they may  not  pertain  to a specific instrument

being  used.   Check  the manufacturer's  instructions,  and  adapt  this
summary to your network as necessary.


Site Visits

     a) Daily: check  rain  gauge  for  event  occurrence.   If  an event
        occurred,  record its date and time, number of lid openings,  and
        amount of precipitation from  gauge.   Note the weather.  Veekly:
        change  chart,  fill pens, and wind clock.   Monthly:  check  rain
        gauge  calibration,  and  clean  collector   sensor.   Check   the
        condition of the lid pad.

     b) Check dry side   buckets   for   moisture   and   other   unusual
        occurrences.   If not interested in the dry bucket analysis, wipe
        off the rim and leave the  dry  bucket  in   place.   The dry side
        buckets should be cleaned weekly and replaced semi-annually.

     c) If event occurred, replace wet  bucket  with a newly weighed one.
        Put  new  weighed lid firmly on removed  sample  bucket.   Record
        observations on data form and in logbook.

     d) Check collector, sensor, and rain gauge for problems.


Saaple Handling

     a) Wipe  outside of bucket dry; tap lid to knock off drops;  remove,
        weigh bucket (to nearest 1.0 g).  Record on sample data form.

     b) If sample is frozen, allow it to melt completely.

-------
                                                       Section No.  2
                                                       Revision No.  2
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  49  of 49


     c) If  sample  is  sent to the laboratory in a  bottle  rather  than
        bucket, pour the sample into a 125,   250 or 500 mL sample bottle.
        Discard  any  sample  over bottle capacity.   Mark  total  sample
        veight on bottle.

     d) Rinse sample bucket with deionized or distilled vater, shake, and
        drain.

     e) For sample in sealed bucket  or  bottle,  allow  at least 1 h for
        sample to reach rooa temperature before performing measurements.


2.10  REFERENCES


1. Galloway, J.N., and G.E.  Likens, Vater,  Air and Soil Pollut.  6,  241
   (1976).

2. Galloway, J.N., and G.E.  Likens, Tellus 30, 71 (1978).

3. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol.
   V  -  Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems,Part  I-  Quality
   Assurance Manual'.   UTjT   Environmental  Protection  Agency, Research
   Triangle  Park, NC.  EPA-600/4-82-042a (January 1981).   October  1984
   Revision in print.

4. Martin,  C.W.   NADP  Winter  Operation   of  Sampler,  Hubbard  Brook
   Experimental Forest, West Thornton, NH; letter to V.C. Bowersox, March
   25, 1980.

5. Eaton, W.C., and E.D. Estes, "Use of Plastic Bags as Bucket Liners For
   the  Aerochem  Metrics  Precipitation  Collector",  Research  Triangle
   Institute, Research Triangle Park, NC, RTI-2474-86 (May 1984).

6. Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, U.S.  Environmental
   Protection Agency, Cincinnati, OH, EPA-600/4-79-020 (March 1979).

7. Koch, W.F., and G. Marinenko,  Guidelines for the Measurement of pH in
   Acidic Rainwater.  National Bureau of Standards, for EPA.

8. Galloway, J.N.,  B.J. Cosby,  G.E. Likens,  and  J. Limnol.  Oceanogr.
   24, 1161 (1979).

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  1  of   20
3.0  CENTRAL LABORATORY SUPPORT OPERATIONS FOR THE FIELD

     The  central  laboratory will supply clean containers to  the  field
sites,   prepare  reference   standards   to   be  used to calibrate field
instruments,  and furnish quality control samples for use in  the  field.
This section discusses the care of glass and plasticvare, the preparation
of  reference  solutions,  and the evaluation of field equipment  by  the
central laboratory.   The referred data forms are in Section 3.7.
     The central laboratory will serve as a focal point for solving field
operational problems involving  equipment malfunctions.  It will serve as
a central distributor of replacement parts for the collector, rain gauge,
pfl meter, conductivity meter, balance, thermometers or thermistor probes,
and ancillary supplies.  The central laboratory will provide consultation
service to field personnel on  any  technical  question involving siting,
sample   collection,  analysis, data quality and transport of the collected
saaple.   The  central  laboratory  will  work  with  site  personnel  as
intensively as necessary to assure that data quality meets standards  set
by the  monitoring program.

3.1  CLEANING AND SUPPLYING OF GLASSWARE AND PLASTICVARE

3.1.1  Cleaning of New or Used Plasticware

     a) Rinse with deionized water 6 to 10  times.  NOTE:  If the plastic
        needs to be rubbed to remove a film, use a natural sponge.
     b) Let  stand,   filled with deionized or distilled water  for  48 h.
        Empty and dry in an oven at 70°C.
     c) After initial cleaning (steps 1 and 2), check a portion (~10£) of
        the  containers to ensure that rinsing has been adequate.  To  do
        this, add 50 mL of deionized water to the cleaned container, seal
        the  container with a cap or with Parafilm, and slowly rotate  it
        so that the water  touches  all  inner  surfaces.   DO NOT SHAKE.
        Check  the conductivity of the water (Section 4.3); it should  be
        less than 2.0 yS/cm.  If any  of  the  containers  fail the check,

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  2  of  20


        rerinse all of the containers cleaned for the checked samples and
        retest 10*.

     d) After the plasticvare is  clean  and  dry, cap the containers and
        place them in a plastic bag to be sealed for shipment or storage.


3.1.2  Cleaning of Glassware

3.1.2.1  Glassvare Used for Metal Analyses—

     a) Rinse vith deionized vater twice and with 10* HNO~ once.

     b) Rinse 6 to 10 times vith deionized vater.


3.1.2.2  Glassvare Used for Anions and NH*—

     a) Rinse vith deionized vater tvice and vith 10% KOH solution once.

     b) Rinse 6 to 10 times vith deionized vater.

     c) If vater beads on the  inner  surface,  the glassware needs to be
        cleaned  more  thoroughly.  Wash vith detergent, and  then  clean
        vith 10% KOH solution.  If vater  still beads, soak the glassware
        overnight  in  10%  KOH, and rinse 6 to 10 times  vith  deionized
        water.
3.1.3  Supplying Containers to the Field


      After  a  sample  shipment  has  been  logged  in  at  the  central

laboratory, replace the bucket  or  other  sample  container with a clean

one.   The  clean,  sealed containers are shipped to the  field  site   in

plastic bags and shipping cartons on an as-needed basis to maintain their

supply.   If  cold  packs and insulated containers are  used,  these  are

returned also.   Check  that  the  Styrofoam  boxes  are  intact  and not

cracked; if cracked, replace with a new one.  The shipment can be made  by

ground transport since each  site  should  have  a 3-week supply of these

aaterials on hand.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  3  of  20
3.2  PREPARATION OP STANDARDS FOR THE FIELD
3.2.1  Preparation and Measurement of Conductivity Standards


     a) Weigh  out 7.456 g of predried (2 h at 105°C) KC1 and dissolve it
        in 1 liter of deionized water (0.10M KC1).

     b) Dilute 20 mL of the 0.1M  KC1  to  4  liters with deionized water
        (0.0005M KC1).

     c) Fill  washed  0.5-liter  plastic  bottles with  the  0.0005M  KC1
        solution to be sent to  the  field.   Label  the bottles with the
        preparation date and keep the solutions refrigerated.

     d) Measure the conductivity of the solution  in each bottle (Section
        4.3).

     e) Fill out  the  Field  Conductivity  Standard  form  and label the
        bottle with the measured conductivity.

     f) Send new standards to the field monthly.  Vhen old standards  are
        returned to the laboratory, remeasure the conductivity.  Complete
        the Field Conductivity Standard form.


3.2.2  Preparation and Measurement of pH Reference Solution

     a) Prepare 4 liters of a 10"   to  10  N  H-SO,  solution  for  the pH
        reference  solution  by diluting 4 mL or 0.4 mL  of  commercially
        available 0.100N sulfuric acid stock solution.

     b) Fill washed 500-raL bottles with the pH reference solution.  Label
        the  bottles  with  the  preparation date.   Keep  the  solutions
        refrigerated.

     c) Measure the pH of the solution in each bottle (Sections 4.2).

     d) Fill out the Field pH Test  Solution  form,  and label  the  bottle
        with the measured pH.

     e) Remeasure the pH of these solutions after they are returned  from
        the field.  Complete the Field pH Test Solution form.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  4  of  20
3.2.3  Preparation of Quality Control Samples
     a) Monthly,  prepare  a mixed solution of 10~  to  10~ N  H,jSO, from
        commercially available 0.100N solution and 0.0001M to 0.0003M KCl
        to  be  used  as a quality  control sample.  A  0.10M  KCl  stock
        solution is prepared  by  dissolving  7.456 g of predried (2 h at
        105°C)  KCl in 1 L of deionized water at 25°C.  For 0.0001N  KCl,
        dilute 1  mL  of  the  0.10 M  stock  solution  to  1000  mL with
        deionized water.

     b) Fill  clean  60-raL  polyethylene  bottles with  the  mixed  audit
        sample, and send each site one  sample.   Three bottles should be
        retained by the laboratory.

     c) Immediately  measure the three samples kept by the laboratory for
        pH  (Section 4.2)  and  conductivity  (Section 4.3).   Check  the
        laboratory  electrode  against another backup electrode  for  one
        sample.  Fill out  the  appropriate  section of the Field Quality
        Control  Audit  Sample Report (Section  3.6.).   Refrigerate  the
        laboratory samples.

     d) When the field quality control  audit samples from all sites have
        been returned to the laboratory, reanalyze the samples along with
        the laboratory's three aliquots.   Check the laboratory electrode
        against  another  backup electrode for one sample.  Complete  the
        Summary Field Quality Control Audit Sample Report.
3.3  INITIAL EVALUATION OF FIELD EQUIPMENT


      All meters and electrodes should be tested before they are  shipped
to the  field.   The  meters  have  a  serial  number  affixed,  but   the
electrodes  do not.  A unique identification number should  therefore  be
taped to each electrode.


3.3.1  Evaluation of Conductance Meters and Cells


3.3.1.1  Evaluation of Accuracy and Precision of Meter—


     a) Prepare  a  0.0003M KCl Test Solution—Dilute 3 mL of  the  stock
        0.10M KCl solution (Section 3.2) to 1 liter with deionized water.
        (Prepare daily.)

-------
                                                  Section No.  3
                                                  Revision No.  1
                                                  Date July 31, 1986
                                                  Page  5  of  20
b) Calibrate the Field Conductance Meter—Calibrate
   the manufacturer or as described in Section 4.3.
                                         as indicated by
c) Pill 11 Vials or Plastic  (17x100 mm)  Tubes—Pill  to a depth of
   3 cm (or to cover the electrode) with the 0.0003M KCl.  The first
   tube is to be used as a rinse tube.

d) Measure  the  Conductance  of   the  10  Solutions—Between  each
   measurement,   rinse   the  conductivity  cell  thoroughly   with
   distilled water, carefully shake it  dry, and dip it in the rinse
   solution three times.

e) Calculate  an Average Value and the Standard  Deviation—Use  the
   following  relationships.   Programmed   calculators  make this a
   simple operation.
               10
               E
                   x.
                                               3-1
   and
                10
                I
                        1/2
                                               3-2
   where
       xi
       x

       s

       n
the measured value (in pS/cra or pH units),

the average value,

standard deviation, and

the number of values.
f) Record the Results—Record results on the Conductance  Meter/Cell
   Acceptance Test form and  the  Conductance Acceptance Test Summary
   Form.   The  conductivity  meter and cell are acceptable  if  the
   average value is within 2% of the theoretical value of 44.6 uS/cm
   (25°C) and if the relative standard deviation is less than 2%.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. I
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  6  of  20
3.3.1.2  Evaluation of Linearity of Meter--

     a) Prepare  three of the following standards so that each  range  of
        the meter has at least one standard
        Standard

        147.0 pS/cm


        75.0 pS/cm


        44.6 pS/cm


        14.9 pS/cm


        7.5 pS/cm
Preparation

Dilute 1 mL of 0.1N
KCl to 100 mL

Dilute 500 pL of 0.1N
KC1 to 100 mL

Dilute 300 PL of 0.1N
KCl to 100 mL

Dilute 100 pL of 0.1N
KCl to 100 mL

Dilute 50 pL of 0.1N
KCl to 100 mL
Normality
   KCl

  0.001
  0.0005
  0.0003
  0.0001
  0.00005
     b) Calibrate  the  field  conductivity   meter  as  indicated by the
        manufacturer.

     c) Measure the conductivity of each standard as described in Section
        4.3.1.5.

     d) Determine the linearity of the meter by performing a linear least
        squares fit on the data.   Record  the results on the Conductance
        Meter/Cell  Acceptance  Test Form and the Conductance  Acceptance
        Test Summary Form. The coefficient of correlation should be 0.999
        or  better.   If  it  is less than 0.999,  the  meter  should  be
        adjusted.   Some  manufacturers  provide   procedures  for  these
        adjustments.   Otherwise,  the  meter should be returned  to  the
        manufacturer for calibration.
3.3.2  Evaluation of pH Meters

     a) Calibrate   the  Field  pH Meter—Calibrate as  indicated  by   the
        manufacturer or as described in  Section  4.2.4.  A laboratory pH
        electrode of documented performance should be used.

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  7  of   20


     b) Pill 11  Vials or Plastic (17x100 mm) Tubes—-Fill to a  depth  of
        3 cm with fresh pH electrode  reference solution (Section 3.2.2).
        The first tube is to be used as a rinse tube.

     c) Measure  the  pH of the 10 Solutions—Between   each  measurement,
        rinse the pH  electrode  thoroughly  with  deionized or distilled
        water,  carefully drain or shake it dry, and dip it in the  rinse
        solution three times.

     d) Calculate an  Average  Value   and  the  Standard  Deviation—See
        Section 3.3.1.1, (e).

     e) Record  the Results—Record on the pH Meter/Electrode  Acceptance
        Test Form and the pH Acceptance  Test Summary  Form.  The pH meter
        is  acceptable  if  the average pH is within 0.1 pH unit  of  the
        calculated value and  the  standard  deviation  is less than 0.03
        units. (Calculated pH =» -log (Normality H^SO^).


3.3.3   Evaluation of pH Electrodes

     a) Assign  Each New pH Electrode an Identification Number—Allow  it
        to equilibrate overnight in 1 x 10~  mol/L HCl.

     b) Rinse  the  Electrode Carefully with  Deionized  Water—Prior  to
        testing, and then place  it  successively  in   deionized water in
        different test tubes until a constant pH reading is achieved.

     c) Calibrate the Laboratory pH Meter—Calibrate as indicated by  the
        manufacturer or as described in Section 4.2.

     d) Measure the pH  of  10  Tubes—Measure  pH  reference solution as
        described in Section 3.3.2  and  note  drift,   noise and response
        time.

     e) Calculate  an  Average  Value  and  the  Standard  Deviation—See
        Section 3.3.1.1, (e').

     f) Record  the Results—Record on the pH Meter/Electrode  Acceptance
        Test Form and  the  pH  Acceptance  Test  Summary  Form.   The pH
        electrode  is acceptable if the average pH is  within 0.1 pH  unit
        of the calculated value and  if  the  standard  deviation is less
        than 0.03 pH unit.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  8  of  20
3.3.4  Evaluation of Field Balance and Thermometers
     Reference  weights  traceable  to  MBS  are  necessary  for  balance
calibration.   Each  laboratory  should  purchase  a set of NBS-traceable
weights  to be used to certify a set of working weights used in the field
and laboratory.  Semi-annual  calibration  checks  are  recommended.  The
procedure used to certify weights is as follows:

     a) zero the balance according to manufacturer's recommendations,
     b) veigh the working certified 1.0 and 5.0 Kg weights,
     c) weigh reference 1.0 and 5.0 Kg weights,
     d) repeat this procedure five times, and
     e) complete the Certification of Vorking Weights to MBS form.

     Working reference weights should be certified by this procedure once
a year.  The NBS-traceable weights  are  kept  as primary standards.  All
working  reference weights should weigh within 0.1% of the  NBS-traceable
weights.
     Each  laboratory  should  have an  NBS-traceable  thermometer.   One
thermometer  in  the   laboratory   should   be   certified  against  the
NBS-traceable standard.  Keep the NBS-traceable thermometer as a  primary
standard.  Assign all laboratory  and  field thermometers (or temperature
probes)  identification  numbers,  and then calibrate  them  against  the
(secondary) certified thermometer.  Calibrate  the temperature probes in  a
circulating  water  bath in the 0° to 25°C range  against  the  certified
thermometer, and complete  the Thermometer Calibration Log Form.   File one
copy   in   the  laboratory,  and  send  another  to  the  field  with  the
temperature probe.  If the water  bath  does  not have a cooling  coil, an
ice-water   mixture  can be used to achieve the  low-temperature   reading.
Calibration at  two  temperatures,  near  0°  and 25°C, is sufficient and  a
linear  temperature   behavior may be  assumed.   Temperature  differences

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  9  of   20

between the certified thermometer  and  the test thermometer should be no
greater than 0.5 degree.

3.4  MONITORING OF FIELD OPERATION

     It is the function  of  the  central  laboratory  to  monitor  field
results  to  determine if a site is operating properly.   The  laboratory
receives a copy of the site log book and sample data sheets veekly.  From
these  and  the results of the monthly Quality  Control  Sample  (Section
3.2.3) the central laboratory  can  determine  if the site is functioning
properly.

3.4.1  Evaluation of Field Conductivity and pH Measurement Systems

     As needed, the central laboratory sends Quality Control (QC) samples
(Section 3.2.3) to each field site.  After all samples have been measured
for  conductivity and pH by the site operators, returned to  the  central
laboratory and remeasured  by  the  central  laboratory,  the results are
recorded  on  the  Monthly Field Audit Report (Section 9.1.2,  QA  Manual
(1)).  Accuracy is estimated and the acceptance criteria are applied.
     If a site's QC sample result is outside  the pH acceptance criteria,
the  pH  reference solution (Section 3.2.2) values recorded by  the  site
operator on recent  field  sample  data  sheets' are  checked.   If  these
results are also questionable, a new pH electrode which has been   checked
by the central laboratory (Section 3.3.3) is sent to the field with  a new
QC  sample.   If the pH system still does not function properly,   the  pH
meter is replaced.
     If a QC conductance value  measured  by the site operator is outside
the  conductivity acceptance criteria, a new conductance standard  is sent
to the site.  If this does not solve the  problem, the conductivity  meter
and  cell  are replaced.  In all cases the central  laboratory  personnel
communicate with the site operator  to  determine  if there is an outside
cause of malfunctioning.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  10  of 20
3.4.2  Evaluation of Field Precipitation Collector,  Rain Gauge and
       Balance

     All  measurements  in the field, including sample  weight  and  rain
gauge reading, are recorded by the  site operator on field data forms and
all  observations  are noted in a bound log book vith  perforated  second
copies that can be torn out easily.   These pages are sent to the central
laboratory  for  review  along vith the data forms.    Central  laboratory
personnel evaluate the performance  of  the precipitation collector, rain
gauge, and balance from these sources, the weekly telephone call, and the
precipitation   collector   collection   efficiency.    In  addition, the
performance of the rain gauge and balance are evaluated by reviewing  the
field records when the  site  operators  check the rain gauge and balance
with  known weights.  During field audits, the auditor evaluates all site
equipment.

3.5  REPORT FORMS

     Blank data forms are included in this section for the convenience of
the manual user.  Use of the forms is discussed throughout Section 3. The
forms included are listed below:

     Title
     Field Conductivity Standard Report
     Field pH Reference Solution
     Field Quality Control Audit Sample Report - Laboratory Data
     Conductivity Meter/Cell Acceptance Test Report
     Conductivity Acceptance Test Summary
     pH  Meter/Electrode Acceptance Test Report
     pH  Acceptance Test Summary

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  11  of 20
     Certification of Working Weights to NBS-Traceable Standards

     Thermometer Calibration Log
3.6  REFERENCES

1. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems, Vol.
   V  -  Manual for Precipitation measurement Systems, Part  I -  Quality
   Assurance ManualJU.S.EnvironmentalProtectionAgency,Research
   TriangleParTcT   NC.   EPA-600/4-82-042a  (January  1981).   Revised
   January 1985.

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 12 of 20
                     FIELD CONDUCTIVITY STANDARD REPORT
DATE OP PREPARATION OF
0.1M KC1 STOCK SOLUTION: 	

DATE OF PREPARATION OF                                 	
DILUTE FIELD STANDARD: 	                     (Analyst's Signature)


LABORATORY ANALYSIS BEFORE SHIPMENT TO THE FIELD (yS/cm)
                                              s  -
Laboratory Values After Use In The Field:

                     Lab Value            Date of Lab              Analyst's
Field Site!	(uS/cm)	Analysis	Initials
     Operations  &  Maintenance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 13 of 20
                         FIELD pH REFERENCE SOLUTION
DATE OF PREPARATION OF
0.1N H2SOA STOCK SOLUTION 	         	

VOLUME OF STOCK TAKEN 	                   (Analyst's Signature)


FINAL DILUTION VOLUME OF                        DATE OF PREPARATION
FIELD pfl ELECTRODE TEST SOLUTION 	     OF TEST SOLUTION 	
LABORATORY ANALYSIS BEFORE SHIPMENT TO THE FIELD (pH)
              pH
LABORATORY ANALYSIS OF ALIQUOTS RETURNED FROM THE FIELD

Field                            Lab Values After Return
Site ft             Date of Analysis          pH          Anal. Init.
    Operations & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                                                       Section No. 3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 14 of 20
                FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AUDIT SAMPLE REPORT


                                                     SAMPLE #
Date of Preparation of Field Audit Sample:
Vol. of H2SO^ Stock Used: 	mL;   Normality of HjSO^ Stock: 	

                                     Date of H-SO, Stock Preparation:

Vol. of KC1 Stock Used:   	mL;   Normality of KC1 Stock: 	
                                     Date of KC1 Stock Preparation:
Final Dilution Volume of
  Field Audit Samples:    	mL;            (Analyst's Signature)


                  LABORATORY ANALYSIS BEFORE SHIPMENT*
                            TO THE FIELD
                     Conductivity             pH

                  Average and
                  Std. Dev.
LABORATORY ANALYSIS OF ALIQUOTS RETURNED FROM THE FIELD

                  DATE
                 OF LAB          CONDUCTIVITY          pH          ANALYST'S
SITE *          ANALYSIS            VALUE             VALUE        INITIALS
 *  These data  are  for  three  laboratory aliquots which are analyzed  before
   shipment of samples, are  then refrigerated, and are  reanalyzed with  the
   samples returned  from  the field.
    Operations  &  Maintenance Manual  for  Precipitation Measurement  Systems

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page 15 of 20
             CONDUCTIVITY METER/CELL ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORT
DATE OF TEST: 	                          ___,	
                                                       (Analyst's Signature)
PREPARATION DATE OP
KC1 REFERENCE SOLUTIONS: 	

METER TYPE/SERIAL NO.         /
CONDUCTIVITY CELL TYPE/SERIAL NO.
INDICATE WHETHER TEST OP 	METER  OR  	CELL


CONDUCTIVITY VALUES OBTAINED FOR PRECISION TEST (0.0003M KC1 SOLUTION)
(Section 3.5.1.1)

         Aliquot 1: 	          Aliquot 6: 	

         Aliquot 2: 	          Aliquot 7: 	

         Aliquot 3: 	          Aliquot 8: 	

         Aliquot 4: 	          Aliquot 9: 	

         Aliquot 5: 	          Aliquot 10:	
Average conductivity and
standard deviation:
CONDUCTIVITY VALUES OBTAINED FOR LINEARITY TEST (Section 3.5.1.2)

        Normality               Expected                     Found
           KC1             Conductivity (uS/cm)       Conductivity (yS/cm)
Slope   _

Intercept

Linearity
      Accepted 	          Rejected
    Operations & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                                                 Section No. 3
                                                 Revision No. 1
                                                 Date July 31, 1986
                                                 Page 16 of 20
            CONDUCTIVITY ACCEPTANCE TEST SUMMARY
Meter Type/
Serial f



















Cell Type/
Serial *



















Date of
Check



















Linearity



















Conductivity Value
Average and Standard
Deviation( yS/cm)



















Number
of
Values



















Anal.
Initials



















Operations & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation  Measurement  Systems

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date  July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  17 of 20
                pH METER/ELECTRODE ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORT
DATE OP TEST:
                                                        (Analyst's Signature)
PREPARATION DATE OP
pfl ELECTRODE REFERENCE SOLUTION:
SORMALITY OF pH ELECTRODE REFERENCE SOLUTION:

Heter Type/Serial No. 	/	

pH Electrode Type/Serial No. 	/	

Indicate whether test of        meter  or
                                                 electrode
pfl VALUES OBTAINED;
4.0(3.0) Buffer before:

7.0(6.0) Buffer before:

   Aliquot 1:

   Aliquot 2:

   Aliquot 3:

   Aliquot 4:

   Aliquot 5:
                                              Aliquot 6:

                                              Aliquot 7:

                                              Aliquot 8:

                                              Aliquot 9:

                                              Aliquot 10:

                                          4.0(3.0) Buffer after:

                                          7.0(6.0) Buffer after:
?5 ELECTRODE REFERENCE SOLUTION; (Section 3.5.2)

Calculated pH of reference solution: 	

Average pH and standard deviation: 	

Check One:      Accepted 	
                                                  Rejected
    Operations & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                                                 Section No. 3
                                                 Revision No. 1
                                                 Date July 31, 1986
                                                 Page 18 of 20
                  pH ACCEPTANCE  TEST SUMMARY
Meter Type/
Serial t




















Electrode
Type/
Serial*




















Date of Ref
Soln. Prep.




















Date
of
Check




















pH Value
Average and Standard
Deviation




















Number
of
Values




















Anal.
Initials




















Operations & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation  Measurement  Systems

-------
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31,-1986
                                                       Page 19 of 20
       CERTIFICATION OF WORKING WEIGHTS TO NBS-TRACEABLE STANDARDS
DATE OP CERTIFICATION:
WEIGHT SET SERIAL #:
BALANCE 0
MBS 1kg
NBS 5kg
                                              (Analyst's Signature)
                                      BALANCE 0
                                      NBS 1kg
                                      NBS 5kg
TEST 1kg
TEST 5kg

BALANCE 0
SBS 1kg
BBS 5kg
* * *
         TEST 1kg
         TEST 5kg

         BALANCE 0
         NBS 1kg
         NBS 5kg
                                                * * *
TEST 1kg
TEST 5kg

BALANCE 0
SBS 1kg
KBS 5kg

TEST 1kg
TEST 5kg
* * *
         TEST 1kg
         TEST 5kg

         BALANCE 0
         NBS 1kg
         NBS 5kg

         TEST 1kg
         TEST 5kg
                                                * * *
SUMMARY: (Section 3.5.4)
                        Average and Standard Deviation
       BALANCE 0
       NBS 1kg
       NBS 5kg
Check One:
        Accepted
                                             TEST 1kg
                                             TEST 5kg
Rejected
    Operation & Maintenance Manual  for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                     THERMOMETER CALIBRATION REPORT
                                                       Section No.  3
                                                       Revision No.  1
                                                       Date  July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  20 of 20
DATE OF CALIBRATION:
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:
                                                        (Analyst's Signature)
  Certified Thermometer (°C)    Test Thermometer (°C)     Correction (°C)
                                                         (Section 3.3.4)
  Check one:     Accepted
Rejected
    Operation & Maintenance Manual for Precipitation Measurement Systems

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  1  of  9
4.0  LABORATORY PROCEDURES
     The laboratory procedures herein  are  for chemical measurements and
analyses  of  precipitation  samples.  Methods include analyses  for  pH,
specific  conductance,  acidity, NH*, P0~3, S0~2, N0~, Cl~, F~,  Na+, K+,
Ca"1"1',  Mg++,  and  dissolved Al, Cd, Cu, Fe, Pb, Mn  and  Zn.   Detection
limits for  these procedures  vill  vary  with instruments and conditions,
but  representative detection limits, concentration ranges, precision and
                                         1
bias are presented in each method.  Brief  discussions of the methods are
presented   in  this section vith the full text of the procedures  in  the
appendices.

4.1  GRAVIMETRIC MEASUREMENTS

     In both the field and the central laboratory the volume of rainwater
is determined by measuring the mass  of  the rain and multiplying the mass
          3
by  1 g/cm   to obtain the volume.  The  mass of rain is measured  in  the
field to determine the rain collector efficiency (compared  to  that of the
rain gauge), and the mass of the sample  sent to the central laboratory  is
measured as a check to determine  if  leakage  occurred in shipment.  The
sample  should  be sent  to the central laboratory in plastic   buckets   or
plastic bottles.  If sent in  the  bucket,  the  sample is weighed at the
field   station  and  by  the  central   laboratory.   If  transferred   to
polyethylene bottles, the sample is  weighed  in  the bucket at the field
station  and  the  weight entered on the Field  Data  Form.   The  volume
received is estimated by the central laboratory. If collected  in bottles,
the  sample  is  weighed  by  both the   field  station  and  the  central
laboratory.

4.1.1  Apparatus

     The balance should have a  capacity of  20 kg and a precision of  at
least +10 g (for bucket weighing) or 1 kg with a precision of +0.5 g (for
bottle weighing).

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  2  of  9
4.1.2  Calibration
     Calibrate  the   balance   monthly,   using   weights  traceable  to
NBS-traceable   weights.    Store  the  NBS-traceable  weights   (primary
references) in the laboratory,  certify  the  working calibration weights
against  these, and complete the Certification of Vorking Weights to  NBS
report (Section 3.4).  Recertify all  working calibration weights against
the  NBS-traceable  weights  every six  months.  The procedure for weight
certification is the  same  as  for   field   balances  (Section  3.3.4).
Calibrate  each balance using weights close to those  actually  measured.
Calibrate high-capacity balances, using 1.0 and 5.0 kg weights.

4.1.3  Procedure

     To obtain the weight of the  sample  received in the laboratory, use
the  following procedure.  During the procedure, avoid breathing  on  the
sample to avoid NH~ contamination.

     a) Be sure that the balance is  level, and then adjust its zero knob
        so that the balance zeroes (see manufacturer's instructions).
     b) Place  the  bucket without its lid or the plastic bottle  on  the
        balance pan, and weigh it  to  the  nearest 10 grams or place the
        bottle on the balance and weigh it to the nearest gram.
     c) Record  the  weight on the bucket or bottle label and  on a  data
        sheet.
     d) Subtract the initial weight of  the  empty container (recorded on
        the Field Data  form) from the final weight of container plus  the
        sample to obtain the sample weight shipped.

4.2  pH MEASUREMENT

     pH  is measured in precipitation samples electrometrically by  using
either a pH half  cell  with  a  reference  electrode  or  a  combination
electrode.   The pH meter/electrode(s) measurement system  is  calibrated

-------
                                                       Section No.  4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  3  of   9

vith tvo reference buffer solutions  that bracket the expected sample pH.
The  acceptable method for the measurement of pH is presented in Appendix
C.

4.3  CONDUCTANCE MEASUREMENT

     Specific   conductance   is  measured   in   precipitation   samples
electrolytically using  a  conductance  cell.  The conductance meter/cell
system is calibrated using potassium chloride solutions of known specific
conductances in the  range  of  precipitation  samples.   The  acceptable
•ethod  for  the  measurement of specific conductance  can  be  found  in
Appendix D.

4.4  SAMPLE FILTRATION

     After measuring  the  pH  and   specific   conductance,  but  before
•easuring the other analytes, filter the rainwater sample.  Use vacuum or
pressure filtration to minimize exposure of the sample to laboratory air.
The vacuum apparatus can be a bell jar (ground-glass plate) of sufficient
size to contain a 250-mL (8-oz)  bottle,  or it can be the apparatus used
by  the  Illinois  State  Water  Survey  for  the  National   Atmospheric
Deposition Program (NADP).  The  recommended filter material is a 0.45-  m
membrane  filter  (Millipore  HA); the filter funnel should  be  plastic.
Before each filtration,  thoroughly  rinse  the  apparatus, including the
filter, with 200 mL deionized water and a portion of sample if there is  a
sufficient amount.  Filter the sample as quickly as possible, and cap the
labeled  sample  bottle containing the filtrate to minimize contact  with
laboratory air.  If the filtered  particulates  are  to be analyzed, they
should be oven-dried at 60°C for one hour and stored in glass vials.

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  4  of  9
4.5  ACIDITY MEASUREMENTS
     Two  methods for measuring acidity are acceptable.  The first method
measures both strong and  total  acidity,   while  the  second method only
measures total acidity.

     In  the first method, strong and total acidity are measured  in   the
precipitation  samples  by   titrating   the   sample  with dilute sodium
hydroxide  solution and following the titration electrometrically with  a
pH half cell and  reference  electrode  or  a combination electrode.  The
titration  is  continued until a pH of 10.4 is reached.  A  method  first
introduced by Gran (1) is used to calculate the strong and total acidity.
The  Gran functions are plotted versus the volume of titrant added.   The
total and  strong  acidity  are  obtained  by  extrapolating  the  linear
portions  of the curve to zero.  Weak acidity is obtained by  subtracting
the strong acidity from the total  acidity.   This method can be found in
Appendix E.

     In  the  second method, total acidity is measured by  titrating   the
sample elect rometrically vith a  combination pH electrode to a pB of 8.3.
The  total  acidity  is calculated from the volume and  concentraiton  of
titrant.  This method is included with the above method in Appendix E.

4.6  DETERMINATION OF SULFATE

     Sulfate  is  measured  in the precipitation samples by  one  of   two
methods;   ion  chromatography  or  automated  colorimetry  using  barium-
methylthymol  blue.  The ion chromatographic method utilizes ion exchange
resins for separation and conductivity  for detection.  After a sample is
injected onto the separator column containing the ion exchange resin,  an
eluent is  used to pump the  sample  through  the  column.  The anions are
separated  depending on their radius and valence.  After eluting from   the

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                    .   Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  5  of  9

separator column, the ions are converted to the corresponding acids which
are  detected in the conductance cell against a background of neutralized
eluent.
     The automated colormetric  method  of  analysis for sulfate uses the
blue   colored   barium-methylthymol    blue   complex   to determine the
concentration  of sulfate in the sample.  After interfering  cations  are
removed by an ion exchange column,  the sulfate in the sample reacts with
barium  chloride  to form barium sulfate.  Excess barium ions react  with
the methyl thymol blue to form the  chelate.   Thus,  the concentration of
the  sulfate in the sample is inversely proportional to the intensity  of
the blue-colored chelate which is  measured  colorimetrically  at 460 nm.
     The ion chromatographic method is presented in Appendix F, while the
colorimetric method can be found in Appendix G.

4.7  DETERMINATION OF NITRATE

     Nitrate is measured  in  the  precipitation  samples  either  by ion
chromatography or automated colorimetry using cadmium reduction.  The ion
chromatographic method is  identical  to  the method described in Section
4.6.  It can be found in Appendix P.                        '•
     The  colorimetric  method  uses  a  color  reagent  made  from  NEDA
(n-(l-naphthyl)-ethylene-diamine  dihydrochloride), phosphoric  acid  and
sulfanilamide to develop a color  that can be used to measure the nitrate
present in a sample.  After mixing with ammonium chloride, the nitrate in
the sample is reduced in a copper-cadmium column to nitrite.  The nitrite
is  mixed with the color reagent and forms a reddish-purple complex which
is   measured   colorimetrically   at   a   wavelength   of  520 nm.  The
concentration  of  the  original  nitrate  in  the  sample  is   directly
proportional to the intensity of the color complex formed by the nitrite.
This method can be found in Appendix H.

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  6  of  9
4.8  DETERMINATION OF CHLORIDE
     Chloride is  measured   in   precipitation   samples  by  chemically
suppressed ion chromatography or automated colorimetry using thiocyanate.
The ion chromatographic method  is  identical  to the method described in
Section 4.6.  It can be found in Appendix P.
     The  colorimetric  method  of analysis for chloride  uses a  colored
ferric thiocyanate complex to determine  the concentration of chloride in
the sample.  The chloride ions react with mercuric thiocyanate liberating
thiocyanate ions which reacts with ferric ions.  The concentration of the
original  chloride  ions in the sample is directly  proportional  to  the
intensity of the  colored  ferric  thiocyanate  complex.   This method is
included vith this manual as Appendix I.

4.9  DETERMINATION OP ORTHOPHOSPHATE

     Orthophosphate  is  measured in the precipitation samples either  by
ion chromatography or automated  colorimetry  using the phosphomolybdenura
blue  complex.  The ion chromatographic method is identical to the method
discussed in Section 4.6.  It can be found in Appendix P.
     The  colorimetric  method involves developing the  phosphomolybdenum
blue complex by mixing the sample vith  an acidified solution of ammonium
aolybdate, ascorbic acid and antimony potassium tartrate, and passing the
mixture  through  a   37°C   temperature   bath.   The  concentration  of
orthophosphate  is proportional to the intensity of the phosphomolybdenum
blue  complex  measured  coloriraetrically   at  880  nm.   This method is
presented in Appendix J.

-------
                                                       Section No.  4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  7  of   9
4.10  DETERMINATION OF FLUORIDE
     Fluoride is determined  in  the   precipitation   samples  using  an
ion-selective electrode with a reference electrode.  The  meter/electrode
system is calibrated vith fluoride solutions of known concentrations. The
specified method is presented in Appendix K.

4.11  DETERMINATION OF AMMONIUM

     Ammonium is determined in the precipitation  samples by one of three
methods;   ion  chromatography,  ion-selective  electrode  or   automated
colorimetry using the indophenol blue complex.
     The ion chromatographic  method  utilizes  ion  exchange  resins for
separation  and  conductance for detection.  After a sample  is  injected
onto the separator column containing the ion exchange resin, an eluent is
used  to pump the sample through the column.  The cations  are  separated
depending on their radius and  valence.  After eluting from the separator
column,  the  ions  are converted to the corresponding  bases  which  are
detected in  a  conductance  cell  against  a  background  of neutralized
eluent.  This method can be found in Appendix F.
     The  second  acceptable method for determining ammonium is to use  a
gas sensing ion-selective electrode with a reference electrode.  Ammonium
ion is converted to ammonia gas when the pH of the sample is adjusted  to
pH 11-14.  An electrode potential develops across the sensing membrane in
proportion to the ammonia concentration in solution.  The meter/electrode
system is calibrated with  ammonium  solutions  of  known concentrations.
This method is included as Appendix L of this document.
     The  third method for determining ammonium in precipitation  samples
is the automated colorimetric  method  using the indophenol blue complex.
After removing cations that could form hydroxide complexes, the sample is

-------
                                                       Section No. 4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  8  of  9

•ixed with alkaline phenol and  hypochlorite  to form the indophenol blue
complex.   Sodium  nitroprusside  is added to  precipitation  samples  to
intensify the color.  The  concentration  of the ammonium is proportional
to the intensity of the indophenol blue complex measured colorimetrically
at 630 n».  This method can be found in Appendix L with the second method
described above.

4.12  DETERMINATION OF SODIUM, POTASSIUM,  MAGNESIUM AND CALCIUM

     Sodium,   potassium,   magnesium  and  calcium   are   measured   in
precipitation samples either by  chemically suppressed ion chromatography
or  flame  atomic absorption spec tropho tome try.  The ion  chroma tographic
procedure is identical to the one described in Section 4.11 for ammonium.
It can be found in Appendix F of this document.
     The  flame atomic absorption spectrophotometric method  of  analysis
for these metals  involves  aspirating  the sample into a flame where the
cations  are converted to ground state atoms.  A light beam from a hollow
cathode lamp which  emits  light  specific  to  the  metal of interest is
passed  through the flame, isolated by a monochromator and measured by  a
photodetector.  The ground  state  atoms  of the metal of interest absorb
the  light.  The concentration of the metal in the sample is proportional
to the amount of light absorbed in  the  flame.  This method is presented
in Appendix M.

4.13  DETERMINATION OF ALUMINUM, CADMIUM,  COPPER, IRON, LEAD, MANGANESE
      AND ZINC

Aluminum, cadmium, copper, iron, lead, manganese and zinc are measured in
precipitation    samples   by   graphite   furnace   atomic    absorption
spectrophotometry.  Microliter quantities  of sample are deposited into a
graphite  tube vhere it is electro thermally dried, pyrolyzed and atomized.

-------
                                                       Section No.  4
                                                       Revision No. 1
                                                       Date July 31, 1986
                                                       Page  9  of   9


A light bean from a hollow  cathode  lamp  which  emits a spectrally pure

line  source of light specific to the metal of interest is passed through

the atotts which are at  ground  state.   The  atraos of the specific metal

absorb  the light.  The concentration of the metal is propertinal to  the

amount of light absorbed  in  the  flame.   This  method  can be found in

Appendix N.


4.14  REFERENCE


1. Gran,  G.,  "Determination of the Equivalent Point  in  Potentiometric
   Titrations," Acta Chemica Scandinavica,  4, 1950, p. 559.

-------